* A Distributed Proofreaders Canada eBook *

This eBook is made available at no cost and with very few
restrictions. These restrictions apply only if (1) you make
a change in the eBook (other than alteration for different
display devices), or (2) you are making commercial use of
the eBook. If either of these conditions applies, please
contact an FP administrator before proceeding.

This work is in the Canadian public domain, but may be under
copyright in some countries. If you live outside Canada, check your
country's copyright laws. IF THE BOOK IS UNDER COPYRIGHT
IN YOUR COUNTRY, DO NOT DOWNLOAD OR REDISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.


Title: The Life and Strange Surprising Adventures of Robinson Crusoe,
       of York, Mariner, As Related By Himself
Date of first publication: unknown
Author: Daniel DeFoe (1661?-1731)
Illustrator: Noel Pocock (1880-1955)
Date first posted: April 1 2013
Date last updated: April 1 2013
Faded Page eBook #20130401

This ebook was produced by: David Edwards, Paul Ereaut
& the Online Distributed Proofreading Canada Team at http://www.pgdpcanada.net

(This file was produced from images generously made available by
The Internet Archive/American Libraries.)




  THE LIFE AND ADVENTURES OF
  ROBINSON CRUSOE



  [Illustration: "I formed nothing but dismal imaginations to myself."
  (See p. 182.)]



  THE LIFE AND STRANGE SURPRISING
  ADVENTURES OF
  ROBINSON CRUSOE,
  OF YORK, MARINER, AS
  RELATED BY HIMSELF

  By DANIEL DEFOE

  ILLUSTRATED BY
  NOEL POCOCK



  NEW YORK
  GEORGE H. DORAN COMPANY



  PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA




                               PREFACE


If ever the story of any private man's adventures in the world were
worth making public, and were acceptable when published, the Editor of
this account thinks this will be so.

The wonders of this man's life exceed all that (he thinks) is to be
found extant; the life of one man being scarce capable of a greater
variety.

The story is told with modesty, with seriousness, and with a religious
application of events to the uses to which wise men always apply them,
viz. to the instruction of others by this example, and to justify and
honour the wisdom of Providence in all the variety of our circumstances,
let them happen how they will.

The Editor believes the thing to be a just history of fact; neither is
there any appearance of fiction in it; and, however, thinks, because all
such things are despatched, that the improvement of it, as well to the
diversion as to the instruction of the reader, will be the same. And as
such, he thinks, without further compliment to the world, he does them a
great service in the publication.



                             ILLUSTRATIONS


   "I formed nothing but dismal imaginations to myself"
   (_see page_ 182)                           _Frontispiece_


                                                       PAGE

   "We were obliged to yield, and were carried all
   prisoners into Sallee"                                17

   "Here I meditated nothing but my escape"              33

   "I was now landed, and safe on shore"                 47

   "I fell fast asleep"                                  62

   "I guided my raft as well as I could to keep in the
   middle of the stream"                                 76

   "I believe it was the first gun that had been fired
   there since the creation of the world"                93

   "I smiled to myself at the sight of this money"      106

   "Swam across the channel, which lay between the
   ship and the sands, and even that with difficulty
   enough"                                              123

   "I turned homeward, the weather being exceeding
   hot"                                                 136

   "Most of the time was taken up in the weighty affair
   of making a cage for my Poll"                        153

   "I was a prisoner, locked up with the eternal bars
   and bolts of the ocean"                              166

   "This tree I was three days a-cutting down"          182

   "What odd, misshapen, ugly things I made"            197

   "In this government of my temper I remained near
   a year, living a very sedate, retired life"          213

   "I stood like one thunderstruck"                     224

   "To see if I could observe any boats upon the sea
   coming near the island"                              242

   "Looking farther into the place . . . I saw two
   broad shining eyes"                                  257

   "I was surprised with seeing a light of some fire
   upon the shore"                                      271

   "Had only the affliction, some days after, to see
   the corpse of a drowned boy come on shore"           286

   "I got all my cargo on shore, and began to examine
   the particulars"                                     302

   "They were all dancing, in I know not how many
   barbarous gestures and figures"                      316

   "I entered the wood . . . Friday following close at
   my heels"                                            330

   "Here they left them bound"                          344



THE LIFE AND ADVENTURES OF
ROBINSON CRUSOE




THE LIFE AND ADVENTURES OF ROBINSON CRUSOE


I was born in the year 1632, in the city of York, of a good family,
though not of that country, my father being a foreigner of Bremen, who
settled first at Hull. He got a good estate by merchandise, and leaving
off his trade, lived afterward at York, from whence he had married my
mother, whose relations were named Robinson, a very good family in that
country, and from whom I was called Robinson Kreutznaer; but by the
usual corruption of words in England we are now called, nay, we call
ourselves, and write our name, Crusoe, and so my companions always
called me.

I had two elder brothers, one of which was lieutenant-colonel to an
English regiment of foot in Flanders, formerly commanded by the famous
Colonel Lockhart, and was killed at the battle near Dunkirk against the
Spaniards; what became of my second brother I never knew, any more than
my father and mother did know what was become of me.

Being the third son of the family, and not bred to any trade, my head
began to be filled very early with rambling thoughts. My father, who was
very ancient, had given me a competent share of learning, as far as
house-education and a country free school generally goes, and designed
me for the law; but I would be satisfied with nothing but going to sea;
and my inclination to this led me so strongly against the will, nay,
the commands, of my father, and against all the entreaties and
persuasions of my mother and other friends, that there seemed to be
something fatal in that propension of nature tending directly to the
life of misery which was to befall me.

My father, a wise and grave man, gave me serious and excellent counsel
against what he foresaw was my design. He called me one morning into his
chamber, where he was confined by the gout, and expostulated very warmly
with me upon this subject. He asked me what reasons more than a mere
wandering inclination I had for leaving my father's house and my native
country, where I might be well introduced, and had a prospect of raising
my fortunes by application and industry, with a life of ease and
pleasure. He told me it was for men of desperate fortunes on one hand,
or of aspiring, superior fortunes on the other, who went abroad upon
adventures, to rise by enterprise, and make themselves famous in
undertakings of a nature out of the common road; that these things were
all either too far above me, or too far below me; that mine was the
middle state or what might be called the upper station of low life,
which he had found by long experience was the best state in the world,
the most suited to human happiness, not exposed to the miseries and
hardships, the labour and sufferings, of the mechanic part of mankind,
and not embarrassed with the pride, luxury, ambition, and envy of the
upper part of mankind. He told me I might judge of the happiness of this
state by this one thing, viz., that this was the state of life which all
other people envied; that kings have frequently lamented the miserable
consequences of being born to great things, and wished they had been
placed in the middle of the two extremes, between the mean and the
great; that the wise man gave his testimony to this as the just
standard of true felicity, when he prayed to have neither poverty nor
riches.

He bid me observe it, and I should always find, that the calamities of
life were shared among the upper and lower part of mankind; but that the
middle station had the fewest disasters, and was not exposed to so many
vicissitudes as the higher or lower part of mankind. Nay, they were not
subjected to so many distempers and uneasiness either of body or mind as
those were who, by vicious living, luxury, and extravagances on one
hand, or by hard labour, want of necessaries, and mean or insufficient
diet on the other hand, bring distempers upon themselves by the natural
consequences of their way of living; that the middle station of life was
calculated for all kind of virtues and all kind of enjoyments; that
peace and plenty were the handmaids of a middle fortune; that
temperance, moderation, quietness, health, society, all agreeable
diversions, and all desirable pleasures, were the blessings attending
the middle station of life; that this way men went silently and smoothly
through the world, and comfortably out of it, not embarrassed with the
labours of the hands or of the head, not sold to the life of slavery for
daily bread, or harassed with perplexed circumstances, which rob the
soul of peace, and the body of rest; not enraged with the passion of
envy, or secret burning lust of ambition for great things; but in easy
circumstances sliding gently through the world, and sensibly tasting the
sweets of living, without the bitter, feeling that they are happy, and
learning by every day's experience to know it more sensibly.

After this, he pressed me earnestly, and in the most affectionate
manner, not to play the young man, not to precipitate myself into
miseries which Nature and the station of life I was born in seemed to
have provided against; that I was under no necessity of seeking my
bread; that he would do well for me, and endeavour to enter me fairly
into the station of life which he had been just recommending to me; and
that if I was not very easy and happy in the world it must be my mere
fate or fault that must hinder it, and that he should have nothing to
answer for, having thus discharged his duty in warning me against
measures which he knew would be to my hurt; in a word, that as he would
do very kind things for me if I would stay and settle at home as he
directed, so he would not have so much hand in my misfortunes, as to
give me any encouragement to go away. And to close all, he told me I had
my elder brother for an example, to whom he had used the same earnest
persuasions to keep him from going into the Low Country wars, but could
not prevail, his young desires prompting him to run into the army, where
he was killed; and though he said he would not cease to pray for me, yet
he would venture to say to me, that if I did take this foolish step, God
would not bless me, and I would have leisure hereafter to reflect upon
having neglected his counsel when there might be none to assist in my
recovery.

I observed in this last part of his discourse, which was truly
prophetic, though I suppose my father did not know it to be so
himself--I say, I observed the tears run down his face very plentifully,
and especially when he spoke of my brother who was killed; and that when
he spoke of my having leisure to repent, and none to assist me, he was
so moved, that he broke off the discourse, and told me, his heart was so
full he could say no more to me.

I was sincerely affected with this discourse, as, indeed, who could be
otherwise; and I resolved not to think of going abroad any more, but to
settle at home according to my father's desire. But alas! a few days
wore it all off; and, in short, to prevent any of my father's farther
importunities, in a few weeks after I resolved to run quite away from
him. However, I did not act so hastily neither as my first heat of
resolution prompted, but I took my mother, at a time when I thought her
a little pleasanter than ordinary, and told her, that my thoughts were
so entirely bent upon seeing the world, that I should never settle to
anything with resolution enough to go through with it, and my father had
better give me his consent than force me to go without it; that I was
now eighteen years old, which was too late to go apprentice to a trade,
or clerk to an attorney; that I was sure if I did, I should never serve
out my time, and I should certainly run away from my master before my
time was out, and go to sea; and if she would speak to my father to let
me go but one voyage abroad, if I came home again and did not like it, I
would go no more, and I would promise by a double diligence to recover
that time I had lost.

This put my mother into a great passion. She told me, she knew it would
be to no purpose to speak to my father upon any such subject; that he
knew too well what was my interest to give his consent to anything so
much for my hurt, and that she wondered how I could think of any such
thing after such a discourse as I had had with my father, and such kind
and tender expressions as she knew my father had used to me; and that,
in short, if I would ruin myself there was no help for me; but I might
depend I should never have their consent to it; that for her part, she
would not have so much hand in my destruction, and I should never have
it to say that my mother was willing when my father was not.

Though my mother refused to move it to my father, yet, as I have heard
afterwards, she reported all the discourse to him, and that my father,
after showing a great concern at it, said to her with a sigh, "That boy
might be happy if he would stay at home, but if he goes abroad he will
be the miserablest wretch that was ever born: I can give no consent to
it."

It was not till almost a year after this that I broke loose, though in
the meantime I continued obstinately deaf to all proposals of settling
to business, and frequently expostulating with my father and mother
about their being so positively determined against what they knew my
inclinations prompted me to. But being one day at Hull, where I went
casually, and without any purpose of making an elopement that time; but
I say, being there, and one of my companions being going by sea to
London, in his father's ship, and prompting me to go with them, with the
common allurement of seafaring men, viz., that it should cost me nothing
for my passage, I consulted neither father nor mother any more, nor so
much as sent them word of it; but leaving them to hear of it as they
might, without asking God's blessing, or my father's, without any
consideration of circumstances or consequences, and in an ill hour, God
knows, on the first of September, 1651, I went on board a ship bound for
London. Never any young adventurer's misfortunes, I believe, began
sooner, or continued longer than mine. The ship was no sooner gotten out
of the Humber, but the wind began to blow, and the waves to rise in a
most frightful manner; and as I had never been at sea before, I was most
inexpressibly sick in body, and terrified in my mind. I began now
seriously to reflect upon what I had done, and how justly I was
overtaken by the judgment of heaven for my wicked leaving my father's
house, and abandoning my duty; all the good counsel of my parents, my
father's tears and my mother's entreaties, came now fresh into my
mind, and my conscience, which was not yet come to the pitch of hardness
which it has been since, reproached me with the contempt of advice, and
the breach of my duty to God and my father.

[Illustration: "We were obliged to yield, and were carried all prisoners
into Sallee." (See p. 29.)]

All this while the storm increased, and the sea, which I had never been
upon before, went very high, though nothing like what I have seen many
times since; no, nor like what I saw a few days after. But it was enough
to affect me then, who was but a young sailor, and had never known
anything of the matter. I expected every wave would have swallowed us
up, and that every time the ship fell down, as I thought, in the trough
or hollow of the sea, we should never rise more; and in this agony of
mind I made many vows and resolutions, that if it would please God here
to spare my life this one voyage, if ever I got once my foot upon dry
land again, I would go directly home to my father, and never set it into
a ship again while I lived; that I would take his advice, and never run
myself into such miseries as these any more. Now I saw plainly the
goodness of his observations about the middle station of life, how easy,
how comfortably he had lived all his days, and never had been exposed to
tempests at sea, or troubles on shore; and I resolved that I would, like
a true repenting prodigal, go home to my father.

These wise and sober thoughts continued all the while the storm
continued, and indeed some time after; but the next day the wind was
abated and the sea calmer, and I began to be a little inured to it.
However, I was very grave for all that day, being also a little sea-sick
still; but towards night the weather cleared up, the wind was quite
over, and a charming fine evening followed; the sun went down perfectly
clear, and rose so the next morning; and having little or no wind, and a
smooth sea, the sun shining upon it, the sight was, as I thought, the
most delightful that ever I saw.

I had slept well in the night, and was now no more sea-sick but very
cheerful, looking with wonder upon the sea that was so rough and
terrible the day before, and could be so calm and so pleasant in so
little time after. And now lest my good resolutions should continue,
my companion, who had indeed enticed me away, comes to me: "Well,
Bob," says he, clapping me on the shoulder, "how do you do after it? I
warrant you were frighted, wa'n't you, last night, when it blew but a
capful of wind?" "A capful, d'you call it?" said I; "'twas a terrible
storm." "A storm, you fool you," replies he; "do you call that a
storm? Why, it was nothing at all; give us but a good ship and
sea-room, and we think nothing of such a squall of wind as that; but
you're but a fresh-water sailor, Bob. Come, let us make a bowl of
punch, and we'll forget all that; d'ye see what charming weather 'tis
now?" To make short this sad part of my story, we went the old way of
all sailors; the punch was made, and I was made drunk with it, and in
that one night's wickedness I drowned all my repentance, all my
reflections upon my past conduct, and all my resolutions for my
future. In a word, as the sea was returned to its smoothness of
surface and settled calmness by the abatement of that storm, so the
hurry of my thoughts being over, my fears and apprehensions of being
swallowed up by the sea being forgotten, and the current of my former
desires returned, I entirely forgot the vows and promises that I made
in my distress. I found indeed some intervals of reflection, and the
serious thoughts did, as it were, endeavour to return again sometimes;
but I shook them off, and roused myself from them as it were from a
distemper, and applying myself to drink and company, soon mastered the
return of those fits, for so I called them, and I had in five or six
days got as complete a victory over conscience as any young fellow
that resolved not to be troubled with it could desire. But I was to
have another trial for it still; and Providence, as in such cases
generally it does, resolved to leave me entirely without excuse. For
if I would not take this for a deliverance, the next was to be such a
one as the worst and most hardened wretch among us would confess both
the danger and the mercy.

The sixth day of our being at sea we came into Yarmouth Roads; the wind
having been contrary and the weather calm, we had made but little way
since the storm. Here we were obliged to come to an anchor, and here we
lay, the wind continuing contrary, viz., at south-west, for seven or
eight days, during which time a great many ships from Newcastle came
into the same roads, as the common harbour where the ships might wait
for a wind for the river.

We had not, however, rid here so long, but should have tided it up the
river, but that the wind blew too fresh; and after we had lain four or
five days, blew very hard. However, the roads being reckoned as good as
a harbour, the anchorage good, and our ground-tackle very strong, our
men were unconcerned, and not in the least apprehensive of danger, but
spent the time in rest and mirth, after the manner of the sea; but the
eighth day in the morning the wind increased, and we had all hands at
work to strike our top-masts, and make everything snug and close, that
the ship might ride as easy as possible. By noon the sea went very high
indeed, and our ship rid forecastle in, shipped several seas, and we
thought once or twice our anchor had come home; upon which our master
ordered out the sheet-anchor, so that we rode with two anchors ahead,
and the cables veered out to the better end.

By this time it blew a terrible storm indeed, and now I began to see
terror and amazement in the faces even of the seamen themselves. The
master, though vigilant to the business of preserving the ship, yet as
he went in and out of his cabin by me, I could hear him softly to
himself say several times, "Lord be merciful to us, we shall be all
lost, we shall be all undone"; and the like. During these first hurries
I was stupid, lying still in my cabin, which was in the steerage, and
cannot describe my temper; I could ill re-assume the first penitence,
which I had so apparently trampled upon, and hardened myself against; I
thought the bitterness of death had been past, and that this would be
nothing too, like the first. But when the master himself came by me, as
I said just now, and said we should be all lost, I was dreadfully
frightened; I got up out of my cabin, and looked out. But such a dismal
sight I never saw; the sea went mountains high, and broke upon us every
three or four minutes; when I could look about, I could see nothing but
distress round us. Two ships that rid near us we found had cut their
masts by the board, being deep loaden; and our men cried out, that a
ship which rid about a mile ahead of us was foundered. Two more ships
being driven from their anchors, were run out of the roads to sea at all
adventures, and that with not a mast standing. The light ships fared the
best, as not so much labouring in the sea; but two or three of them
drove, and came close by us, running away with only their sprit-sail out
before the wind.

Towards evening the mate and boatswain begged the master of our ship to
let them cut away the fore-mast, which he was very unwilling to. But the
boatswain protesting to him that if he did not the ship would founder,
he consented; and when they had cut away the fore-mast, the main-mast
stood so loose, and shook the ship so much, they were obliged to cut
her away also, and make a clear deck.

Any one may judge what a condition I must be in at all this, who was but
a young sailor, and who had been in such a fright before at but a
little. But if I can express at this distance the thoughts I had about
me at that time, I was in tenfold more horror of mind upon account of my
former convictions, and the having returned from them to the resolutions
I had wickedly taken at first, than I was at death itself; and these,
added to the terror of the storm, put me into such a condition, that I
can by no words describe it. But the worst was not come yet; the storm
continued with such fury, that the seamen themselves acknowledged they
had never known a worse. We had a good ship, but she was deep loaden,
and wallowed in the sea, that the seamen every now and then cried out
she would founder. It was my advantage in one respect, that I did not
know what they meant by founder till I inquired. However, the storm was
so violent, that I saw what is not often seen, the master, the
boatswain, and some others more sensible than the rest, at their
prayers, and expecting every moment when the ship would go to the
bottom. In the middle of the night, and under all the rest of our
distresses, one of the men that had been down on purpose to see cried
out we had sprung a leak; another said there was four foot water in the
hold. Then all hands were called to the pump. At that very word my
heart, as I thought, died within me, and I fell backwards upon the side
of my bed where I sat, into the cabin. However, the men roused me, and
told me, that I, that was able to do nothing before, was as well able to
pump as another; at which I stirred up and went to the pump and worked
very heartily. While this was doing, the master seeing some light
colliers, who, not able to ride out the storm, were obliged to slip and
run away to sea, and would come near us, ordered to fire a gun as a
signal of distress. I, who knew nothing what that meant, was so
surprised that I thought the ship had broke, or some dreadful thing had
happened. In a word, I was so surprised that I fell down in a swoon. As
this was a time when everybody had his own life to think of, nobody
minded me, or what was become of me; but another man stepped up to the
pump, and thrusting me aside with his foot, let me lie, thinking I had
been dead; and it was a great while before I came to myself.

We worked on, but the water increasing in the hold, it was apparent that
the ship would founder, and though the storm began to abate a little,
yet as it was not possible she could swim till we might run into a port,
so the master continued firing guns for help; and a light ship, who had
rid it out just ahead of us, ventured a boat out to help us. It was with
the utmost hazard the boat came near us, but it was impossible for us to
get on board, or for the boat to lie near the ship's side, till at last
the men rowing very heartily, and venturing their lives to save ours,
our men cast them a rope over the stern with a buoy to it, and then
veered it out a great length, which they after great labour and hazard
took hold of, and we hauled them close under our stern, and got all into
their boat. It was to no purpose for them or us after we were in the
boat to think of reaching to their own ship, so all agreed to let her
drive, and only to pull her in towards shore as much as we could, and
our master promised them that if the boat was staved upon shore he would
make it good to their master; so partly rowing and partly driving, our
boat went away to the norward, sloping towards the shore almost as far
as Winterton Ness.

We were not much more than a quarter of an hour out of our ship but we
saw her sink, and then I understood for the first time what was meant by
a ship foundering in the sea. I must acknowledge I had hardly eyes to
look up when the seamen told me she was sinking; for from that moment
they rather put me into the boat than that I might be said to go in; my
heart was as it were dead within me, partly with fright, partly with
horror of mind and the thoughts of what was yet before me.

While we were in this condition, the men yet labouring at the oar to
bring the boat near the shore, we could see, when, our boat mounting the
waves, we were able to see the shore, a great many people running along
the shore to assist us when we should come near. But we made but slow
way towards the shore, nor were we able to reach the shore, till being
past the lighthouse at Winterton, the shore falls off to the westward
towards Cromer, and so the land broke off a little the violence of the
wind. Here we got in, and though not without much difficulty got all
safe on shore, and walked afterwards on foot to Yarmouth, where, as
unfortunate men, we were used with great humanity as well by the
magistrates of the town, who assigned us good quarters, as by particular
merchants and owners of ships, and had money given us sufficient to
carry us either to London or back to Hull, as we thought fit.

Had I now had the sense to have gone back to Hull and have gone home, I
had been happy, and my father, an emblem of our blessed Saviour's
parable, had even killed the fatted calf for me; for hearing the ship I
went away in was cast away in Yarmouth Road, it was a great while before
he had any assurance that I was not drowned.

But my ill-fate pushed me on now with an obstinacy that nothing could
resist; and though I had several times loud calls from my reason and my
more composed judgment to go home, yet I had no power to do it. I know
not what to call this, nor will I urge that it is a secret overruling
decree that hurries us on to be the instruments of our own destruction,
even though it be before us, and that we rush upon it with our eyes
open. Certainly nothing but some such decreed unavoidable misery
attending, and which it was impossible for me to escape, could have
pushed me forward against the calm reasonings and persuasions of my most
retired thoughts, and against two such visible instructions as I had met
with in my first attempt.

My comrade, who had helped to harden me before, and who was the master's
son, was now less forward than I. The first time he spoke to me after we
were at Yarmouth, which was not till two or three days, for we were
separated in the town to several quarters--I say, the first time he saw
me, it appeared his tone was altered, and looking very melancholy and
shaking his head, asked me how I did, and telling his father who I was,
and how I had come this voyage only for a trial in order to get farther
abroad, his father turning to me with a very grave and concerned tone,
"Young man," says he, "you ought never to go to sea any more, you ought
to take this for a plain and visible token, that you are not to be a
seafaring man." "Why, sir," said I, "will you go to sea no more?" "That
is another case," said he; "it is my calling, and therefore, my duty;
but as you made this voyage for a trial, you see what a taste Heaven has
given you of what you are to expect if you persist; perhaps this is all
befallen us on your account, like Jonah in the ship of Tarshish. Pray,"
continues he, "what are you? and on what account did you go to sea?"
Upon that I told him some of my story, at the end of which he burst out
with a strange kind of passion. "What had I done," says he, "that such
an unhappy wretch should come into my ship? I would not set my foot in
the same ship with thee again for a thousand pounds." This indeed was,
as I said, an excursion of his spirits, which were yet agitated by the
sense of his loss, and was farther than he could have authority to go.
However, he afterwards talked very gravely to me, exhorted me to go back
to my father, and not tempt Providence to my ruin; told me I might see a
visible hand of Heaven against me. "And, young man," said he, "depend
upon it, if you do not go back, wherever you go you will meet with
nothing but disasters and disappointments, till your father's words are
fulfilled upon you."

We parted soon after; for I made him little answer, and I saw him no
more; which way he went, I know not. As for me, having some money in my
pocket, I travelled to London by land; and there, as well as on the
road, had many struggles with myself what course of life I should take,
and whether I should go home, or go to sea.

As to going home, shame opposed the best motions that offered to my
thoughts; and it immediately occurred to me how I should be laughed at
among the neighbours, and should be ashamed to see, not my father and
mother only, but even everybody else; from whence I have since often
observed how incongruous and irrational the common temper of mankind is,
especially of youth, to that reason which ought to guide them in such
cases, viz., that they are not ashamed to sin, and yet are ashamed to
repent; not ashamed of the action for which they ought justly to be
esteemed fools, but are ashamed of the returning, which only can make
them be esteemed wise men.

In this state of life, however, I remained some time, uncertain what
measures to take, and what course of life to lead. An irresistible
reluctance continued to going home; and as I stayed a while, the
remembrance of the distress I had been in wore off; and as that abated,
the little motion I had in my desires to a return wore off with it, till
at last I quite laid aside the thoughts of it, and looked out for a
voyage.

That evil influence which carried me first away from my father's house,
that hurried me into the wild and indigested notion of raising my
fortune, and that impressed those conceits so forcibly upon me as to
make me deaf to all good advice, and to the entreaties and even command
of my father--I say, the same influence, whatever it was, presented the
most unfortunate of all enterprises to my view; and I went on board a
vessel bound to the coast of Africa, or, as our sailors vulgarly call
it, a voyage to Guinea.

It was my great misfortune that in all these adventures I did not ship
myself as a sailor, whereby, though I might indeed have worked a little
harder than ordinary, yet at the same time I had learned the duty and
office of a fore-mast man, and in time might have qualified myself for a
mate or lieutenant, if not for a master. But as it was always my fate to
choose for the worse, so I did here; for having money in my pocket, and
good clothes upon my back, I would always go on board in the habit of a
gentleman; and so I neither had any business in the ship, or learned to
do any.

It was my lot first of all to fall into pretty good company in London,
which does not always happen to such loose and misguided young fellows
as I then was; the devil generally not omitting to lay some snare for
them very early; but it was not so with me. I first fell acquainted with
the master of a ship who had been on the coast of Guinea, and who,
having had very good success there, was resolved to go again; and who,
taking a fancy to my conversation, which was not at all disagreeable at
that time, hearing me say I had a mind to see the world, told me if I
would go the voyage with him I should be at no expense; I should be his
messmate and his companion; and if I could carry anything with me, I
should have all the advantage of it that the trade would admit, and
perhaps I might meet with some encouragement.

I embraced the offer; and, entering into a strict friendship with this
captain, who was an honest and plain-dealing man, I went the voyage with
him, and carried a small adventure with me, which, by the disinterested
honesty of my friend the captain, I increased very considerably, for I
carried about £40 in such toys and trifles as the captain directed me to
buy. This £40 I had mustered together by the assistance of some of my
relations whom I corresponded with, and who, I believe, got my father,
or at least my mother, to contribute so much as that to my first
adventure.

This was the only voyage which I may say was successful in all my
adventures, and which I owe to the integrity and honesty of my friend
the captain; under whom also I got a competent knowledge of the
mathematics and the rules of navigation, learned how to keep an account
of the ship's course, take an observation, and, in short, to understand
some things that were needful to be understood by a sailor. For, as he
took delight to introduce me, I took delight to learn; and, in a word,
this voyage made me both a sailor and a merchant; for I brought home
five pounds nine ounces of gold dust for my adventure, which yielded me
in London at my return almost £300, and this filled me with those
aspiring thoughts which have since so completed my ruin.

Yet even in this voyage I had my misfortunes too; particularly, that I
was continually sick, being thrown into a violent calenture by the
excessive heat of the climate; our principal trading being upon the
coast, from the latitude of 15 degrees north even to the line itself.

I was now set up for a Guinea trader; and my friend, to my great
misfortune, dying soon after his arrival, I resolved to go the same
voyage again, and I embarked in the same vessel with one who was his
mate in the former voyage, and had now got the command of the ship. This
was the unhappiest voyage that ever man made; for though I did not carry
quite £100 of my new-gained wealth, so that I had £200 left, and which I
lodged with my friend's widow, who was very just to me, yet I fell into
terrible misfortunes in this voyage; and the first was this, viz., our
ship making her course towards the Canary Islands, or rather between
those islands and the African shore, was surprised in the grey of the
morning by a Turkish rover of Sallee, who gave chase to us with all the
sail she could make. We crowded also as much canvas as our yards would
spread, or our masts carry, to have got clear; but finding the pirate
gained upon us, and would certainly come up with us in a few hours, we
prepared to fight, our ship having twelve guns, and the rogue eighteen.
About three in the afternoon he came up with us, and bringing to, by
mistake, just athwart our quarter, instead of athwart our stern, as he
intended, we brought eight of our guns to bear on that side, and poured
in a broadside upon him, which made him sheer off again, after returning
our fire and pouring in also his small-shot from near 200 men which he
had on board. However, we had not a man touched, all our men keeping
close. He prepared to attack us again, and we to defend ourselves; but
laying us on board the next time upon our other quarter, he entered
sixty men upon our decks, who immediately fell to cutting and hacking
the decks and rigging. We plied them with small-shot, half-pikes,
powder-chests, and such like, and cleared our deck of them twice.
However, to cut short this melancholy part of our story, our ship being
disabled, and three of our men killed and eight wounded, we were obliged
to yield, and were carried all prisoners into Sallee, a port belonging
to the Moors.

The usage I had there was not so dreadful as at first I apprehended, nor
was I carried up the country to the emperor's court, as the rest of our
men were, but was kept by the captain of the rover as his proper prize,
and made his slave, being young and nimble, and fit for his business. At
this surprising change of my circumstances from a merchant to a
miserable slave, I was perfectly overwhelmed; and now I looked back upon
my father's prophetic discourse to me, that I should be miserable, and
have none to relieve me, which I thought was now so effectually brought
to pass, that it could not be worse; that now the hand of Heaven had
overtaken me, and I was undone without redemption. But alas; this was
but a taste of the misery I was to go through, as will appear in the
sequel of this story.

As my new patron, or master, had taken me home to his house, so I was in
hopes that he would take me with him when he went to sea again,
believing that it would some time or other be his fate to be taken by a
Spanish or Portugal man-o'-war; and that then I should be set at
liberty. But this hope of mine was soon taken away; for when he went to
sea, he left me on shore to look after his little garden, and do the
common drudgery of slaves about his house; and when he came home again
from his cruise, he ordered me to lie in the cabin to look after the
ship.

Here I meditated nothing but my escape, and what method I might take to
effect it, but found no way that had the least probability in it.
Nothing presented to make the supposition of it rational; for I had
nobody to communicate it to that would embark with me, no fellow-slave,
no Englishman, Irishman, or Scotsman there but myself; so that for two
years, though I often pleased myself with the imagination, yet I never
had the least encouraging prospect of putting it in practice.

After about two years an odd circumstance presented itself, which put
the old thought of making some attempt for my liberty again in my head.
My patron lying at home longer than usual without fitting out his ship,
which, as I heard, was for want of money, he used constantly, once or
twice a week, sometimes oftener, if the weather was fair, to take the
ship's pinnace, and go out into the road a-fishing; and as he always
took me and a young Maresco with him to row the boat, we made him very
merry, and I proved very dexterous in catching fish; insomuch, that
sometimes he would send me with a Moor, one of his kinsmen, and the
youth the Maresco, as they called him, to catch a dish of fish for him.

It happened one time that, going a-fishing in a stark calm morning, a
fog rose so thick, that though we were not half a league from the shore
we lost sight of it; and rowing we knew not whither or which way, we
laboured all day, and all the next night, and when the morning came we
found we had pulled off to sea instead of pulling in for the shore; and
that we were at least two leagues from the shore. However, we got well
in again, though with a great deal of labour, and some danger, for the
wind began to blow pretty fresh in the morning; but particularly we were
all very hungry.

But our patron, warned by this disaster, resolved to take more care of
himself for the future; and having lying by him the long-boat of our
English ship which he had taken, he resolved he would not go a-fishing
any more without a compass and some provision; so he ordered the
carpenter of his ship, who also was an English slave, to build a little
state-room, or cabin, in the middle of the long-boat, like that of a
barge, with a place to stand behind it to steer and haul home the
main-sheet, and room before for a hand or two to stand and work the
sails. She sailed with what we call a shoulder-of-mutton sail; and the
boom jibbed over the top of the cabin, which lay very snug and low, and
had in it room for him to lie, with a slave or two, and a table to eat
on, with some small lockers to put in some bottles of such liquor as he
thought fit to drink; particularly his bread, rice, and coffee.

We went frequently out with this boat a-fishing, and as I was most
dexterous to catch fish for him, he never went without me. It happened
that he had appointed to go out in this boat, either for pleasure or for
fish, with two or three Moors of some distinction in that place, and for
whom he had provided extraordinarily; and had therefore sent on board
the boat overnight a larger store of provisions than ordinary; and had
ordered me to get ready three fuzees with powder and shot, which were on
board his ship, for that they designed some sport of fowling as well as
fishing.

I got all things ready as he had directed, and waited the next morning
with the boat, washed clean, her ancient and pendants out, and
everything to accommodate his guests; when by and by my patron came on
board alone, and told me his guests had put off going, upon some
business that fell out, and ordered me with the man and boy, as usual,
to go out with the boat and catch them some fish, for that his friends
were to sup at his house; and commanded that as soon as I had got some
fish I should bring it home to his house; all which I prepared to do.

This moment my former notions of deliverance darted into my thoughts,
for now I found I was like to have a little ship at my command; and my
master being gone I prepared to furnish myself, not for a fishing
business, but for a voyage; though I knew not, neither did I so much as
consider, whither I should steer; for anywhere, to get out of that
place, was my way.

My first contrivance was to make a pretence to speak to this Moor, to
get something for our subsistence on board; for I told him we must not
presume to eat of our patron's bread. He said that was true; so he
brought a large basket of rusk or biscuit of their kind, and three jars
with fresh water, into the boat. I knew where my patron's case of
bottles stood, which it was evident by the make were taken out of some
English prize; and I conveyed them into the boat while the Moor was on
shore, as if they had been there before for our master. I conveyed also
a great lump of beeswax into the boat, which weighed above half a
hundredweight, with a parcel of twine or thread, a hatchet, a saw, and a
hammer, all which were great use to us afterwards, especially the wax to
make candles. Another trick I tried upon him, which he innocently came
into also. His name was Ismael, who they call Muly, or Moely; so I
called to him, "Moely," said I, "our patron's guns are on board the
boat; can you not get a little powder and shot? it may be we may kill
some alcamies (a fowl like our curlews) for ourselves, for I know he
keeps the gunner's stores in the ship." "Yes," says he, "I'll bring
some"; and accordingly he brought a great leather pouch which held about
a pound and a half of powder, or rather more; and another with shot,
that had five or six pounds with some bullets, and put all into the
boat. At the same time I had found some powder of my master's in the
great cabin, with which I filled one of the large bottles in the case,
which was almost empty, pouring what was in it into another; and thus
furnished with everything needful, we sailed out of the port to fish.
The castle, which is at the entrance of the port, knew who we were, and
took no notice of us; and we were not above a mile out of the port
before we hauled in our sail, and set us down to fish. The wind blew
from the N.N.E., which was contrary to my desire; for had it blown
southerly I had been sure to have made the coast of Spain, and at least
reached to the bay of Cadiz; but my resolutions were, blow which way it
would, I would be gone from the horrid place where I was, and leave the
rest to Fate.

[Illustration: "Here I meditated nothing but my escape." (See p. 30.)]

After we had fished some time and catched nothing, for when I had fish
on my hook I would not pull them up, that he might not see them, I said
to the Moor, "This will not do; our master will not be thus served; we
must stand farther off." He, thinking no harm, agreed, and being in the
head of the boat set the sails; and as I had the helm I run the boat out
near a league farther, and then brought her to as if I would fish; when
giving the boy the helm, I stepped forward to where the Moor was, and
making as if I stooped for something behind him, I took him by surprise
with my arm under his twist, and tossed him clear overboard into the
sea. He rose immediately, for he swam like a cork, and called to me,
begged to be taken in, told me he would go all the world over with me.
He swam so strong after the boat, that he would have reached me very
quickly, there being but little wind; upon which I stepped into the
cabin, and fetching one of the fowling-pieces, I presented it at him,
and told him I had done him no hurt, and if he would be quiet I would do
him none. "But," said I, "you swim well enough to reach to the shore,
and the sea is calm; make the best of your way to shore, and I will do
you no harm; but if you come near the boat I'll shoot you through the
head, for I am resolved to have my liberty." So he turned himself about,
and swam for the shore, and I make no doubt but he reached it with ease,
for he was an excellent swimmer.

I could have been content to have taken this Moor with me, and have
drowned the boy, but there was no venturing to trust him. When he was
gone I turned to the boy, whom they called Xury, and said to him, "Xury,
if you will be faithful to me I'll make you a great man; but if you will
not stroke your face to be true to me," that is, swear by Mahomet and
his father's beard, "I must throw you into the sea too." The boy smiled
in my face, and spoke so innocently, that I could not mistrust him, and
swore to be faithful to me, and go all over the world with me.

While I was in view of the Moor that was swimming, I stood out directly
to sea with the boat, rather stretching to windward, that they might
think me gone toward the straits' mouth (as indeed any one that had been
in their wits must have been supposed to do); for who would have
supposed we were sailed on to the southward to the truly barbarian
coast, where whole nations of negroes were sure to surround us with
their canoes, and destroy us; where we could ne'er once go on shore but
we should be devoured by savage beasts, or more merciless savages of
human kind?

But as soon as it grew dusk in the evening, I changed my course, and
steered directly south and by east, bending my course a little toward
the east, that I might keep in with the shore; and having a fair, fresh
gale of wind, and a smooth, quiet sea, I made such sail that I believe
by the next day at three o'clock in the afternoon, when I first made the
land, I could not be less than 150 miles south of Sallee; quite beyond
the Emperor of Morocco's dominions, or indeed of any other king
thereabouts, for we saw no people.

Yet such was the fright I had taken at the Moors, and the dreadful
apprehensions I had of falling into their hands, that I would not stop,
or go on shore, or come to anchor, the wind continuing fair, till I had
sailed in that manner five days; and then the wind shifting to the
southward, I concluded also that if any of our vessels were in chase of
me, they also would now give over; so I ventured to make to the coast,
and came to an anchor in the mouth of a little river, I knew not what,
or where; neither what latitude, what country, what nations, or what
river. I neither saw, or desired to see, any people; the principal thing
I wanted was fresh water. We came into this creek in the evening,
resolving to swim on shore as soon as it was dark, and discover the
country; but as soon as it was quite dark we heard such dreadful noises
of the barking, roaring, and howling of wild creatures, of we knew not
what kinds, that the poor boy was ready to die with fear, and begged of
me not to go on shore till day. "Well, Xury," said I, "then I won't; but
it may be we may see men by day, who will be as bad to us as those
lions." "Then we give them the shoot gun," says Xury, laughing; "make
them run away." Such English Xury spoke by conversing among us slaves.
However, I was glad to see the boy so cheerful, and I gave him a dram
(out of our patron's case of bottles) to cheer him up. After all, Xury's
advice was good, and I took it; we dropped our little anchor and lay
still all night. I say still, for we slept none; for in two or three
hours we saw vast great creatures (we knew not what to call them) of
many sorts come down to the sea-shore and run into the water, wallowing
and washing themselves for the pleasure of cooling themselves; and they
made such hideous howlings and yellings, that I never indeed heard the
like.

Xury was dreadfully frighted, and indeed so was I too; but we were both
more frighted when we heard one of these mighty creatures come swimming
towards our boat; we could not see him, but we might hear him by his
blowing to be a monstrous huge and furious beast. Xury said it was a
lion, and it might be so for aught I know; but poor Xury cried to me to
weigh the anchor and row away. "No," says I, "Xury; we can slip our
cable with the buoy to it, and go off to sea; they cannot follow us
far." I had no sooner said so, but I perceived the creature (whatever it
was) within two oars' length, which something surprised me; however, I
immediately stepped to the cabin door, and taking up my gun, fired at
him, upon which he immediately turned about and swam towards the shore
again.

But it is impossible to describe the horrible noises, and hideous cries
and howlings, that were raised, as well upon the edge of the shore as
higher within the country, upon the noise or report of the gun, a thing
I have some reason to believe those creatures had never heard before.
This convinced me that there was no going on shore for us in the night
upon that coast; and how to venture on shore in the day was another
question too; for to have fallen into the hands of any of the savages,
had been as bad as to have fallen into the hands of lions and tigers; at
least we were equally apprehensive of the danger of it.

Be that as it would, we were obliged to go on shore somewhere or other
for water, for we had not a pint left in the boat; when or where to get
to it, was the point. Xury said if I would let him go on shore with one
of the jars, he would find if there was any water and bring some to me.
I asked him why he would go? why I should not go and he stay in the
boat? The boy answered with so much affection, that made me love him
ever after. Says he, "If wild man come, they eat me, you go way." "Well,
Xury," said I, "we will both go; and if the wild mans come, we will kill
them, they shall eat neither of us." So I gave Xury a piece of rusk
bread to eat, and a dram out of our patron's case of bottles which I
mentioned before; and we hauled in the boat as near the shore as we
thought was proper, and so waded on shore, carrying nothing but our arms
and two jars for water.

I did not care to go out of sight of the boat, fearing the coming of
canoes with savages down the river; but the boy seeing a low place about
a mile up the country, rambled to it; and by and by I saw him come
running towards me. I thought he was pursued by some savage, or frighted
with some wild beast, and I ran forward towards him to help him; but
when I came nearer to him, I saw something hanging over his shoulders,
which was a creature that he had shot, like a hare, but different in
colour, and longer legs. However, we were very glad of it, and it was
very good meat; but the great joy that poor Xury came with was to tell
me he had found good water, and seen no wild mans.

But we found afterwards that we need not take such pains for water, for
a little higher up the creek where we were we found the water fresh when
the tide was out, which flowed but a little way up; so we filled our
jars, and feasted on the hare we had killed, and prepared to go on our
way, having seen no footsteps of any human creature in that part of the
country.

As I had been one voyage to this coast before, I knew very well that the
islands of the Canaries, and the Cape de Verde Islands also, lay not far
off from the coast. But as I had no instruments to take an observation
to know what latitude we were in, and did not exactly know, or at least
remember, what latitude they were in, I knew not where to look for them,
or when to stand off to sea towards them; otherwise I might now easily
have found some of these islands. But my hope was, that if I stood along
this coast till I came to that part where the English traded, I should
find some of their vessels upon their usual design of trade, that would
relieve and take us in.

By the best of my calculation, that place where I now was must be that
country which, lying between the Emperor of Morocco's dominions and the
negroes, lies waste and uninhabited, except by wild beasts; the negroes
having abandoned it and gone farther south for fear of the Moors, and
the Moors not thinking it worth inhabiting, by reason of its barrenness;
and indeed both forsaking it because of the prodigious numbers of
tigers, lions, leopards, and other furious creatures which harbour
there; so that the Moors use it for their hunting only, where they go
like an army, two or three thousand men at a time; and indeed for near
an hundred miles together upon this coast we saw nothing but a waste
uninhabited country by day, and heard nothing but howlings and roarings
of wild beasts by night.

Once or twice in the daytime I thought I saw the Pico of Teneriffe,
being the high top of the Mountain Teneriffe in the Canaries, and had a
great mind to venture out, in hopes of reaching thither; but having
tried twice, I was forced in again by contrary winds, the sea also going
too high for my little vessel; so I resolved to pursue my first design,
and keep along the shore.

Several times I was obliged to land for fresh water after we had left
this place; and once in particular, being early in the morning, we came
to an anchor under a little point of land which was pretty high; and the
tide beginning to flow, we lay still to go farther in. Xury, whose eyes
were more about him than it seems mine were, calls softly to me, and
tells me that we had best go farther off the shore; "For," says he,
"look, yonder lies a dreadful monster on the side of that hillock fast
asleep." I looked where he pointed, and saw a dreadful monster indeed,
for it was a terrible great lion that lay on the side of the shore,
under the shade of a piece of the hill that hung as it were a little
over him. "Xury," says I, "you shall go on shore and kill him." Xury
looked frighted, and said, "Me kill! he eat me at one mouth"; one
mouthful he meant. However, I said no more to the boy, but bade him lie
still, and I took our biggest gun, which was almost musket-bore, and
loaded it with a good charge of powder, and with two slugs, and laid it
down; then I loaded another gun with two bullets; and the third (for we
had three pieces) I loaded with five smaller bullets. I took the best
aim I could with the first piece to have shot him into the head, but he
lay so with his leg raised a little above his nose, that the slugs hit
his leg about the knee, and broke the bone. He started up growling at
first, but finding his leg broke, fell down again, and then got up upon
three legs and gave the most hideous roar that ever I heard. I was a
little surprised that I had not hit him on the head. However, I took up
the second piece immediately, and, though he began to move off, fired
again, and shot him into the head, and had the pleasure to see him drop,
and make but little noise, but lay struggling for life. Then Xury took
heart, and would have me let him go on shore. "Well, go," said I; so the
boy jumped into the water, and taking a little gun in one hand, swam to
shore with the other hand, and coming close to the creature, put the
muzzle of the piece to his ear, and shot him into the head again, which
despatched him quite.

This was game indeed to us, but this was no food; and I was very sorry
to lose three charges of powder and shot upon a creature that was good
for nothing to us. However, Xury said he would have some of him; so he
comes on board, and asked me to give him the hatchet. "For what, Xury?"
said I. "Me cut off his head," said he. However, Xury could not cut off
his head, but he cut off a foot, and brought it with him, and it was a
monstrous great one.

I bethought myself, however, that perhaps the skin of him might one way
or other be of some value to us; and I resolved to take off his skin if
I could. So Xury and I went to work with him; but Xury was much the
better workman at it, for I knew very ill how to do it. Indeed, it took
us up both the whole day, but at last we got off the hide of him, and
spreading it on the top of our cabin, the sun effectually dried it in
two days' time, and it afterwards served me to lie upon.

After this stop we made on to the southward continually for ten or
twelve days, living very sparing on our provisions, which began to abate
very much, and going no oftener into the shore than we were obliged to
for fresh water. My design in this was to make the river Gambia or
Senegal--that is to say, anywhere about the Cape de Verde--where I was
in hopes to meet with some European ship; and if I did not, I knew not
what course I had to take, but to seek out for the islands or perish
there among the negroes. I knew that all the ships from Europe, which
sailed either to the coast of Guinea or to Brazil, or to the East
Indies, made this cape, or those islands; and in a word, I put the whole
of my fortune upon this single point, either that I must meet with some
ship, or must perish.

When I had pursued this resolution about ten days longer, as I have
said, I began to see that the land was inhabited; and in two or three
places, as we sailed by, we saw people stand upon the shore to look at
us; we could also perceive they were quite black, and stark naked. I was
once inclined to have gone on shore to them; but Xury was my better
counsellor, and said to me, "No go, no go." However, I hauled in nearer
the shore that I might talk to them, and I found they ran along the
shore by me a good way. I observed they had no weapons in their hands,
except one, who had a long slender stick, which Xury said was a lance,
and that they would throw them a great way with good aim. So I kept at a
distance, but talked with them by signs as well as I could, and
particularly made signs for something to eat; they beckoned to me to
stop my boat, and that they would fetch me some meat. Upon this I
lowered the top of my sail, and lay by, and two of them ran up into the
country, and in less than half-an-hour came back, and brought with them
two pieces of dried flesh and some corn, such as is the produce of their
country; but we neither knew what the one or the other was. However, we
were willing to accept it, but how to come at it was our next dispute,
for I was not for venturing on shore to them, and they were as much
afraid of us; but they took a safe way for us all, for they brought it
to the shore and laid it down, and went and stood a great way off till
we fetched it on board, and then came close to us again.

We made signs of thanks to them, for we had nothing to make them
amends. But an opportunity offered that very instant to oblige them
wonderfully; for while we were lying by the shore came two mighty
creatures, one pursuing the other (as we took it) with great fury from
the mountains towards the sea; whether it was the male pursuing the
female, or whether they were in sport or in rage, we could not tell, any
more than we could tell whether it was usual or strange, but I believe
it was the latter: because, in the first place, those ravenous creatures
seldom appear but in the night; and in the second place, we found the
people terribly frighted, especially the women. The man that had the
lance or dart did not fly from them but the rest did; however, as the
two creatures ran directly into the water, they did not seem to offer to
fall upon any of the negroes, but plunged themselves into the sea, and
swam about, as if they had come for their diversion. At last, one of
them began to come nearer our boat than at first I expected; but I lay
ready for him, for I had loaded my gun with all possible expedition, and
bade Xury load both the others. As soon as he came fairly within my
reach, I fired, and shot him directly into the head; immediately he sunk
down into the water, but rose instantly, and plunged up and down, as if
he was struggling for life, and so indeed he was. He immediately made to
the shore; but between the wound, which was his mortal hurt, and the
strangling of the water, he died just before he reached the shore.

It is impossible to express the astonishment of these poor creatures, at
the noise and the fire of my gun; some of them were even ready to die
for fear, and fell down as dead with the very terror. But when they saw
the creature dead, and sunk in the water, and that I made signs to them
to come to the shore, they took heart and came to the shore, and began
to search for the creature. I found him by his blood staining the
water: and by the help of a rope, which I slung round him, and gave the
negroes to haul, they dragged him on the shore, and found that it was a
most curious leopard, spotted, and fine to an admirable degree; and the
negroes held up their hands with admiration, to think what it was I had
killed him with.

The other creature, frighted with the flash of fire and the noise of the
gun, swam on shore, and ran up directly to the mountains from whence
they came; nor could I, at that distance, know what it was. I found
quickly the negroes were for eating the flesh of this creature, so I was
willing to have them take it as a favour from me; which when I made
signs to them that they might take him, they were very thankful for.
Immediately they fell to work with him; and though they had no knife,
yet, with a sharpened piece of wood, they took off his skin as readily,
and much more readily than we could have done with a knife. They offered
me some of the flesh, which I declined, making as if I would give it
them, but made signs for the skin, which they gave me very freely, and
brought me a great deal more of their provision, which though I did not
understand, yet I accepted. Then I made signs to them for some water,
and held out one of my jars to them, turning it bottom upward, to show
that it was empty, and that I wanted to have it filled. They called
immediately to some of their friends, and there came two women, and
brought a great vessel made of earth, and burnt, as I suppose, in the
sun; this they set down for me, as before, and I sent Xury on shore with
my jars, and filled them all three. The women were as stark naked as the
men.

I was now furnished with roots and corn, such as it was, and water; and
leaving my friendly negroes, I made forward for about eleven days more,
without offering to go near the shore, till I saw the land run out a
great length into the sea, at about the distance of four or five
leagues before me; and the sea being very calm. I kept a large offing,
to make this point. At length doubling the point, at about two leagues
from the land, I saw plainly land on the other side, to seaward; then I
concluded, as it was most certain indeed, that this was the Cape de
Verde, and those the islands, called from thence Cape de Verde Islands.
However, they were at a great distance, and I could not well tell what I
had best to do; for if I should be taken with a fresh of wind, I might
neither reach one or other.

In this dilemma, as I was very pensive, I stepped into the cabin, and
sat me down, Xury having the helm; when, on a sudden, the boy cried out,
"Master, master, a ship with a sail!" and the foolish boy was frighted
out of his wits, thinking it must needs be some of his master's ships
sent to pursue us, when I knew we were gotten far enough out of their
reach. I jumped out of the cabin, and immediately saw not only the ship,
but what she was, viz., that it was a Portuguese ship, and, as I
thought, was bound to the coast of Guinea, for negroes. But when I
observed the course she steered, I was soon convinced they were bound
some other way, and did not design to come any nearer to the shore; upon
which I stretched out to sea as much as I could, resolving to speak with
them, if possible.

With all the sail I could make, I found I should not be able to come in
their way, but that they would be gone by before I could make any signal
to them; but after I had crowded to the utmost, and began to despair,
they, it seems, saw me by the help of their perspective glasses, and
that it was some European boat, which, as they supposed, must belong to
some ship that was lost, so they shortened sail to let me come up. I was
encouraged with this; and as I had my patron's ancient on board, I made
a waft of it to them for a signal of distress, and fired a gun, both
which they saw; for they told me they saw the smoke, though they did not
hear the gun. Upon these signals they very kindly brought to, and lay by
for me; and in about three hours' time I came up with them.

They asked me what I was, in Portuguese, and in Spanish, and in French,
but I understood none of them; but at last a Scots sailor, who was on
board, called to me, and I answered him, and told him I was an
Englishman, that I had made my escape out of slavery from the Moors, at
Sallee. Then they bade me come on board, and very kindly took me in, and
all my goods.

It was an inexpressible joy to me, that any one will believe, that I was
thus delivered, as I esteemed it, from such a miserable, and almost
hopeless, condition as I was in; and I immediately offered all I had to
the captain of the ship, as a return for my deliverance. But he
generously told me he would take nothing from me, but that all I had
should be delivered safe to me when I came to the Brazils. "For," says
he, "I have saved your life on no other terms than I would be glad to be
saved myself; and it may, one time or other, be my lot to be taken up in
the same condition. Besides," says he, "when I carry you to the Brazils,
so great a way from your own country, if I should take from you what you
have, you will be starved there, and then I only take away that life I
have given. No, no, Seignior Inglese," says he, "Mr. Englishman, I will
carry you thither in charity, and those things will help you to buy your
subsistence there, and your passage home again."

As he was charitable in his proposal, so he was just in the performance
to a tittle; for he ordered the seamen that none should offer to touch
anything I had; then he took everything into his own possession, and
gave me back an exact inventory of them, that I might have them, even so
much as my three earthen jars.

As to my boat, it was a very good one, and that he saw, and told me he
would buy it of me for the ship's use, and asked me what I would have
for it? I told him he had been so generous to me in everything, that I
could not offer to make any price for the boat, but left it entirely to
him; upon which he told me he would give me a note of his hand to pay me
eighty pieces of eight for it at Brazil, and when it came there, if any
one offered to give more, he would make it up. He offered me also sixty
pieces of eight more for my boy Xury, which I was loth to take; not that
I was not willing to let the captain have him, but I was very loth to
sell the poor boy's liberty, who had assisted me so faithfully in
procuring my own. However, when I let him know my reason, he owned it to
be just, and offered me this medium, that he would give the boy an
obligation to set him free in ten years if he turned Christian. Upon
this, and Xury saying he was willing to go to him, I let the captain
have him.

We had a very good voyage to the Brazils, and arrived in the Bay de
Todos los Santos, or All Saints' Bay, in about twenty-two days after.
And now I was once more delivered from the most miserable of all
conditions of life; and what to do next with myself I was now to
consider.

The generous treatment the captain gave me, I can never enough remember.
He would take nothing of me for my passage, gave me twenty ducats for
the leopard's skin, and forty for the lion's skin, which I had in my
boat, and caused everything I had in the ship to be punctually delivered
me; and what I was willing to sell he bought, such as the case of
bottles, two of my guns, and a piece of the lump of beeswax--for I
had made candles of the rest; in a word, I made about 220 pieces of
eight of all my cargo, and with this stock I went on shore in the
Brazils.

[Illustration: "I was now landed, and safe on shore." (See p. 60.)]

I had not been long here, but being recommended to the house of a good
honest man like himself, who had an _ingeino_ as they call it, that is,
a plantation and a sugar-house, I lived with him some time, and
acquainted myself by that means with the manner of their planting and
making of sugar; and seeing how well the planters lived, and how they
grew rich suddenly, I resolved, if I could get a licence to settle
there, I would turn planter among them, resolving in the meantime to
find out some way to get my money which I left in London remitted to me.
To this purpose, getting a kind of a letter of naturalisation, I
purchased as much land that was uncured as my money would reach, and
formed a plan for my plantation and settlement, and such a one as might
be suitable to the stock which I proposed to myself to receive from
England.

I had a neighbour, a Portuguese of Lisbon, but born of English parents,
whose name was Wells, and in much such circumstances as I was. I call
him my neighbour, because his plantation lay next to mine, and we went
on very sociably together. My stock was but low, as well as his; and we
rather planted for food than anything else, for about two years.
However, we began to increase, and our land began to come into order; so
that the third year we planted some tobacco, and made each of us a large
piece of ground ready for planting canes in the year to come. But we
both wanted help; and now I found more than before, I had done wrong in
parting with my boy Xury.

But alas! for me to do wrong that never did right was no great wonder. I
had no remedy but to go on. I was gotten into an employment quite remote
to my genius, and directly contrary to the life I delighted in, and for
which I forsook my father's house, and broke through all his good
advice; nay, I was coming into the very middle station, or upper degree
of low life, which my father advised me to before; and which, if I
resolved to go on with, I might as well have stayed at home, and never
have fatigued myself in the world as I had done. And I used often to say
to myself, I could have done this as well in England among my friends,
as have gone 5,000 miles off to do it among strangers and savages, in a
wilderness, and at such a distance as never to hear from any part of the
world that had the least knowledge of me.

In this manner I used to look upon my condition with the utmost regret.
I had nobody to converse with, but now and then this neighbour; no work
to be done, but by the labour of my hands; and I used to say, I lived
just like a man cast away upon some desolate island, that had nobody
there but himself. But how just has it been! and how should all men
reflect, that when they compare their present conditions with others
that are worse, Heaven may oblige them to make the exchange, and be
convinced of their former felicity by their experience;--I say, how just
has it been, that the truly solitary life I reflected on in an island of
mere desolation should be my lot, who had so often unjustly compared it
with the life which I then led, in which, had I continued, I had in all
probability been exceeding prosperous and rich.

I was in some degree settled in my measures for carrying on the
plantation before my kind friend, the captain of the ship that took me
up at sea, went back; for the ship remained there in providing his
loading, and preparing for his voyage, near three months; when, telling
him what little stock I had left behind me in London, he gave me this
friendly and sincere advice: "Seignior Inglese," says he, for so he
always called me, "if you will give me letters, and a procuration here
in form to me, with orders to the person who has your money in London to
send your effects to Lisbon, to such persons as I shall direct, and in
such goods as are proper for this country, I will bring you the produce
of them, God willing, at my return. But since human affairs are all
subject to changes and disasters, I would have you give orders but for
one hundred pounds sterling, which, you say, is half your stock, and let
the hazard be run for the first; so that if it come safe, you may order
the rest the same way; and if it miscarry, you may have the other half
to have recourse to for your supply."

This was so wholesome advice, and looked so friendly, that I could not
but be convinced it was the best course I could take; so I accordingly
prepared letters to the gentle-woman with whom I had left my money, and
a procuration to the Portuguese captain, as he desired.

I wrote the English captain's widow a full account of all my adventures;
my slavery, escape, and how I had met with the Portugal captain at sea,
the humanity of his behaviour, and in what condition I was now in, with
all other necessary directions for my supply. And when this honest
captain came to Lisbon, he found means, by some of the English merchants
there, to send over not the order only, but a full account of my story
to a merchant at London, who represented it effectually to her;
whereupon, she not only delivered the money, but out of her own pocket
sent the Portugal captain a very handsome present for his humanity and
charity to me.

The merchant in London vesting this hundred pounds in English goods,
such as the captain had writ for, sent them directly to him at Lisbon,
and he brought them all safe to me to the Brazils; among which, without
my direction (for I was too young in my business to think of them), he
had taken care to have all sorts of tools, ironwork, and utensils
necessary for my plantation, and which were of great use to me.

When this cargo arrived, I thought my fortune made, for I was surprised
with joy of it; and my good steward, the captain, had laid out the five
pounds, which my friend had sent him for a present for himself, to
purchase and bring me over a servant under bond for six years' service,
and would not accept of any consideration, except a little tobacco,
which I would have him accept, being of my own produce.

Neither was this all; but my goods being all English manufactures, such
as cloth, stuffs, baize, and things particularly valuable and desirable
in the country, I found means to sell them to a very great advantage; so
that I may say I had more than four times the value of my first cargo,
and was now infinitely beyond my poor neighbour, I mean in the
advancement of my plantation; for the first thing I did, I bought me a
negro slave, and an European servant also; I mean another besides that
which the captain brought me from Lisbon.

But as abused prosperity is oftentimes made the very means of our
greatest adversity, so was it with me. I went on the next year with
great success in my plantation. I raised fifty great rolls of tobacco on
my own ground, more than I had disposed of for necessaries among my
neighbours; and these fifty rolls, being each of above a hundredweight,
were well cured, and laid by against the return of the fleet from
Lisbon. And now, increasing in business and in wealth, my head began to
be full of projects and undertakings beyond my reach, such as are,
indeed, often the ruin of the best heads in business.

Had I continued in the station I was now in, I had room for all the
happy things to have yet befallen me for which my father so earnestly
recommended a quiet, retired life, and of which he had so sensibly
described the middle station of life to be full of. But other things
attended me, and I was still to be the wilful agent of all my own
miseries; and particularly, to increase my fault and double the
reflections upon myself, which in my future sorrows I should have
leisure to make. All these miscarriages were procured by my apparent
obstinate adhering to my foolish inclination of wandering abroad, and
pursuing that inclination in contradiction to the clearest views of
doing myself good in a fair and plain pursuit of those prospects, and
those measures of life, which Nature and Providence concurred to present
me with, and to make my duty.

As I had once done thus in my breaking away from my parents, so I could
not be content now, but I must go and leave the happy view I had of
being a rich and thriving man in my new plantation, only to pursue a
rash and immoderate desire of rising faster than the nature of the thing
admitted; and thus I cast myself down again into the deepest gulf of
human misery that ever man fell into, or perhaps could be consistent
with life and a state of health in the world.

To come, then, by the just degrees to the particulars of this part of my
story. You may suppose, that having now lived almost four years in the
Brazils, and beginning to thrive and prosper very well upon my
plantation, I had not only learned the language, but had contracted
acquaintance and friendship among my fellow-planters, as well as among
the merchants at St. Salvador, which was our port, and that in my
discourses among them I had frequently given them an account of my two
voyages to the coast of Guinea, the manner of trading with the negroes
there, and how easy it was to purchase upon the coast for trifles--such
as beads, toys, knives, scissors, hatchets, bits of glass, and the
like--not only gold dust, Guinea grains, elephants' teeth, etc., but
negroes, for the service of the Brazils, in great numbers.

They listened always very attentively to my discourses on these heads,
but especially to that part which related to the buying negroes; which
was a trade, at that time, not only not far entered into, but, as far as
it was, had been carried on by the _assiento_, or permission, of the
Kings of Spain and Portugal, and engrossed in the public, so that few
negroes were brought, and those excessive dear.

It happened, being in company with some merchants and planters of my
acquaintance, and talking of those things very earnestly, three of them
came to me the next morning, and told me they had been musing very much
upon what I had discoursed with them of, the last night, and they came
to make a secret proposal to me. And after enjoining me secrecy, they
told me that they had a mind to fit out a ship to go to Guinea; that
they had all plantations as well as I, and were straitened for nothing
so much as servants; that as it was a trade that could not be carried on
because they could not publicly sell the negroes when they came home, so
they desired to make but one voyage, to bring the negroes on shore
privately, and divide them among their own plantations; and, in a word,
the question was, whether I would go their super-cargo in the ship, to
manage the trading part upon the coast of Guinea; and they offered me
that I should have my equal share of the negroes without providing any
part of the stock.

This was a fair proposal, it must be confessed, had it been made to any
one that had not had a settlement and plantation of his own to look
after, which was in a fair way of coming to be very considerable, and
with a good stock upon it. But for me, that was thus entered and
established, and had nothing to do but go on as I had begun, for three
or four years more, and to have sent for the other hundred pounds from
England; and who, in that time, and with that little addition, could
scarce have failed of being worth three or four thousand pounds
sterling, and that increasing too--for me to think of such a voyage, was
the most preposterous thing that ever man, in such circumstances, could
be guilty of.

But I, that was born to be my own destroyer, could no more resist the
offer than I could restrain my first rambling designs, when my father's
good counsel was lost upon me. In a word, I told them I would go with
all my heart, if they would undertake to look after my plantation in my
absence, and would dispose of it to such as I should direct if I
miscarried. This they all engaged to do, and entered into writings or
covenants to do so; I made a formal will, disposing of my plantation and
effects, in case of my death; making the captain of the ship that had
saved my life, as before, my universal heir, but obliging him to dispose
of my effects as I had directed in my will; one-half of the produce
being to himself, and the other to be shipped to England.

In short, I took all possible caution to preserve my effects, and keep
up my plantation. Had I used half as much prudence to have looked into
my own interest, and have made a judgment of what I ought to have done
and not to have done, I had certainly never gone away from so prosperous
an undertaking, leaving all the probable views of a thriving
circumstance, and gone upon a voyage to sea, attended with all its
common hazards, to say nothing of the reasons I had to expect particular
misfortunes to myself.

But I was hurried on, and obeyed blindly the dictates of my fancy rather
than my reason. And accordingly, the ship being fitted out; and the
cargo furnished, and all things done as by agreement by my partners in
the voyage, I went on board in an evil hour, the [first] of [September,
1659], being the same day eight year that I went from my father and
mother at Hull, in order to act the rebel to their authority, and the
fool to my own interest.

Our ship was about 120 tons burthen, carried six guns and fourteen men,
besides the master, his boy, and myself. We had on board no large cargo
of goods, except of such toys as were fit for our trade with the
negroes--such as beads, bits of glass, shells, and odd trifles,
especially little looking-glasses, knives, scissors, hatchets, and the
like.

The same day I went on board we set sail, standing away to the northward
upon our own coast, with design to stretch over for the African coast,
when they came about 10 or 12 degrees of northern latitude, which, it
seems, was the manner of their course in those days. We had very good
weather, only excessive hot, all the way upon our own coast, till we
came to the height of Cape St. Augustino, from whence, keeping farther
off at sea, we lost sight of land, and steered as if we were bound for
the Isle Fernando de Noronha, holding our course N.E. by N., and leaving
those isles on the east. In this course we passed the line in about
twelve days' time, and were, by our last observation, in 7 degrees 22
minutes northern latitude, when a violent tornado, or hurricane, took us
quite out of our knowledge. It began from the south-east, came about to
the north-west, and then settled into the north-east, from whence it
blew in such a terrible manner, that for twelve days together we could
do nothing but drive, and, scudding away before it, let it carry us
wherever fate and the fury of the winds directed; and during these
twelve days, I need not say that I expected every day to be swallowed
up, nor, indeed, did any in the ship expect to save their lives.

In this distress we had, besides the terror of the storm, one of our men
die of the calenture, and one man and the boy washed overboard. About
the twelfth day, the weather abating a little, the master made an
observation as well as he could, and found that he was in about 11
degrees north latitude, but that he was 22 degrees of longitude
difference west from Cape St. Augustino; so that he found he was gotten
upon the coast of Guiana, or the north part of Brazil, beyond the river
Amazon, toward that of the river Orinoco, commonly called the Great
River, and began to consult with me what course he should take, for the
ship was leaky and very much disabled, and he was going directly back to
the coast of Brazil.

I was positively against that; and looking over the charts of the
sea-coast of America with him, we concluded there was no inhabited
country for us to have recourse to till we came within the circle of the
Caribbee Islands, and therefore resolved to stand away for Barbadoes,
which by keeping off at sea, to avoid the indraft of the Bay or Gulf of
Mexico, we might easily perform, as we hoped, in about fifteen days'
sail; whereas we could not possibly make our voyage to the coast of
Africa without some assistance, both to our ship and to ourselves.

With this design we changed our course, and steered away N.W. by W. in
order to reach some of our English islands, where I hoped for relief;
but our voyage was otherwise determined; for being in the latitude of 12
degrees 18 minutes, a second storm came upon us, which carried us away
with the same impetuosity westward, and drove us so out of the very way
of all human commerce, that had all our lives been saved, as to the
sea, we were rather in danger of being devoured by savages than ever
returning to our own country.

In this distress, the wind still blowing very hard, one of our men early
in the morning cried out, "Land!" and we had no sooner ran out of our
cabin to look out, in hopes of seeing whereabouts in the world we were,
but the ship struck upon a sand, and in a moment, her motion being so
stopped, the sea broke over her in such a manner, that we expected we
should all have perished immediately; and we were immediately driven
into our close quarters, to shelter us from the very foam and spray of
the sea.

It is not easy for any one, who has not been in the like condition, to
describe or conceive the consternation of men in such circumstances. We
knew nothing where we were, or upon what land it was we were driven,
whether an island or the main, whether inhabited or not inhabited; and
as the rage of the wind was still great, though rather less than at
first, we could not so much as hope to have the ship hold many minutes
without breaking in pieces, unless the winds, by a kind of miracle,
should turn immediately about. In a word, we sat looking one upon
another, and expecting death every moment, and every man acting
accordingly, as preparing for another world; for there was little or
nothing more for us to do in this. That which was our present comfort,
and all the comfort we had, was that, contrary to our expectation, the
ship did not break yet, and that the master said the wind began to
abate.

Now, though we thought that the wind did a little abate, yet the ship
having thus struck upon the sand, and sticking too fast for us to expect
her getting off, we were in a dreadful condition indeed, and had nothing
to do but to think of saving our lives as well as we could. We had a
boat at our stern just before the storm, but she was first staved by
dashing against the ship's rudder, and in the next place, she broke
away, and either sunk, or was driven off to sea, so there was no hope
from her; we had another boat on board, but how to get her off into the
sea was a doubtful thing. However, there was no room to debate, for we
fancied the ship would break in pieces every minute, and some told us
she was actually broken already.

In this distress, the mate of our vessel lays hold of the boat, and with
the help of the rest of the men they got her slung over the ship's side;
and getting all into her, let go, and committed ourselves, being eleven
in number, to God's mercy, and the wild sea; for though the storm was
abated considerably, yet the sea went dreadful high upon the shore, and
might well be called _den wild zee_, as the Dutch call the sea in a
storm.

And now our case was very dismal indeed, for we all saw plainly that the
sea went so high, that the boat could not live, and that we should be
inevitably drowned. As to making sail, we had none; nor, if we had,
could we have done anything with it; so we worked at the oar towards the
land, though with heavy hearts, like men going to execution, for we all
knew that when the boat came nearer the shore, she would be dashed in a
thousand pieces by the breach of the sea. However, we committed our
souls to God in the most earnest manner; and the wind driving us towards
the shore, we hastened our destruction with our own hands, pulling as
well as we could towards land.

What the shore was, whether rock or sand, whether steep or shoal, we
knew not; the only hope that could rationally give us the least shadow
of expectation was, if we may happen into some Bay or Gulf, or the mouth
of some river, where by great chance we might have run our boat in, or
got under the lee of the land, and perhaps made smooth water. But there
was nothing of this appeared; but as we made nearer and nearer the
shore, the land looked more frightful than the sea.

After we had rowed, or rather driven, about a league and a half, as we
reckoned it, a raging wave, mountain-like, came rolling astern of us,
and plainly bade us expect the _coup de grâce_. In a word, it took us
with such a fury that it overset the boat at once; and separating us, as
well from the boat as from one another, gave us not time hardly to say,
"O God!" for we were all swallowed up in a moment.

Nothing can describe the confusion of thought which I felt when I sunk
into the water; for though I swam very well, yet I could not deliver
myself from the waves so as to draw breath, till that wave having driven
me, or rather carried me, a vast way on towards the shore, and having
spent itself, went back, and left me upon the land almost dry, but half
dead with the water I took in. I had so much presence of mind as well as
breath left, that seeing myself nearer the mainland than I expected, I
got upon my feet, and endeavoured to make on towards the land as fast as
I could, before another wave should return and take me up again. But I
soon found it was impossible to avoid it; for I saw the sea come after
me as high as a great hill, and as furious as an enemy, which I had no
means or strength to contend with. My business was to hold my breath,
and raise myself upon the water, if I could; and so, by swimming, to
preserve my breathing, and pilot myself towards the shore, if possible;
my greatest concern now being, that the sea, as it would carry me a
great way towards the shore when it came on, might not carry me back
again with it when it gave back towards the sea.

The wave that came upon me again, buried me at once 20 or 30 feet deep
in its own body, and I could feel myself carried with a mighty force and
swiftness towards the shore a very great way; but I held my breath, and
assisted myself to swim still forward with all my might. I was ready to
burst with holding my breath, when, as I felt myself rising up, so, to
my immediate relief, I found my head and hands shoot out above the
surface of the water; and though it was not two seconds of time that I
could keep myself so, yet it relieved me greatly, gave me breath and new
courage. I was covered again with water a good while, but not so long
but I held it out; and finding the water had spent itself, and began to
return, I struck forward against the return of the waves, and felt the
ground again with my feet. I stood still a few moments to recover
breath, and till the water went from me, and then took to my heels and
ran with what strength I had farther towards the shore. But neither
would this deliver me from the fury of the sea, which came pouring in
after me again, and twice more I was lifted up by the waves and carried
forwards as before, the shore being very flat.

The last time of these two had well near been fatal to me; for the sea,
having hurried me along as before, landed me, or rather dashed me,
against a piece of a rock and that with such force as it left me
senseless, and indeed helpless, as to my own deliverance; for the blow
taking my side and breast beat the breath as it were quite out of my
body; and had it returned again immediately, I must have been strangled
in the water. But I recovered a little before the return of the waves,
and seeing I should be covered again with the water, I resolved to hold
fast by a piece of the rock, and so to hold my breath, if possible, till
the wave went back. Now as the waves were not so high as at first, being
near land, I held my hold till the wave abated and then fetched another
run, which brought me so near the shore, that the next wave though it
went over me yet did not so swallow me up as to carry me away, and the
next run I took I got to the mainland, where to my great comfort I
clambered up the cliffs of the shore, and sat me down upon the grass,
free from danger and quite out of the reach of the water.

I was now landed, and safe on shore, and began to look up and thank God
that my life was saved in a case wherein there was some minutes before
scarce any room to hope. I believe it is impossible to express to the
life what the ecstasies and transports of the soul are when it is so
saved, as I may say, out of the very grave; and I do not wonder now at
that custom, viz., that when a malefactor who has the halter about his
neck is tied up and just going to be turned off and has a reprieve
brought to him--I say, I do not wonder that they bring a surgeon with
it, to let him blood that very moment they tell him of it, that the
surprise may not drive the animal spirits from his heart, and overwhelm
him:

        For sudden joys, like griefs, confound at first.

I walked about on the shore, lifting up my hands, and my whole being, as
I may say, wrapt up in the contemplation of my deliverance, making a
thousand gestures and motions which I cannot describe, reflecting upon
all my comrades that were drowned, and that there should not be one soul
saved but myself; for, as for them, I never saw them afterwards, or any
sign of them except three of their hats, one cap, and two shoes that
were not fellows.

I cast my eyes to the stranded vessel when the breach and froth of the
sea being so big, I could hardly see it, it lay so far off, and
considered, Lord! how was it possible I could get on shore?

After I had solaced my mind with the comfortable part of my condition
I began to look round me to see what kind of place I was in, and what
was next to be done, and I soon found my comforts abate, and that in a
word I had a dreadful deliverance; for I was wet, had no clothes to
shift me, nor anything either to eat or drink to comfort me, neither
did I see any prospect before me but that of perishing with hunger, or
being devoured by wild beasts; and that which was particularly
afflicting to me was that I had no weapon either to hunt and kill any
creature for my sustenance, or to defend myself against any other
creature that might desire to kill me for theirs. In a word, I had
nothing about me but a knife, a tobacco-pipe, and a little tobacco in
a box. This was all my provision; and this threw me into terrible
agonies of mind that for a while I ran about like a madman. Night
coming upon me, I began, with a heavy heart, to consider what would be
my lot if there were any ravenous beasts in that country, seeing at
night they always come abroad for their prey.

All the remedy that offered to my thoughts at that time was, to get up
into a thick bushy tree like a fir, but thorny, which grew near me, and
where I resolved to sit all night, and consider the next day what death
I should die, for as yet I saw no prospect of life. I walked about a
furlong from the shore, to see if I could find any fresh water to drink,
which I did, to my great joy; and having drank, and put a little tobacco
in my mouth to prevent hunger, I went to the tree, and getting up into
it, endeavoured to place myself so, as that if I should sleep I might
not fall; and having cut me a short stick, like a truncheon, for my
defence, I took up my lodging, and having been excessively fatigued, I
fell fast asleep, and slept as comfortably as, I believe, few could have
done in my condition, and found myself the most refreshed with it that I
think I ever was on such an occasion.

When I waked it was broad day, the weather clear, and the storm abated,
so that the sea did not rage and swell as before. But that which
surprised me most was, that the ship was lifted off in the night from
the sand where she lay, by the swelling of the tide, and was driven up
almost as far as the rock which I first mentioned, where I had been so
bruised by the dashing me against it. This being within about a mile
from the shore where I was, and the ship seeming to stand upright still,
I wished myself on board, that, at least, I might have some necessary
things for my use.

When I came down from my apartment in the tree I looked about me again
and the first thing I found was the boat, which lay as the wind and the
sea had tossed her up upon the land, about two miles on my right hand. I
walked as far as I could upon the shore to have got to her, but found a
neck or inlet of water between me and the boat, which was about half a
mile broad; so I came back for the present, being more intent upon
getting at the ship, where I hoped to find something for my present
subsistence.

[Illustration: "I fell fast asleep." (See p. 61.)]

A little after noon I found the sea very calm, and the tide ebbed so far
out, that I could come within a quarter of a mile of the ship; and here
I found a fresh renewing of my grief, for I saw evidently, that if we
had kept on board we had been all safe, that is to say, we had all got
safe on shore, and I had not been so miserable as to be left entirely
destitute of all comfort and company as I now was. This forced tears
from my eyes again; but as there was little relief in that, I resolved,
if possible, to get to the ship; so I pulled off my clothes, for the
weather was hot to extremity, and took the water. But when I came to the
ship my difficulty was still greater to know how to get on board; for as
she lay aground, and high out of the water, there was nothing within
my reach to lay hold of. I swam round her twice, and the second time I
spied a small piece of a rope, which I wondered I did not see at first,
hang down by the fore-chains so low, as that with great difficulty I got
hold of it, and by the help of that rope got up into the forecastle of
the ship. Here I found that the ship was bulged, and had a great deal of
water in her hold, but that she lay so on the side of a bank of hard
sand, or rather earth, that her stern lay lifted up upon the bank, and
her head low almost to the water. By this means all her quarter was
free, and all that was in that part was dry; for you may be sure my
first work was to search and to see what was spoiled and what was free.
And first I found that all the ship's provisions were dry and untouched
by the water; and being very well disposed to eat, I went to the
bread-room and filled my pockets with biscuit, and eat it as I went
about other things, for I had no time to lose. I also found some rum in
the great cabin, of which I took a large dram, and which I had indeed
need enough of, to spirit me for what was before me. Now I wanted
nothing but a boat, to furnish myself with many things which I foresaw
would be very necessary to me.

It was in vain to sit still and wish for what was not to be had, and
this extremity roused my application. We had several spare yards, and
two or three large spars of wood, and a spare top-mast or two in the
ship. I resolved to fall to work with these, and flung as many of them
overboard as I could manage for their weight, tying every one with a
rope, that they might not drive away. When this was done I went down the
ship's side, and pulling them to me, I tied four of them fast together
at both ends as well as I could, in the form of a raft; and laying two
or three short pieces of plank upon them crossways, I found I could
walk upon it very well, but that it was not able to bear any great
weight, the pieces being too light. So I went to work, and with the
carpenter's saw I cut a spare top-mast into three lengths, and added
them to my raft, with a great deal of labour and pains; but hope of
furnishing myself with necessaries encouraged me to go beyond what I
should have been able to have done upon another occasion.

My raft was now strong enough to bear any reasonable weight. My next
care was what to load it with, and how to preserve what I laid upon it
from the surf of the sea; but I was not long considering this. I first
laid all the planks or boards upon it that I could get, and having
considered well what I most wanted, I first got three of the seamen's
chests which I had broken open and emptied, and lowered them down upon
my raft. The first of these I filled with provisions, viz., bread, rice,
three Dutch cheeses, five pieces of dried goat's flesh, which we lived
much upon, and a little remainder of European corn which had been laid
by for some fowls which we brought to sea with us, but the fowls were
killed. There had been some barley and wheat together, but, to my great
disappointment, I found afterwards that the rats had eaten or spoiled it
all. As for liquors I found several cases of bottles belonging to our
skipper in which were some cordial waters, and, in all, about five or
six gallons of rack. These I stowed by themselves, there being no need
to put them into the chest, nor no room for them. While I was doing
this, I found the tide began to flow, though very calm, and I had the
mortification to see my coat, shirt, and waistcoat, which I had left on
shore upon the sand, swim away; as for my breeches, which were only
linen, and open-kneed, I swam on board in them and my stockings.
However, this put me upon rummaging for clothes, of which I found
enough, but took no more than I wanted for present use; for I had other
things which my eye was more upon, as first tools to work with on shore;
and it was after long searching that I found out the carpenter's chest,
which was indeed a very useful prize to me, and much more valuable than
a ship-loading of gold would have been at that time. I got it down to my
raft, even whole as it was, without losing time to look into it, for I
knew in general what it contained.

My next care was for some ammunition and arms; there were two very good
fowling-pieces in the great cabin, and two pistols; these I secured
first, with some powder-horns, and a small bag of shot, and two old
rusty swords. I knew there were three barrels of powder in the ship, but
knew not where our gunner had stowed them; but with much search I found
them, two of them dry and good, the third had taken water; those two I
got to my raft with the arms. And now I thought myself pretty well
freighted, and began to think how I should get to shore with them,
having neither sail, oar, nor rudder; and the least capful of wind would
have overset all my navigation.

I had three encouragements. 1. A smooth, calm sea. 2. The tide rising
and setting in to the shore. 3. What little wind there was blew me
towards the land. And thus, having found two or three broken oars
belonging to the boat, and besides the tools which were in the chest, I
found two saws, an axe, and a hammer, and with this cargo I put to sea.
For a mile or thereabouts my raft went very well, only that I found it
drive a little distant from the place where I had landed before, by
which I perceived that there was some indraft of the water, and
consequently I hoped to find some creek or river there, which I might
make use of as a port to get to land with my cargo.

As I imagined, so it was; there appeared before me a little opening of
the land, and I found a strong current of the tide set into it, so I
guided my raft as well as I could to keep in the middle of the stream.
But here I had like to have suffered a second shipwreck, which, if I
had, I think verily would have broke my heart; for knowing nothing of
the coast my raft ran aground at one end of it upon a shoal, and not
being aground at the other end, it wanted but a little that all my cargo
had slipped off towards that end that was afloat, and so fallen into the
water. I did my utmost by setting my back against the chests to keep
them in their places, but could not thrust off the raft with all my
strength, neither durst I stir from the posture I was in, but holding up
the chests with all my might, stood in that manner near half an hour, in
which time the rising of the water brought me a little more upon a
level; and a little after, the water still rising, my raft floated
again, and I thrust her off with the oar I had into the channel, and
then driving up higher, I at length found myself in the mouth of a
little river, with land on both sides, and a strong current or tide
running up. I looked on both sides for a proper place to get to shore,
for I was not willing to be driven too high up the river, hoping in time
to see some ship at sea, and therefore resolved to place myself as near
the coast as I could.

At length I spied a little cove on the right shore of the creek, to
which, with great pain and difficulty, I guided my raft, and at last got
so near, as that, reaching ground with my oar, I could thrust her
directly in; but here I had like to have dipped all my cargo in the sea
again; for that shore lying pretty steep, that is to say, sloping, there
was no place to land but where one end of my float, if it run on shore,
would lie so high and the other sink lower, as before, that it would
endanger my cargo again. All that I could do was to wait till the tide
was at the highest, keeping the raft with my oar like an anchor to hold
the side of it fast to the shore, near a flat piece of ground, which I
expected the water would flow over; and so it did. As soon as I found
water enough, for my raft drew about a foot of water, I thrust her on
upon that flat piece of ground, and there fastened or moored her by
sticking my two broken oars into the ground; one on one side near one
end, and one on the other side near the other end; and thus I lay till
the water ebbed away, and left my raft and all my cargo safe on shore.

My next work was to view the country and seek a proper place for my
habitation, and where to stow my goods to secure them from whatever
might happen. Where I was, I yet knew not; whether on the continent, or
on an island; whether inhabited, or not inhabited; whether in danger of
wild beasts, or not. There was a hill, not above a mile from me, which
rose up very steep and high, and which seemed to overtop some other
hills, which lay as in a ridge from it, northward. I took out one of the
fowling-pieces and one of the pistols, and a horn of powder; and thus
armed, I travelled for discovery up to the top of that hill, where,
after I had with great labour and difficulty got to the top, I saw my
fate to my great affliction, viz., that I was in an island environed
every way with the sea, no land to be seen, except some rocks which lay
a great way off, and two small islands less than this, which lay about
three leagues to the west.

I found also that the island I was in was barren, and, as I saw good
reason to believe, uninhabited, except by wild beasts, of whom, however,
I saw none; yet I saw abundance of fowls, but knew not their kinds;
neither, when I killed them, could I tell what was fit for food, and
what not. At my coming back, I shot at a great bird which I saw sitting
upon a tree on the side of a great wood. I believe it was the first gun
that had been fired there since the creation of the world. I had no
sooner fired, but from all the parts of the wood there arose an
innumerable number of fowls of many sorts, making a confused screaming,
and crying every one according to his usual note; but not one of them of
any kind that I knew. As for the creature I killed, I took it to be a
kind of a hawk, its colour and beak resembling it, but had no talons or
claws more than common; its flesh was carrion, and fit for nothing.

Contented with this discovery, I came back to my raft, and fell to work
to bring my cargo on shore, which took me up the rest of that day; and
what to do with myself at night, I knew not, nor indeed where to rest;
for I was afraid to lie down on the ground, not knowing but some wild
beast might devour me, though, as I afterwards found, there was really
no need for those fears. However, as well as I could, I barricaded
myself round with the chests and boards that I had brought on shore, and
made a kind of a hut for that night's lodging; as for food, I yet saw
not which way to supply myself, except that I had seen two or three
creatures like hares run out of the woods where I shot the fowl.

I now began to consider, that I might yet get a great many things out of
the ship, which would be useful to me, and particularly some of the
rigging and sails, and such other things as might come to land; and I
resolved to make another voyage on board the vessel, if possible. And as
I knew that the first storm that blew must necessarily break her all in
pieces, I resolved to set all other things apart till I got everything
out of the ship that I could get. Then I called a council, that is to
say, in my thoughts, whether I should take back the raft, but this
appeared impracticable; so I resolved to go as before, when the tide
was down; and I did so, only that I stripped before I went from my hut,
having nothing on but a chequered shirt and a pair of linen drawers, and
a pair of pumps on my feet.

I got on board the ship as before, and prepared a second raft, and
having had experience of the first, I neither made this so unwieldy, nor
loaded it so hard; but yet I brought away several things very useful to
me; as, first, in the carpenter's stores I found two or three bags full
of nails and spikes, a great screw-jack, a dozen or two of hatchets, and
above all that most useful thing called a grindstone. All these I
secured, together with several things belonging to the gunner,
particularly two or three iron crows, and two barrels of musket bullets,
seven muskets, and another fowling-piece, with some small quantity of
powder more; a large bag full of small-shot, and a great roll of sheet
lead; but this last was so heavy, I could not hoist it up to get it over
the ship's side. Besides these things, I took all the men's clothes that
I could find, and a spare fore-top sail, a hammock, and some bedding;
and with this I loaded my second raft, and brought them all safe on
shore, to my very great comfort.

I was under some apprehensions during my absence from the land, that at
least my provisions might be devoured on shore; but when I came back, I
found no sign of any visitor, only there sat a creature like a wild cat
upon one of the chests, which, when I came towards it, ran away a little
distance, and then stood still. She sat very composed and unconcerned,
and looked full in my face, as if she had a mind to be acquainted with
me. I presented my gun at her; but as she did not understand it, she was
perfectly unconcerned at it, nor did she offer to stir away; upon which
I tossed her a bit of biscuit, though, by the way, I was not very free
of it, for my store was not great. However, I spared her a bit, I say,
and she went to it, smelled of it, and ate it and looked (as pleased)
for more; but I thanked her and could spare no more, so she marched off.

Having got my second cargo on shore, though I was fain to open the
barrels of powder and bring them by parcels, for they were too heavy,
being large casks, I went to work to make me a little tent with the sail
and some poles which I cut for that purpose; and into this tent I
brought everything that I knew would spoil either with rain or sun; and
I piled all the empty chests and casks up in a circle round the tent, to
fortify it from any sudden attempt, either from man or beast.

When I had done this I blocked up the door of the tent with some boards
within, and an empty chest set up on end without; and spreading one of
the beds upon the ground, laying my two pistols just at my head, and my
gun at length by me, I went to bed for the first time, and slept very
quietly all night, for I was very weary and heavy; for the night before
I had slept little, and had laboured very hard all day, as well to fetch
all those things from the ship, as to get them on shore.

I had the biggest magazine of all kinds now that ever was laid up, I
believe, for one man; but I was not satisfied still, for while the ship
sat upright in that posture, I thought I ought to get everything out of
her that I could. So every day at low water I went on board, and brought
away something or other; but, particularly, the third time I went I
brought away as much of the rigging as I could, as also all the small
ropes and rope-twine I could get, with a piece of spare canvas, which
was to mend the sails upon occasion, the barrel of wet gunpowder; in a
word, I brought away all the sails first and last, only that I was fain
to cut them in pieces, and bring as much at a time as I could; for they
were no more useful to be sails, but as mere canvas only.

But that which comforted me more still was, that at last of all, after I
had made five or six such voyages as these, and thought I had nothing
more to expect from the ship that was worth my meddling with; I say,
after all this, I found a great hogshead of bread, and three large
runlets of rum or spirits and a box of sugar, and a barrel of fine
flour; this was surprising to me, because I had given over expecting any
more provisions, except what was spoilt by the water. I soon emptied the
hogshead of that bread, and wrapped it up parcel by parcel in pieces of
the sails, which I cut out; and, in a word, I got all this safe on shore
also.

The next day I made another voyage. And now, having plundered the ship
of what was portable and fit to hand out, I began with the cables; and
cutting the great cable into pieces, such as I could move, I got two
cables and a hawser on shore, with all the ironwork I could get; and
having cut down the sprit-sail-yard, and the mizzen-yard, and everything
I could to make a large raft, I loaded it with all those heavy goods,
and came away. But my good luck began now to leave me; for this raft was
so unwieldy, and so overladen, that after I was entered the little cove
where I had landed the rest of my goods, not being able to guide it so
handily as I did the other, it overset, and threw me and all my cargo
into the water. As for myself, it was no great harm, for I was near the
shore; but as to my cargo, it was great part of it lost, especially the
iron, which I expected would have been of great use to me. However, when
the tide was out I got most of the pieces of cable ashore, and some of
the iron, though with infinite labour; for I was fain to dip for it into
the water, a work which fatigued me very much. After this I went every
day on board, and brought away what I could get.

I had been now thirteen days on shore, and had been eleven times on
board the ship; in which time I had brought away all that one pair of
hands could well be supposed capable to bring, though I believe verily,
had the calm weather held, I should have brought away the whole ship
piece by piece. But preparing the twelfth time to go on board, I found
the wind begin to rise. However, at low water I went on board, and
though I thought I had rummaged the cabin so effectually as that nothing
more could be found, yet I discovered a locker with drawers in it, in
one of which I found two or three razors, and one pair of large
scissors, with some ten or a dozen of good knives and forks; in another,
I found about thirty-six pounds value in money, some European coin, some
Brazil, some pieces of eight, some gold, some silver.

I smiled to myself at the sight of this money. "O drug!" said I aloud,
"what art thou good for? Thou, art not worth to me, no, not the taking
off of the ground; one of those knives is worth all this heap. I have no
manner of use for thee; even remain where thou art, and go to the bottom
as a creature whose life is not worth saving." However, upon second
thoughts, I took it away; and wrapping all this in a piece of canvas, I
began to think of making another raft; but while I was preparing this, I
found the sky overcast, and the wind began to rise, and in a quarter of
an hour it blew a fresh gale from the shore. It presently occurred to me
that it was in vain to pretend to make a raft with the wind off shore,
and that it was my business to be gone before the tide of flood began,
otherwise I might not be able to reach the shore at all. Accordingly I
let myself down into the water, and swam across the channel, which lay
between the ship and the sands, and even that with difficulty enough,
partly with the weight of the things I had about me, and partly the
roughness of the water; for the wind rose very hastily, and before it
was quite high water it blew a storm.

But I was gotten home to my little tent, where I lay with all my wealth
about me very secure. It blew very hard all that night, and in the
morning, when I looked out, behold, no more ship was to be seen. I was a
little surprised, but recovered myself with this satisfactory
reflection, viz., that I had lost no time, nor abated no diligence, to
get everything out of her that could be useful to me, and that indeed
there was little left in her that I was able to bring away if I had had
more time.

I now gave over any more thoughts of the ship, or of anything out of
her, except what might drive on shore from her wreck, as indeed divers
pieces of her afterwards did; but those things were of small use to me.

My thoughts were now wholly employed about securing myself against
either savages, if any should appear, or wild beasts, if any were in the
island; and I had many thoughts of the method how to do this, and what
kind of dwelling to make, whether I should make me a cave in the earth,
or a tent upon the earth; and, in short, I resolved upon both, the
manner and description of which it may not be improper to give an
account of.

I soon found the place I was in was not for my settlement, particularly
because it was upon a low moorish ground near the sea, and I believed
would not be wholesome; and more particularly because there was no fresh
water near it. So I resolved to find a more healthy and more convenient
spot of ground.

I consulted several things in my situation, which I found would be
proper for me. First, health and fresh water, I just now mentioned.
Secondly, shelter from the heat of the sun. Thirdly, security from
ravenous creatures, whether men or beasts. Fourthly, a view to the sea,
that if God sent any ship in sight I might not lose any advantage for my
deliverance, of which I was not willing to banish all my expectation
yet.

In search of a place proper for this, I found a little plain on the side
of a rising hill, whose front towards this little plain was steep as a
house-side, so that nothing could come down upon me from the top; on the
side of this rock there was a hollow place, worn a little way in, like
the entrance or door of a cave; but there was not really any cave, or
way into the rock at all.

On the flat of the green, just before this hollow place, I resolved to
pitch my tent. This plain was not above an hundred yards broad, and
about twice as long, and lay like a green before my door, and at the end
of it descended irregularly every way down into the low grounds by the
seaside. It was on the N.N.W. side of the hill, so that I was sheltered
from the heat every day, till it came to a W. and by S. sun, or
thereabouts, which in those countries is near the setting.

Before I set up my tent, I drew a half circle before the hollow place,
which took in about ten yards in its semi-diameter from the rock, and
twenty yards in its diameter from its beginning and ending. In this
half-circle I pitched two rows of strong stakes, driving them into the
ground till they stood very firm like piles, the biggest end being out
of the ground about five feet and a half, and sharpened on the top. The
two rows did not stand above six inches from one another.

Then I took the pieces of cable which I had cut in the ship, and laid
them in rows one upon another, within the circle, between these two rows
of stakes, up to the top, placing other stakes in the inside leaning
against them, about two feet and a half high, like a spur to a post;
and this fence was so strong, that neither man nor beast could get into
it, or over it. This cost me a great deal of time and labour, especially
to cut the piles in the woods, bring them to the place, and drive them
into the earth.

The entrance into this place I made to be not by a door, but by a short
ladder, to go over the top; which ladder, when I was in, I lifted over
after me, and so I was completely fenced in, and fortified, as I
thought, from all the world, and consequently slept secure in the night,
which otherwise I could not have done; though, as it appeared
afterwards, there was no need of all this caution from the enemies that
I apprehended danger from.

Into this fence or fortress, with infinite labour, I carried all my
riches, all my provisions, ammunition, and stores, of which you have the
account above; and I made me a large tent, which, to preserve me from
the rains that in one part of the year are very violent there, I made
double, viz., one smaller tent within, and one larger tent above it, and
covered the uppermost with a large tarpaulin, which I had saved among
the sails. And now I lay no more for a while in the bed which I had
brought on shore, but in a hammock, which was indeed a very good one,
and belonged to the mate of the ship.

Into this tent I brought all my provisions, and everything that would
spoil by the wet; and having thus enclosed all my goods, I made up the
entrance, which, till now, I had left open, and so passed and repassed,
as I said, by a short ladder.

When I had done this, I began to work my way into the rock; and bringing
all the earth and stones that I dug down out through my tent, I laid
them up within my fence in the nature of a terrace, so that it raised
the ground within about a foot and a half; and thus I made me a cave
just behind my tent, which served me like a cellar to my house.

It cost me much labour, and many days, before all these things were
brought to perfection, and therefore I must go back to some other things
which took up some of my thoughts. At the same time it happened, after I
had laid my scheme for the setting up my tent, and making the cave, that
a storm of rain falling from a thick dark cloud, a sudden flash of
lightning happened, and after that a great clap of thunder, as is
naturally the effect of it. I was not so much surprised with the
lightning, as I was with a thought which darted into my mind as swift as
the lightning itself. O my powder! My very heart sunk within me when I
thought, that at one blast all my powder might be destroyed, on which,
not my defence only, but the providing me food, as I thought, entirely
depended. I was nothing near so anxious about my own danger; though had
the powder took fire, I had never known who had hurt me.

Such impression did this make upon me, that after the storm was over I
laid aside all my works, my building, and fortifying, and applied myself
to make bags and boxes to separate the powder, and keep it a little and
a little in a parcel, in hope that whatever might come it might not all
take fire at once, and to keep it so apart, that it should not be
possible to make one part fire another. I finished this work in about a
fortnight; and I think my powder, which in all was about 240 pounds
weight, was divided in not less than a hundred parcels. As to the barrel
that had been wet, I did not apprehend any danger from that, so I placed
it in my new cave, which in my fancy I called my kitchen, and the rest I
hid up and down in holes among the rocks, so that no wet might come to
it, marking very carefully where I laid it.

[Illustration: "I guided my raft as well as I could to keep in the
middle of the stream." (See p. 66.)]

In the interval of time while this was doing, I went out once, at least,
every day with my gun, as well to divert myself, as to see if I could
kill anything fit for food, and as near as I could to acquaint myself
with what the island produced. The first time I went out, I presently
discovered that there were goats in the island, which was a great
satisfaction to me; but then it was attended with this misfortune to me,
viz., that they were so shy, so subtle, and so swift of foot, that it
was the difficultest thing in the world to come at them. But I was not
discouraged at this, not doubting but I might now and then shoot one, as
it soon happened; for after I had found their haunts a little, I laid
wait in this manner for them. I observed if they saw me in the valleys,
though they were upon the rocks, they would run away as in a terrible
fright; but if they were feeding in the valleys, and I was upon the
rocks, they took no notice of me, from whence I concluded that, by the
position of their optics, their sight was so directed downward, that
they did not readily see objects that were above them. So afterward I
took this method; I always climbed the rocks first to get above them,
and then had frequently a fair mark. The first shot I made among these
creatures I killed a she-goat, which had a little kid by her, which she
gave suck to, which grieved me heartily; but when the old one fell, the
kid stood stock still by her till I came and took her up; and not only
so, but when I carried the old one with me upon my shoulders, the kid
followed me quite to my enclosure; upon which I laid down the dam, and
took the kid in my arms, and carried it over my pale, in hopes to have
bred it up tame; but it would not eat, so I was forced to kill it, and
eat it myself. These two supplied me with flesh a great while, for I eat
sparingly, and saved my provisions, my bread especially, as much as
possibly I could.

Having now fixed my habitation, I found it absolutely necessary to
provide a place to make a fire in, and fuel to burn; and what I did for
that, as also how I enlarged my cave, and what conveniences I made, I
shall give a full account of in its place. But I must first give some
little account of myself, and of my thoughts about living, which it may
well be supposed were not a few.

I had a dismal prospect of my condition; for as I was not cast away upon
that island without being driven, as is said, by a violent storm, quite
out of the course of our intended voyage, and a great way, viz., some
hundreds of leagues out of the ordinary course of the trade of mankind,
I had great reason to consider it as a determination of Heaven, that in
this desolate place, and in this desolate manner, I should end my life.
The tears would run plentifully down my face when I made these
reflections, and sometimes I would expostulate with myself, why
Providence should thus completely ruin its creatures, and render them so
absolutely miserable, so without help abandoned, so entirely depressed,
that it could hardly be rational to be thankful for such a life.

But something always returned swift upon me to check these thoughts, and
to reprove me; and particularly one day, walking with my gun in my hand
by the seaside, I was very pensive upon the subject of my present
condition, when Reason, as it were, expostulated with me t'other way,
thus: "Well, you are in a desolate condition, it is true, but pray
remember, where are the rest of you? Did not you come eleven of you into
the boat? Where are the ten? Why were they not saved, and you lost? Why
were you singled out? Is it better to be here, or there?" And then I
pointed to the sea. All evils are to be considered with the good that is
in them, and with what worse attends them.

Then it occurred to me again, how I was furnished for my subsistence,
and what would have been my case if it had not happened, which was an
hundred thousand to one, that the ship floated from the place where she
first struck and was driven so near to the shore that I had time to get
all these things out of her; what would have been my case, if I had been
to have lived in the condition in which I at first came on shore,
without necessaries of life, or necessaries to supply and procure them?
"Particularly," said I aloud (though to myself), "what should I have
done without a gun, without ammunition, without any tools to make
anything or to work with, without clothes, bedding, a tent, or any
manner of covering?" and that now I had all these to a sufficient
quantity, and was in a fair way to provide myself in such a manner, as
to live without my gun when my ammunition was spent; so that I had a
tolerable view of subsisting without any want as long as I lived. For I
considered from the beginning how I would provide for the accidents that
might happen, and for the time that was to come, even not only after my
ammunition should be spent, but even after my health or strength should
decay.

I confess I had not entertained any notion of my ammunition being
destroyed at one blast--I mean, my powder being blown up by lightning;
and this made the thoughts of it so surprising to me when it lightened
and thundered, as I observed just now.

And now being to enter into a melancholy relation of a scene of silent
life, such, perhaps, as was never heard of in the world before, I shall
take it from its beginning, and continue it in its order. It was, by my
account, the 30th of September when, in the manner as above said, I
first set foot upon this horrid island, when the sun being to us in its
autumnal equinox, was almost just over my head, for I reckoned myself,
by observation, to be in the latitude of 9 degrees 22 minutes north of
the line.

After I had been there about ten or twelve days, it came into my
thoughts that I should lose my reckoning of time for want of books and
pen and ink, and should even forget the Sabbath days from the working
days; but to prevent this, I cut it with my knife upon a large post, in
capital letters; and making it into a great cross, I set it up on the
shore where I first landed, viz., "I came on shore here on the 30th of
September, 1659." Upon the sides of this square post I cut every day a
notch with my knife, and every seventh notch was as long again as the
rest, and every first day of the month as long again as that long one;
and thus I kept my calendar, or weekly, monthly, and yearly reckoning of
time.

In the next place we are to observe, that among the many things which I
brought out of the ship in the several voyages, which, as above
mentioned, I made to it, I got several things of less value, but not all
less useful to me, which I omitted setting down before; as in
particular, pens, ink, and paper, several parcels in the captain's,
mate's, gunner's, and carpenter's keeping, three or four compasses, some
mathematical instruments, dials, perspectives, charts, and books of
navigation, all of which I huddled together, whether I might want them
or no. Also I found three very good Bibles, which came to me in my cargo
from England, and which I had packed up among my things; some Portuguese
books also, and among them two or three Popish prayer-books, and several
other books, all which I carefully secured. And I must not forget, that
we had in the ship a dog and two cats, of whose eminent history I may
have occasion to say something in its place; for I carried both the cats
with me; and as for the dog, he jumped out of the ship of himself, and
swam on shore to me the day after I went on shore with my first cargo,
and was a trusty servant to me many years. I wanted nothing that he
could fetch me, nor any company that he could make up to me; I only
wanted to have him talk to me, but that he would not do. As I observed
before, I found pen, ink, and paper, and I husbanded them to the utmost;
and I shall show that while my ink lasted, I kept things very exact; but
after that was gone, I could not, for I could not make any ink by any
means that I could devise.

And this put me in mind that I wanted many things, notwithstanding all
that I had amassed together; and of these, this of ink was one, as also
spade, pick-axe, and shovel, to dig or remove the earth, needles, pins,
and thread; as for linen, I soon learned to want that without much
difficulty.

This want of tools made every work I did go on heavily; and it was near
a whole year before I had entirely finished my little pale or surrounded
habitation. The piles or stakes, which were as heavy as I could well
lift, were a long time in cutting and preparing in the woods, and more
by far in bringing home; so that I spent sometimes two days in cutting
and bringing home one of those posts, and a third day in driving it into
the ground; for which purpose I got a heavy piece of wood at first, but
at last bethought myself of one of the iron crows, which, however,
though I found it, yet it made driving those posts or piles very
laborious and tedious work.

But what need I have been concerned at the tediousness of anything I had
to do, seeing I had time enough to do it in? nor had I any other
employment, if that had been over, at least, that I could foresee,
except the ranging the island to seek for food, which I did more or less
every day.

I now began to consider seriously my condition, and the circumstance I
was reduced to; and I drew up the state of my affairs in writing; not
so much to leave them to any that were to come after me, for I was like
to have but few heirs, as to deliver my thoughts from daily poring upon
them, and afflicting my mind. And as my reason began now to master my
despondency, I began to comfort myself as well as I could, and to set
the good against the evil, that I might have something to distinguish my
case from worse; and I stated it very impartially, like debtor and
creditor, the comforts I enjoyed against the miseries I suffered, thus:


            _Evil._                            _Good._

 I am cast upon a horrible           But I am alive, and not
 desolate island, void of            drowned, as all my ship's
 all hope of recovery.               company was.

 I am singled out and                But I am singled out, too, from all the
 separated, as it were,              ship's crew to be spared from death; and
 from all the world to               He that miraculously saved me from death,
 be miserable.                       can deliver me from this condition.

 I am divided from mankind,          But I am not starved and perishing on a
 a solitaire, one banished           barren place, affording no sustenance.
 from human society.

 I have not clothes to               But I am in a hot climate, where if I had
 cover me.                           clothes I could hardly wear them.

 I am without any defence            But I am cast on an island, where I see no
 or means to resist any              wild beasts to hurt me, as I saw on the coast
 violence of man or beast.           of Africa; and what if I had been shipwrecked
                                     there?

 I have no soul to speak             But God wonderfully sent the ship in near
 to, or relieve me.                  enough to the shore, that I have gotten out
                                     so many necessary things as will either
                                     supply my wants, or enable me to supply
                                     myself even as long as I live.

Upon the whole, here was an undoubted testimony, that there was scarce
any condition in the world so miserable, but there was something
negative or something positive to be thankful for in it; and let this
stand as a direction from the experience of the most miserable of all
conditions in this world, that we may always find in it something to
comfort ourselves from, and to set in the description of good and evil
on the credit side of the account.

Having now brought my mind a little to relish my condition, and given
over looking out to sea, to see if I could spy a ship; I say, giving
over these things, I began to apply myself to accommodate my way of
living, and to make things as easy to me as I could.

I have already described my habitation, which was a tent under the side
of a rock, surrounded with a strong pale of posts and cables; but I
might now rather call it a wall, for I raised a kind of wall up against
it of turfs, about two feet thick on the outside, and after some time--I
think it was a year and a half--I raised rafters from it leading to the
rock, and thatched or covered it with boughs of trees and such things as
I could get to keep out the rain, which I found at some times of the
year very violent.

I have already observed how I brought all my goods into this pale, and
into the cave which I had made behind me. But I must observe, too, that
at first this was a confused heap of goods, which as they lay in no
order, so they took up all my place; I had no room to turn myself. So I
set myself to enlarge my cave and works farther into the earth; for it
was a loose sandy rock, which yielded easily to the labour I bestowed on
it. And so, when I found I was pretty safe as to beasts of prey, I
worked sideways to the right hand into the rock; and then, turning to
the right again, worked quite out, and made me a door to come out on the
outside of my pale or fortification. This gave me not only egress and
regress, as it were a back-way to my tent and to my storehouse, but gave
me room to stow my goods.

And now I began to apply myself to make such necessary things as I found
I most wanted, as particularly a chair and a table; for without these I
was not able to enjoy the few comforts I had in the world. I could not
write or eat, or do several things with so much pleasure without a
table.

So I went to work; and here I must needs observe, that as reason is the
substance and original of the mathematics, so by stating and squaring
everything by reason, and by making the most rational judgment of
things, every man may be in time master of every mechanic art. I had
never handled a tool in my life; and yet in time, by labour,
application, and contrivance, I found at last that I wanted nothing but
I could have made it, especially if I had had tools. However, I made
abundance of things even without tools, and some with no more tools than
an adze and a hatchet, which, perhaps, were never made that way before,
and that with infinite labour. For example, if I wanted a board, I had
no other way but to cut down a tree, set it on an edge before me, and
hew it flat on either side with my axe, till I had brought it to be thin
as a plank, and then dub it smooth with my adze. It is true, by this
method I could make but one board out of a whole tree; but this I had no
remedy for but patience, any more than I had for the prodigious deal of
time and labour which it took me up to make a plank or board. But my
time or labour was little worth, and so it was as well employed one way
as another.

However, I made me a table and a chair, as I observed above, in the
first place, and this I did out of the short pieces of boards that I
brought on my raft from the ship. But when I had wrought out some
boards, as above, I made large shelves of the breadth of a foot and a
half one over another, all along one side of my cave, to lay all my
tools, nails, and ironwork; and, in a word, to separate everything at
large in their places, that I might come easily at them. I knocked
pieces into the wall of the rock to hang my guns and all things that
would hang up; so that had my cave been to be seen, it looked like a
general magazine of all necessary things; and I had everything so ready
at my hand, that it was a great pleasure to me to see all my goods in
such order, and especially to find my stock of all necessaries so great.

And now it was when I began to keep a journal of every day's employment;
for, indeed, at first, I was in too much hurry, and not only hurry as to
labour, but in too much discomposure of mind; and my journal would have
been full of many dull things. For example, I must have said thus:
_Sept. the 30th._--After I got to shore, and had escaped drowning,
instead of being thankful to God for my deliverance, having first
vomited with the great quantity of salt water which was gotten into my
stomach, and recovering myself a little, I ran about the shore,
wringing my hands, and beating my head and face, exclaiming at my
misery, and crying out, I was undone, undone, till, tired and faint, I
was forced to lie down on the ground to repose; but durst not sleep, for
fear of being devoured.

Some days after this, and after I had been on board the ship, and got
all that I could out of her, yet I could not forbear getting up to the
top of a little mountain, and looking out to sea, in hopes of seeing a
ship; then fancy at a vast distance I spied a sail, please myself with
the hopes of it, and then, after looking steadily till I was almost
blind, lose it quite, and sit down and weep like a child, and thus
increase my misery by my folly.

But having gotten over these things in some measure, and having settled
my household stuff and habitation, made me a table and a chair, and all
as handsome about me as I could, I began to keep my journal, of which I
shall here give you the copy (though in it will be told all these
particulars over again) as long as it lasted; for, having no more ink, I
was forced to leave it off.


                               THE JOURNAL

_September 30, 1659._--I, poor miserable Robinson Crusoe, being
shipwrecked, during a dreadful storm, in the offing, came on shore on
this dismal unfortunate island, which I called the Island of Despair,
all the rest of the ship's company being drowned, and myself almost
dead.

All the rest of that day I spent in afflicting myself at the dismal
circumstances I was brought to, viz., I had neither food, house,
clothes, weapon, or place to fly to; and in despair of any relief, saw
nothing but death before me; either that I should be devoured by wild
beasts, murdered by savages, or starved to death for want of food. At
the approach of night, I slept in a tree for fear of wild creatures, but
slept soundly, though it rained all night.

_Oct. 1._--In the morning I saw, to my great surprise, the ship had
floated with the high tide, and was driven on shore again much nearer
the island; which, as it was some comfort on one hand, for seeing her
sit upright, and not broken to pieces, I hoped, if the wind abated, I
might get on board, and get some food and necessaries out of her for my
relief; so, on the other hand, it renewed my grief at the loss of my
comrades, who, I imagined, if we had all stayed on board, might have
saved the ship, or at least that they would not have been all drowned as
they were; and that had the men been saved, we might perhaps have built
us a boat out of the ruins of the ship, to have carried us to some other
part of the world. I spent great part of this day in perplexing myself
on these things; but at length seeing the ship almost dry, I went upon
the sand as near as I could, and then swam on board; this day also it
continued raining, though with no wind at all.

From the 1st of _October_ to the 24th.--All these days entirely spent in
many several voyages to get all I could out of the ship, which I brought
on shore, every tide of flood, upon rafts. Much rain also in these days,
though with some intervals of fair weather; but, it seems, this was the
rainy season.

_Oct. 20._--I overset my raft, and all the goods I had got upon it; but
being in shoal water, and the things being chiefly heavy, I recovered
many of them when the tide was out.

_Oct. 25._--It rained all night and all day, with some gusts of wind,
during which time the ship broke in pieces, the wind blowing a little
harder than before, and was no more to be seen, except the wreck of
her, and that only at low water. I spent this day in covering and
securing the goods which I had saved, that the rain might not spoil
them.

_Oct. 26._--I walked about the shore almost all day to find out a place
to fix my habitation, greatly concerned to secure myself from an attack
in the night, either from wild beasts or men. Towards night I fixed upon
a proper place under a rock, and marked out a semicircle for my
encampment, which I resolved to strengthen with a work, wall, or
fortification made of double piles, lined within with cables, and
without with turf.

From the 26th to the 30th I worked very hard in carrying all my goods to
my new habitation, though some part of the time it rained exceeding
hard.

The 31st, in the morning, I went out into the island with my gun to see
for some food, and discover the country; when I killed a she-goat, and
her kid followed me home, which I afterwards killed also, because it
would not feed.

_Nov. 1._--I set up my tent under a rock, and lay there the first night,
making it as large as I could, with stakes driven in to swing my hammock
upon.

_Nov. 2._--I set up all my chests and boards, and the pieces of timber
which made my rafts, and with them formed a fence round me, a little
within the place I had marked out for my fortification.

_Nov. 3._--I went out with my gun, and killed two fowls like ducks,
which were very good food. In the afternoon went to work to make me a
table.

_Nov. 4._--This morning I began to order my times of work, of going out
with my gun, time of sleep, and time of diversion, viz., every morning I
walked out with my gun for two or three hours, if it did not rain; then
employed myself to work till about eleven o'clock; then eat what I had
to live on; and from twelve to two I lay down to sleep, the weather
being excessive hot; and then in the evening to work again. The working
part of this day and of the next were wholly employed in making my
table; for I was yet but a very sorry workman, though time and necessity
made me a complete natural mechanic soon after, as I believe it would do
any one else.

_Nov. 5._--This day went abroad with my gun and my dog, and killed a
wild cat; her skin pretty soft, but her flesh good for nothing. Every
creature I killed, I took off the skins and preserved them. Coming back
by the sea-shore, I saw many sorts of sea-fowls, which I did not
understand; but was surprised, and almost frighted, with two or three
seals, which, while I was gazing at, not well knowing what they were,
got into the sea, and escaped me for that time.

_Nov. 6._--After my morning walk I went to work with my table again, and
finished it, though not to my liking; nor was it long before I learned
to mend it.

_Nov. 7._--Now it began to be settled fair weather. The 7th, 8th, 9th,
10th, and part of the 12th (for the 11th was Sunday) I took wholly up to
make me a chair, and with much ado, brought it to a tolerable shape, but
never to please me; and even in the making, I pulled it in pieces
several times. Note, I soon neglected my keeping Sundays; for, omitting
my mark for them on my post, I forgot which was which.

_Nov. 13._--This day it rained, which refreshed me exceedingly, and
cooled the earth; but it was accompanied with terrible thunder and
lightning, which frighted me dreadfully, for fear of my powder. As soon
as it was over, I resolved to separate my stock of powder into as many
little parcels as possible, that it might not be in danger.

_Nov. 14, 15, 16._--These three days I spent in making little square
chests or boxes, which might hold about a pound, or two pound at most,
of powder; and so putting the powder in, I stowed it in places as secure
and remote from one another as possible. On one of these three days I
killed a large bird that was good to eat, but I know not what to call
it.

_Nov. 17._--This day I began to dig behind my tent into the rock, to
make room for my farther conveniency. Note, three things I wanted
exceedingly for this work, viz., a pick-axe, a shovel, and a wheelbarrow
or basket; so I desisted from my work, and began to consider how to
supply that want, and make me some tools. As for a pick-axe, I made use
of the iron crows, which were proper enough, though heavy; but the next
thing was a shovel or spade. This was so absolutely necessary, that
indeed I could do nothing effectually without it; but what kind of one
to make, I knew not.

_Nov. 18._--The next day, in searching the woods, I found a tree of that
wood, or like it, which in the Brazils they call the iron tree, for its
exceeding hardness; of this, with great labour, and almost spoiling my
axe, I cut a piece, and brought it home, too, with difficulty enough,
for it was exceeding heavy.

The excessive hardness of the wood, and having no other way, made me a
long while upon this machine, for I worked it effectually, by little and
little, into the form of a shovel or spade, the handle exactly shaped
like ours in England, only that the broad part having no iron shod upon
it at bottom, it would not last me so long. However, it served well
enough for the uses which I had occasion to put it to; but never was a
shovel, I believe, made after that fashion, or so long a-making.

I was still deficient, for I wanted a basket or a wheelbarrow. A basket
I could not make by any means, having no such things as twigs that would
bend to make wicker ware, at least none yet found out. And as to a
wheelbarrow, I fancied I could make all but the wheel, but that I had no
notion of, neither did I know how to go about it; besides, I had no
possible way to make the iron gudgeons for the spindle or axis of the
wheel to run in, so I gave it over; and so for carrying away the earth
which I dug out of the cave, I made me a thing like a hod which the
labourers carry mortar in, when they serve the bricklayers.

This was not so difficult to me as the making the shovel; and yet this,
and the shovel, and the attempt which I made in vain to make a
wheelbarrow, took me up no less than four days; I mean always, excepting
my morning walk with my gun, which I seldom failed, and very seldom
failed also bringing home something fit to eat.

_Nov. 23._--My other work having now stood still because of my making
these tools, when they were finished I went on, and working every day,
as my strength and time allowed, I spent eighteen days entirely in
widening and deepening my cave, that it might hold my goods
commodiously.

_Note._--During all this time I worked to make this room or cave
spacious enough to accommodate me as a warehouse or magazine, a kitchen,
a dining-room, and a cellar; as for my lodging, I kept to the tent,
except that sometimes in the wet season of the year it rained so hard,
that I could not keep myself dry, which caused me afterwards to cover
all my place within my pale with long poles, in the form of rafters,
leaning against the rock, and load them with flags and large leaves of
trees, like a thatch.

_Dec. 10._--I began now to think my cave or vault finished, when on a
sudden (it seems I had made it too large) a great quantity of earth
fell down from the top and one side, so much, that, in short, it
frighted me, and not without reason too; for if I had been under it, I
had never wanted a grave-digger. Upon this disaster I had a great deal
of work to do over again; for I had the loose earth to carry out; and,
which was of more importance, I had the ceiling to prop up, so that I
might be sure no more would come down.

_Dec. 11._--This day I went to work with it accordingly, and got two
shores or posts pitched upright to the top, with two pieces of boards
across over each post. This I finished the next day; and setting more
posts up with boards, in about a week more I had the roof secure; and
the posts standing in rows, served me for partitions to part of my
house.

_Dec. 17._--From this day to the twentieth I placed shelves, and knocked
up nails on the posts to hang everything up that could be hung up; and
now I began to be in some order within doors.

_Dec. 20._--Now I carried everything into the cave, and began to furnish
my house, and set up some pieces of boards, like a dresser, to order my
victuals upon; but boards began to be very scarce with me; also I made
me another table.

_Dec. 24._--Much rain all night and all day; no stirring out.

_Dec. 25._--Rain all day.

_Dec. 26._--No rain, and the earth much cooler than before, and
pleasanter.

_Dec. 27._--Killed a young goat, and lamed another, so that I catched
it, and led it home in a string. When I had it home, I bound and
splintered up its leg, which was broke. _N.B._--I took such care of it,
that it lived; and the leg grew well and as strong as ever; but by my
nursing it so long it grew tame, and fed upon the little green at my
door, and would not go away. This was the first time that I entertained
a thought of breeding up some tame creatures, that I might have food
when my powder and shot was all spent.

_Dec. 28, 29, 30._--Great heats and no breeze, so that there was no
stirring abroad, except in the evening, for food. This time I spent in
putting all my things in order within doors.

_Jan. 1._--Very hot still, but I went abroad early and late with my gun,
and lay still in the middle of the day. This evening, going farther into
the valleys which lay towards the centre of the island, I found there
was plenty of goats, though exceeding shy, and hard to come at. However,
I resolved to try if I could not bring my dog to hunt them down.

_Jan. 2._--Accordingly, the next day, I went out with my dog, and set
him upon the goats; but I was mistaken, for they all faced about upon
the dog; and he knew his danger too well, for he would not come near
them.

_Jan. 3._--I began my fence or wall; which, being still jealous of my
being attacked by somebody, I resolved to make very thick and strong.

_N.B._--This wall being described before, I purposely omit what was said
in the journal. It is sufficient to observe that I was no less time than
from the 3rd of January to the 14th of April working, finishing, and
perfecting this wall, though it was no more than about twenty-four yards
in length, being a half circle from one place in the rock to another
place about eight yards from it, the door of the cave being in the
centre behind it.

[Illustration: "I believe it was the first gun that had been fired there
since the creation of the world." (See p. 68.)]

All this time I worked very hard, the rains hindering me many days, nay,
sometimes weeks together; but I thought I should never be perfectly
secure till this wall was finished. And it is scarce credible what
inexpressible labour everything was done with, especially the bringing
piles out of the woods, and driving them into the ground; for I made
them much bigger than I need to have done.

When this wall was finished, and the outside double-fenced with a
turf-wall raised up close to it, I persuaded myself that if any people
were to come on shore there, they would not perceive anything like a
habitation; and it was very well I did so, as may be observed hereafter
upon a very remarkable occasion.

During this time, I made my rounds in the woods for game every day, when
the rain admitted me, and made frequent discoveries in these walks of
something or other to my advantage; particularly I found a kind of wild
pigeons, who built, not as wood pigeons, in a tree, but rather as house
pigeons, in the holes of the rocks. And taking some young ones, I
endeavoured to breed them up tame, and did so; but when they grew older
they flew all away, which, perhaps, was at first for want of feeding
them, for I had nothing to give them. However, I frequently found their
nests, and got their young ones, which were very good meat.

And now in the managing my household affairs I found myself wanting in
many things, which I thought at first it was impossible for me to make,
as indeed, as to some of them, it was. For instance, I could never make
a cask to be hooped; I had a small runlet or two, as I observed before,
but I could never arrive to the capacity of making one by them, though I
spent many weeks about it. I could neither put in the heads, or joint
the staves so true to one another, as to make them hold water; so I gave
that also over.

In the next place, I was at a great loss for candle; so that as soon as
ever it was dark, which was generally by seven o'clock, I was obliged to
go to bed. I remembered the lump of beeswax with which I made candles in
my African adventure, but I had none of that now. The only remedy I had
was, that when I had killed a goat I saved the tallow, and with a little
dish made of clay, which I baked in the sun, to which I added a wick of
some oakum, I made me a lamp; and this gave me light, though not a clear
steady light like a candle.

In the middle of all my labours it happened, that rummaging my things, I
found a little bag, which, as I hinted before, had been filled with corn
for the feeding of poultry, not for this voyage, but before, as I
suppose, when the ship came from Lisbon. What little remainder of corn
had been in the bag was all devoured with the rats, and I saw nothing in
the bag but husks and dust; and being willing to have the bag for some
other use, I think it was to put powder in, when I divided it for fear
of the lightning, or some such use, I shook the husks of corn out of it
on one side of my fortification, under the rock. It was a little before
the great rains, just now mentioned, that I threw this stuff away,
taking no notice of anything, and not so much as remembering that I had
thrown anything there; when, about a month after, or thereabout, I saw
some few stalks of something green shooting out of the ground, which I
fancied might be some plant I had not seen; but I was surprised, and
perfectly astonished, when, after a little longer time, I saw about ten
or twelve ears come out, which were perfect green barley of the same
kind as our European, nay, as our English barley.

It is impossible to express the astonishment and confusion of my
thoughts on this occasion. I had hitherto acted upon no religious
foundation at all; indeed, I had very few notions of religion in my
head, or had entertained any sense of anything that had befallen me
otherwise than as a chance, or, as we lightly say, what pleases God;
without so much as inquiring into the end of Providence in these things,
or His order in governing events in the world. But after I saw barley
grow there, in a climate which I know was not proper for corn, and
especially that I knew not how it came there, it startled me strangely,
and I began to suggest that God had miraculously caused this grain to
grow without any help of seed sown, and that it was so directed purely
for my sustenance on that wild miserable place.

This touched my heart a little, and brought tears out of my eyes; and I
began to bless myself, that such a prodigy of Nature should happen upon
my account; and this was the more strange to me, because I saw near it
still, all along by the side of the rock, some other straggling stalks,
which proved to be stalks of rice, and which I knew, because I had seen
it grow in Africa, when I was ashore there.

I not only thought these the pure productions of Providence for my
support, but, not doubting but that there was more in the place, I went
all over that part of the island where I had been before, peering in
every corner, and under every rock, to see for more of it; but I could
not find any. At last it occurred to my thoughts that I had shook a bag
of chickens' meal out in that place, and then the wonder began to cease;
and I must confess, my religious thankfulness to God's providence began
to abate too, upon the discovering that all this was nothing but what
was common; though I ought to have been as thankful for so strange and
unforeseen providence, as if it had been miraculous; for it was really
the work of Providence as to me, that should order or appoint, that ten
or twelve grains of corn should remain unsoiled (when the rats had
destroyed all the rest), as if it had been dropped from heaven; as also
that I should throw it out in that particular place, where, it being in
the shade of a high rock, it sprang out immediately; whereas, if I had
thrown it anywhere else at that time, it had been burnt up and
destroyed.

I carefully saved the ears of this corn, you may be sure, in their
season, which was about the end of June; and laying up every corn, I
resolved to sow them all again, hoping in time to have some quantity
sufficient to supply me with bread. But it was not till the fourth year
that I could allow myself the least grain of this corn to eat, and even
then but sparingly, as I shall say afterwards in its order; for I lost
all that I sowed the first season, by not observing the proper time; for
I sowed it just before the dry season, so that it never came up at all,
at least not as it would have done; of which in its place.

Besides this barley, there was, as above, twenty or thirty stalks of
rice, which I preserved with the same care, and whose use was of the
same kind, or to the same purpose, viz., to make me bread, or rather
food; for I found ways to cook it up without baking, though I did that
also after some time. But to return to my journal.

I worked excessive hard these three or four months to get my wall done;
and the 14th of April I closed it up, contriving to go into it, not by a
door, but over the wall by a ladder, that there might be no sign in the
outside of my habitation.

_April 16._--I finished the ladder, so I went up with the ladder to the
top, and then pulled it up after me, and let it down on the inside. This
was a complete enclosure to me; for within I had room enough, and
nothing could come at me from without, unless it could first mount my
wall.

The very next day after this wall was finished, I had almost had all my
labour overthrown at once, and myself killed. The case was thus: As I
was busy in the inside of it, behind my tent, just in the entrance into
my cave, I was terribly frighted with a most dreadful surprising thing
indeed; for all on a sudden I found the earth come crumbling down from
the roof of my cave, and from the edge of the hill over my head, and two
of the posts I had set up in the cave cracked in a frightful manner. I
was heartily scared, but thought nothing of what was really the cause,
only thinking that the top of my cave was falling in, as some of it had
done before; and for fear I should be buried in it, I ran forward to my
ladder; and not thinking myself safe there neither, I got over my wall
for fear of the pieces of the hill which I expected might roll down upon
me. I was no sooner stepped down upon the firm ground, but I plainly saw
it was a terrible earthquake; for the ground I stood on shook three
times at about eight minutes' distance, with three such shocks, as would
have overturned the strongest building that could be supposed to have
stood on the earth; and a great piece of the top of a rock, which stood
about half a mile from me next the sea, fell down with such a terrible
noise, as I never heard in all my life. I perceived also the very sea
was put into violent motion by it; and I believe the shocks were
stronger under the water than on the island.

I was so amazed with the thing itself, having never felt the like, or
discoursed with any one that had, that I was like one dead or stupefied;
and the motion of the earth made my stomach sick, like one that was
tossed at sea. But the noise of the falling of the rock awaked me, as it
were, and rousing me from the stupefied condition I was in, filled me
with horror, and I thought of nothing then but the hill falling upon my
tent and all my household goods, and burying all at once; and this sunk
my very soul within me a second time.

After the third shock was over, and I felt no more for some time, I
began to take courage; and yet I had not heart enough to go over my wall
again, for fear of being buried alive, but sat still upon the ground,
greatly cast down and disconsolate, not knowing what to do. All this
while I had not the least serious religious thought, nothing but the
common, "Lord, have mercy upon me!" and when it was over, that went away
too.

While I sat thus, I found the air overcast, and grow cloudy, as if it
would rain. Soon after that the wind rose by little and little, so that
in less than half an hour it blew a most dreadful hurricane. The sea was
all on a sudden covered over with foam and froth; the shore was covered
with the breach of the water; the trees were torn up by the roots; and a
terrible storm it was; and this held about three hours, and then began
to abate; and in two hours more it was stark calm, and began to rain
very hard.

All this while I sat upon the ground, very much terrified and dejected;
when on a sudden it came into my thoughts, that these winds and rain
being the consequences of the earthquake, the earthquake itself was
spent and over, and I might venture into my cave again. With this
thought my spirits began to revive; and the rain also helping to
persuade me, I went in and sat down in my tent. But the rain was so
violent, that my tent was ready to be beaten down with it, and I was
forced to go into my cave, though very much afraid and uneasy, for fear
it should fall on my head.

This violent rain forced me to a new work, viz., to cut a hole through
my new fortification, like a sink, to let the water go out, which would
else have drowned my cave. After I had been in my cave some time, and
found still no more shocks of the earthquake follow, I began to be more
composed. And now to support my spirits, which indeed wanted it very
much, I went to my little store, and took a small sup of rum, which,
however, I did then, and always very sparingly, knowing I could have no
more when that was gone.

It continued raining all that night and great part of the next day, so
that I could not stir abroad; but my mind being more composed, I began
to think of what I had best do, concluding that if the island was
subject to these earthquakes, there would be no living for me in a cave,
but I must consider of building me some little hut in an open place,
which I might surround with a wall, as I had done here, and so make
myself secure from wild beasts or men; but concluded, if I stayed where
I was, I should certainly, one time or other, be buried alive.

With these thoughts I resolved to remove my tent from the place where it
stood, which was just under the hanging precipice of the hill, and
which, if it should be shaken again, would certainly fall upon my tent;
and I spent the two next days, being the 19th and 20th of April, in
contriving where and how to remove my habitation.

The fear of being swallowed up alive made me that I never slept in
quiet; and yet the apprehension of lying abroad without any fence was
almost equal to it. But still, when I looked about and saw how
everything was put in order, how pleasantly concealed I was, and how
safe from danger, it made me very loth to remove.

In the meantime it occurred to me that it would require a vast deal of
time for me to do this, and that I must be contented to run the venture
where I was, till I had formed a camp for myself, and had secured it so
as to remove to it. So with this resolution I composed myself for a
time, and resolved that I would go to work with all speed to build me a
wall with piles and cables, etc., in a circle as before, and set my tent
up in it when it was finished, but that I would venture to stay where I
was till it was finished, and fit to remove to. This was the 21st.

_April 22._--The next morning I began to consider of means to put this
resolve in execution; but I was at a great loss about my tools. I had
three large axes, and abundance of hatchets (for we carried the hatchets
for traffic with the Indians), but with much chopping and cutting knotty
hard wood, they were all full of notches and dull; and though I had a
grindstone, I could not turn it and grind my tools too. This cost me as
much thought as a statesman would have bestowed upon a grand point of
politics, or a judge upon the life and death of a man. At length I
contrived a wheel with a string, to turn it with my foot, that I might
have both my hands at liberty. Note, I had never seen any such thing in
England, or at least not to take notice how it was done, though since I
have observed it is very common there; besides that, my grindstone was
very large and heavy. This machine cost me a full week's work to bring
it to perfection.

_April 28, 29._--These two whole days I took up in grinding my tools, my
machine for turning my grindstone performing very well.

_April 30._--Having perceived my bread had been low a great while, now I
took a survey of it, and reduced myself to one biscuit-cake a day, which
made my heart very heavy.

_May 1._--In the morning, looking towards the seaside, the tide being
low, I saw something lie on the shore bigger than ordinary, and it
looked like a cask. When I came to it, I found a small barrel, and two
or three pieces of the wreck of the ship, which were driven on shore by
the late hurricane; and looking towards the wreck itself, I thought it
seemed to lie higher out of the water than it used to do. I examined the
barrel which was driven on shore, and soon found it was a barrel of
gunpowder; but it had taken water, and the powder was caked as hard as
stone. However, I rolled it farther on shore for the present, and went
on upon the sands as near as I could to the wreck of the ship to look
for more.

When I came down to the ship I found it strangely removed. The
forecastle, which lay before buried in sand, was heaved up at least six
feet; and the stern, which was broken to pieces, and parted from the
rest by the force of the sea soon after I had left rummaging her, was
tossed, as it were, up, and cast on one side, and the sand was thrown so
high on that side next her stern, that whereas there was a great place
of water before, so that I could not come within a quarter of a mile of
the wreck without swimming, I could now walk quite up to her when the
tide was out. I was surprised with this at first, but soon concluded it
must be done by the earthquake. And as by this violence the ship was
more broken open than formerly, so many things came daily on shore,
which the sea had loosened, and which the winds and water rolled by
degrees to the land.

This wholly diverted my thoughts from the design of removing my
habitation; and I busied myself mightily, that day especially, in
searching whether I could make any way into the ship. But I found
nothing was to be expected of that kind, for that all the inside of the
ship was choked up with sand. However, as I had learned not to despair
of anything, I resolved to pull everything to pieces that I could of the
ship, concluding, that everything I could get from her would be of some
use or other to me.

_May 3._--I began with my saw, and cut a piece of a beam through, which
I thought held some of the upper part or quarter-deck together; and when
I had cut it through, I cleared away the sand as well as I could from
the side which lay highest; but the tide coming in, I was obliged to
give over for that time.

_May 4._--I went a-fishing, but caught not one fish that I durst eat of,
till I was weary of my sport; when, just going to leave off, I caught a
young dolphin. I had made me a long line of some rope-yarn, but I had no
hooks; yet I frequently caught fish enough, as much as I cared to eat;
all which I dried in the sun, and eat them dry.

_May 5._--Worked on the wreck, cut another beam asunder, and brought
three great fir-planks off from the decks, which I tied together, and
made swim on shore, when the tide of flood came on.

_May 6._--Worked on the wreck, got several iron bolts out of her, and
other pieces of ironwork; worked very hard, and came home very much
tired, and had thoughts of giving it over.

_May 7._--Went to the wreck again, but with an intent not to work, but
found the weight of the wreck had broke itself down, the beams being
cut; that several pieces of the ship seemed to lie loose, and the inside
of the hold lay so open, that I could see into it, but almost full of
water and sand.

_May 8._--Went to the wreck, and carried an iron crow to wrench up the
deck, which lay now quite clear of the water and sand. I wrenched open
two planks, and brought them on shore also with the tide. I left the
iron crow in the wreck for the next day.

_May 9._--Went to the wreck, and with the crow made way into the body
of the wreck, and felt several casks, and loosened them with the crow,
but could not break them up. I felt also the roll of English lead, and
could stir it, but it was too heavy to remove.

_May 10, 11, 12, 13, 14._--Went every day to the wreck, and got a great
deal of pieces of timber, and boards, or plank, and two or three
hundredweight of iron.

_May 15._--I carried two hatchets to try if I could not cut a piece off
of the roll of lead, by placing the edge of one hatchet, and driving it
with the other; but as it lay about a foot and a half in the water, I
could not make any blow to drive the hatchet.

_May 16._--It had blowed hard in the night, and the wreck appeared more
broken by the force of the water; but I stayed so long in the woods to
get pigeons for food, that the tide prevented me going to the wreck that
day.

_May 17._--I saw some pieces of the wreck blown on shore, at a great
distance, near two miles off me, but resolved to see what they were, and
found it was a piece of the head, but too heavy for me to bring away.

_May 24._--Every day to this day I worked on the wreck, and with hard
labour I loosened some things so much with the crow, that the first
blowing tide several casks floated out, and two of the seamen's chests.
But the wind blowing from the shore, nothing came to land that day but
pieces of timber, and a hogshead, which had some Brazil pork in it, but
the salt water and the sand had spoiled it.

I continued this work every day to the 15th of June, except the time
necessary to get food, which I always appointed, during this part of my
employment, to be when the tide was up, that I might be ready when it
was ebbed out. And by this time I had gotten timber, and plank, and
ironwork enough to have builded a good boat, if I had known how; and
also, I got at several times, and in several pieces, near one
hundredweight of the sheet lead.

_June 16._--Going down to the seaside, I found a large tortoise, or
turtle. This was the first I had seen, which it seems was only my
misfortune, not any defect of the place, or scarcity; for had I happened
to be on the other side of the island, I might have had hundreds of them
every day, as I found afterwards; but, perhaps, had paid dear enough for
them.

_June 17._--I spent in cooking the turtle. I found in her threescore
eggs; and her flesh was to me, at that time, the most savoury and
pleasant that ever I tasted in my life, having had no flesh, but of
goats and fowls, since I landed in this horrid place.

_June 18._--Rained all day, and I stayed within. I thought at this time
the rain felt cold, and I was something chilly, which I knew was not
usual in that latitude.

_June 19._--Very ill, and shivering, as if the weather had been cold.

_June 20._--No rest all night; violent pains in my head, and feverish.

_June 21._--Very ill, frighted almost to death with the apprehensions of
my sad condition, to be sick, and no help. Prayed to God for the first
time since the storm off of Hull, but scarce knew what I said, or why;
my thoughts being all confused.

_June 22._--A little better, but under dreadful apprehensions of
sickness.

_June 23._--Very bad again; cold and shivering, and then a violent
headache.

_June 24._--Much better.

_June 25._--An ague very violent; the fit held me seven hours; cold fit,
and hot, with faint sweats after it.

_June 26._--Better; and having no victuals to eat, took my gun, but
found myself very weak. However, I killed a she-goat, and with much
difficulty got it home, and broiled some of it, and eat. I would fain
have stewed it and made some broth, but had no pot.

_June 27._--The ague again so violent that I lay abed all day, and
neither eat nor drank. I was ready to perish for thirst; but so weak, I
had not strength to stand up, or to get myself any water to drink.
Prayed to God again, but was light-headed; and when I was not, I was so
ignorant that I knew not what to say; only I lay and cried, "Lord, look
upon me! Lord, pity me! Lord, have mercy upon me!" I suppose I did
nothing else for two or three hours, till the fit wearing off, I fell
asleep, and did not wake till far in the night. When I waked, I found
myself much refreshed, but weak, and exceeding thirsty. However, as I
had no water in my whole habitation, I was forced to lie till morning,
and went to sleep again. In this second sleep I had this terrible dream.

I thought that I was sitting on the ground, on the outside of my wall,
where I sat when the storm blew after the earthquake, and that I saw a
man descend from a great black cloud, in a bright flame of fire, and
light upon the ground. He was all over as bright as a flame, so that I
could but just bear to look towards him. His countenance was most
inexpressibly dreadful, impossible for words to describe. When he
stepped upon the ground with his feet, I thought the earth trembled,
just as it had done before in the earthquake, and all the air looked, to
my apprehension, as if it had been filled with flashes of fire.

[Illustration: "I smiled to myself at the sight of this money." (See p.
72.)]

He was no sooner landed upon the earth, but he moved forward towards me,
with a long spear or weapon in his hand, to kill me; and when he came
to a rising ground, at some distance, he spoke to me, or I heard a voice
so terrible, that it is impossible to express the terror of it. All that
I can say I understood was this: "Seeing all these things have not
brought thee to repentance, now thou shalt die;" at which words I
thought he lifted up the spear that was in his hand to kill me.

No one that shall ever read this account, will expect that I should be
able to describe the horrors of my soul at this terrible vision; I mean,
that even while it was a dream, I even dreamed of these horrors; nor is
it any more possible to describe the impression that remained upon my
mind when I awaked, and found it was but a dream.

I had, alas! no divine knowledge; what I had received by the good
instruction of my father was then worn out, by an uninterrupted series,
for eight years, of seafaring wickedness, and a constant conversation
with nothing but such as were, like myself, wicked and profane to the
last degree. I do not remember that I had, in all that time, one thought
that so much as tended either to looking upwards toward God, or inwards
toward a reflection upon my ways; but a certain stupidity of soul,
without desire of good, or conscience of evil, had entirely overwhelmed
me; and I was all that the most hardened, unthinking, wicked creature
among our common sailors can be supposed to be; not having the least
sense, either of the fear of God in danger, or of thankfulness to God in
deliverances.

In the relating what is already past of my story, this will be the more
easily believed, when I shall add, that through all the variety of
miseries that had to this day befallen me, I never had so much as one
thought of it being the hand of God, or that it was a just punishment
for my sin; my rebellious behaviour against my father, or my present
sins, which were great; or so much as a punishment for the general
course of my wicked life. When I was on the desperate expedition on the
desert shores of Africa, I never had so much as one thought of what
would become of me; or one wish to God to direct me whither I should go,
or to keep me from the danger which apparently surrounded me, as well
from voracious creatures as cruel savages. But I was merely thoughtless
of a God or a Providence; acted like a mere brute from the principles of
Nature, and by the dictates of common sense only, and indeed hardly
that.

When I was delivered and taken up at sea by the Portugal captain, well
used, and dealt justly and honourably with, as well as charitably, I had
not the least thankfulness in my thoughts. When again I was shipwrecked,
ruined, and in danger of drowning on this island, I was as far from
remorse, or looking on it as a judgment; I only said to myself often,
that I was an unfortunate dog, and born to be always miserable.

It is true, when I got on shore first here, and found all my ship's crew
drowned, and myself spared, I was surprised with a kind of ecstasy, and
some transports of soul, which, had the grace of God assisted, might
have come up to true thankfulness; but it ended where it begun, in a
mere common flight of joy, or, as I may say, being glad I was alive,
without the least reflection upon the distinguishing goodness of the
hand which had preserved me, and had singled me out to be preserved,
when all the rest were destroyed; or an inquiry why Providence had been
thus merciful to me; even just the same common sort of joy which seamen
generally have after they are got safe ashore from a shipwreck, which
they drown all in the next bowl of punch, and forget almost as soon as
it is over, and all the rest of my life was like it.

Even when I was afterwards, on due consideration, made sensible of my
condition, how I was cast on this dreadful place, out of the reach of
human kind, out of all hope of relief, or prospect of redemption, as
soon as I saw but a prospect of living, and that I should not starve and
perish for hunger, all the sense of my affliction wore off, and I began
to be very easy, applied myself to the works proper for my preservation
and supply, and was far enough from being afflicted, at my condition, as
a judgment from heaven, or, as the hand of God against me; these were
thoughts which very seldom entered into my head.

The growing up of the corn, as is hinted in my journal, had at first
some little influence upon me, and began to affect me with seriousness,
as long as I thought it had something miraculous in it; but as soon as
ever that part of the thought was removed, all the impression which was
raised from it wore off also, as I have noted already.

Even the earthquake, though nothing could be more terrible in its
nature, or more immediately directing to the invisible Power, which
alone directs such things, yet no sooner was the first fright over, but
the impression it had made went off also. I had no more sense of God or
His judgments, much less of the present affliction of my circumstances
being from His hand, than if I had been in the most prosperous condition
of life.

But now, when I began to be sick, and a leisurely view of the miseries
of death came to place itself before me; when my spirits began to sink
under the burthen of a strong distemper, and Nature was exhausted with
the violence of the fever; conscience, that had slept so long, began to
awake, and I began to reproach myself with my past life, in which I had
so evidently, by uncommon wickedness, provoked the justice of God to lay
me under uncommon strokes, and to deal with me in so vindictive a
manner.

These reflections oppressed me for the second or third day of my
distemper; and in the violence, as well of the fever as of the dreadful
reproaches of my conscience, extorted some words from me, like praying
to God, though I cannot say they were either a prayer attended with
desires or with hopes; it was rather the voice of mere fright and
distress. My thoughts were confused, the convictions great upon my mind,
and the horror of dying in such a miserable condition, raised vapours
into my head with the mere apprehensions; and in these hurries of my
soul, I know not what my tongue might express; but it was rather
exclamation, such as, "Lord! what a miserable creature am I! If I should
be sick, I shall certainly die for want of help; and what will become of
me?" Then the tears burst out of my eyes, and I could say no more for a
good while.

In this interval, the good advice of my father came to my mind, and
presently his prediction, which I mentioned at the beginning of this
story, viz., that if I did take this foolish step, God would not bless
me, and I would have leisure hereafter to reflect upon having neglected
his counsel, when there might be none to assist in my recovery. "Now,"
said I aloud, "my dear father's words are come to pass; God's justice
has overtaken me, and I have none to help or hear me. I rejected the
voice of Providence, which had mercifully put me in a posture or station
of life wherein I might have been happy and easy; but I would neither
see it myself, or learn to know the blessing of it from my parents. I
left them to mourn over my folly, and now I am left to mourn under the
consequences of it. I refused their help and assistance, who would have
lifted me into the world, and would have made everything easy to me; and
now I have difficulties to struggle with, too great for even Nature
itself to support, and no assistance, no help, no comfort, no advice."
Then I cried out, "Lord, be my help, for I am in great distress."

This was the first prayer, if I may call it so, that I had made for many
years. But I return to my journal.

_June 28._--Having been somewhat refreshed with the sleep I had had, and
the fit being entirely off, I got up; and though the fright and terror
of my dream was very great, yet I considered that the fit of the ague
would return again the next day, and now was my time to get something to
refresh and support myself when I should be ill. And the first thing I
did I filled a large square case-bottle with water, and set it upon my
table, in reach of my bed; and to take off the chill or aguish
disposition of the water, I put about a quarter of a pint of rum into
it, and mixed them together. Then I got me a piece of the goat's flesh,
and broiled it on the coals, but could eat very little. I walked about,
but was very weak, and withal very sad and heavy-hearted in the sense of
my miserable condition, dreading the return of my distemper the next
day. At night I made my supper of three of the turtle's eggs, which I
roasted in the ashes, and eat, as we call it, in the shell; and this was
the first bit of meat I had ever asked God's blessing to, even as I
could remember, in my whole life.

After I had eaten, I tried to walk, but found myself so weak, that I
could hardly carry the gun (for I never went out without that); so I
went but a little way, and sat down upon the ground, looking out upon
the sea, which was just before me, and very calm and smooth. As I sat
there, some such thoughts as these occurred to me.

What is this earth and sea, of which I have seen so much? whence is it
produced? And what am I, and all the other creatures, wild and tame,
human and brutal, whence are we? Sure we are all made by some secret
Power, who formed the earth and sea, the air and sky. And who is that?

Then it followed most naturally, It is God that has made it all. Well,
but then it came on strangely, if God has made all these things, He
guides and governs them all, and all things that concern them; for the
Power that could make all things, must certainly have power to guide and
direct them.

If so, nothing can happen in the great circuit of His works, either
without His knowledge or appointment. And if nothing happens without His
knowledge, He knows that I am here, and am in this dreadful condition.
And if nothing happens without His appointment, He has appointed all
this to befall me.

Nothing occurred to my thoughts to contradict any of these conclusions;
and therefore it rested upon me with the greater force, that it must
needs be that God had appointed all this to befall me; that I was
brought to this miserable circumstance by His direction, He having the
sole power, not of me only, but of everything that happened in the
world. Immediately it followed, Why has God done this to me? What have I
done to be thus used?

My conscience presently checked me in that inquiry, as if I had
blasphemed, and methought it spoke to me like a voice: "Wretch! dost
thou ask what thou hast done? Look back upon a dreadful misspent life,
and ask thyself what thou hast not done? Ask, Why is it that thou wert
not long ago destroyed? Why wert thou not drowned in Yarmouth Roads;
killed in the fight when the ship was taken by the Sallee man-of-war;
devoured by the wild beasts on the coast of Africa; or drowned here,
when all the crew perished but thyself? Dost thou ask, What have I
done?"

I was struck dumb with these reflections, as one astonished, and had not
a word to say, no, not to answer to myself, but rose up pensive and sad,
walked back to my retreat, and went up over my wall, as if I had been
going to bed. But my thoughts were sadly disturbed, and I had no
inclination to sleep; so I sat down in my chair, and lighted my lamp,
for it began to be dark. Now, as the apprehension of the return of my
distemper terrified me very much, it occurred to my thought that the
Brazilians take no physic but their tobacco for almost all distempers;
and I had a piece of a roll of tobacco in one of the chests, which was
quite cured, and some also that was green, and not quite cured.

I went, directed by Heaven no doubt; for in this chest I found a cure
both for soul and body. I opened the chest, and found what I looked for,
viz., the tobacco; and as the few books I had saved lay there too, I
took out one of the Bibles which I mentioned before, and which to this
time I had not found leisure, or so much as inclination, to look into. I
say, I took it out, and brought both that and the tobacco with me to the
table.

What use to make of the tobacco I knew not, as to my distemper, or
whether it was good for it or no; but I tried several experiments with
it, as if I was resolved it should hit one way or other. I first took a
piece of a leaf, and chewed it in my mouth, which indeed at first almost
stupefied my brain, the tobacco being green and strong, and that I had
not been much used to it. Then I took some and steeped it an hour or two
in some rum, and resolved to take a dose of it when I lay down. And
lastly, I burnt some upon a pan of coals, and held my nose close over
the smoke of it, as long as I could bear it, as well for the heat, as
almost for suffocation.

In the interval of this operation, I took up the Bible, and began to
read, but my head was too much disturbed with the tobacco to bear
reading, at least that time; only having opened the book casually, the
first words that occurred to me were these, "Call on Me in the day of
trouble, and I will deliver, and thou shalt glorify Me."

The words were very apt to my case, and made some impression upon my
thoughts at the time of reading them, though not so much as they did
afterwards; for as for being delivered, the word had no sound, as I may
say, to me, the thing was so remote, so impossible in my apprehension of
things, that I began to say, as the children of Israel did when they
were promised flesh to eat, "Can God spread a table in the wilderness,"
so I began to say, Can God Himself deliver me from this place? And as it
was not for many years that any hope appeared, this prevailed very often
upon my thoughts. But, however, the words made a great impression upon
me, and I mused upon them very often.

It grew now late, and the tobacco had, as I said, dozed my head so much,
that I inclined to sleep; so I left my lamp burning in the cave, lest I
should want anything in the night, and went to bed. But before I lay
down, I did what I never had done in all my life; I kneeled down, and
prayed to God to fulfil the promise to me, that if I called upon Him in
the day of trouble, He would deliver me. After my broken and imperfect
prayer was over, I drank the rum in which I had steeped the tobacco;
which was so strong and rank of the tobacco, that indeed I could scarce
get it down. Immediately upon this I went to bed. I found presently it
flew up in my head violently; but I fell into a sound sleep, and waked
no more till, by the sun, it must necessarily be near three o'clock in
the afternoon the next day. Nay, to this hour I am partly of the opinion
that I slept all the next day and night, and till almost three that day
after; for otherwise I knew not how I should lose a day out of my
reckoning in the days of the week, as it appeared some years after I had
done. For if I had lost it by crossing and re-crossing the line, I
should have lost more than one day. But certainly I lost a day in my
account, and never knew which way.

Be that, however, one way or the other, when I awaked I found myself
exceedingly refreshed, and my spirits lively and cheerful. When I got
up, I was stronger than I was the day before, and my stomach better, for
I was hungry; and, in short, I had no fit the next day, but continued
much altered for the better. This was the 29th.

The 30th was my well day, of course, and I went abroad with my gun, but
did not care to travel too far. I killed a sea-fowl or two, something
like a brand goose, and brought them home, but was not very forward to
eat them; so I eat some more of the turtle's eggs, which were very good.
This evening I renewed the medicine, which I had supposed did me good
the day before, viz., the tobacco steeped in rum; only I did not take so
much as before, nor did I chew any of the leaf, or hold my head over the
smoke. However, I was not so well the next day, which was the first of
July, as I hoped I should have been; for I had a little spice of the
cold fit, but it was not much.

_July 2._--I renewed the medicine all the three ways; and dosed myself
with it as at first, and doubled the quantity which I drank.

_July 3._--I missed the fit for good and all, though I did not recover
my full strength for some weeks after. While I was thus gathering
strength, my thoughts ran exceedingly upon this Scripture, "I will
deliver thee"; and the impossibility of my deliverance lay much upon my
mind, in bar of my ever expecting it. But as I was discouraging myself
with such thoughts, it occurred to my mind that I pored so much upon my
deliverance from the main affliction, that I disregarded the deliverance
I had received; and I was, as it were, made to ask myself such questions
as these, viz., Have I not been delivered, and wonderfully too, from
sickness? from the most distressed condition that could be, and that was
so frightful to me? and what notice had I taken of it? Had I done my
part? God had delivered me, but I had not glorified Him; that is to say,
I had not owned and been thankful for that as a deliverance; and how
could I expect greater deliverance?

This touched my heart very much; and immediately I kneeled down, and
gave God thanks aloud for my recovery from my sickness.

_July 4._--In the morning I took the Bible; and beginning at the New
Testament, I began seriously to read it, and imposed upon myself to read
awhile every morning and every night, not tying myself to the number of
chapters, but as long as my thoughts should engage me. It was not long
after I set seriously to this work, but I found my heart more deeply and
sincerely affected with the wickedness of my past life. The impression
of my dream revived, and the words, "All these things have not brought
thee to repentance" ran seriously in my thought. I was earnestly begging
of God to give me repentance, when it happened providentially, the very
day, that, reading the Scripture, I came to these words, "He is exalted
a Prince and a Saviour, to give repentance, and to give remission." I
threw down the book; and with my heart as well as my hands lifted up to
heaven, in a kind of ecstasy of joy, I cried out aloud, "Jesus, Thou
son of David! Jesus, Thou exalted Prince and Saviour, give me
repentance!"

This was the first time that I could say, in the true sense of the
words, that I prayed in all my life; for now I prayed with a sense of my
condition, and with a true Scripture view of hope founded on the
encouragement of the Word of God; and from this time, I may say, I began
to have hope that God would hear me.

Now I began to construe the words mentioned above, "Call on Me, and I
will deliver you," in a different sense from what I had ever done
before; for then I had no notion of anything being called deliverance
but my being delivered from the captivity I was in; for though I was
indeed at large in the place, yet the island was certainly a prison to
me, and that in the worst sense in the world. But now I learned to take
it in another sense; now I looked back upon my past life with such
horror, and my sins appeared so dreadful, that my soul sought nothing of
God but deliverance from the load of guilt that bore down all my
comfort. As for my solitary life, it was nothing; I did not so much as
pray to be delivered from it or think of it; it was all of no
consideration, in comparison to this. And I add this part here, to hint
to whoever shall read it, that whenever they come to a true sense of
things, they will find deliverance from sin a much greater blessing than
deliverance from affliction.

But leaving this part, I return to my journal.

My condition began now to be, though not less miserable as to my way of
living, yet much easier to my mind; and my thoughts being directed, by a
constant reading the Scripture, and praying to God, to things of a
higher nature, I had a great deal of comfort within, which, till now, I
knew nothing of. Also, as my health and strength returned, I bestirred
myself to furnish myself with everything that I wanted, and make my way
of living as regular as I could.

From the 4th of July to the 14th, I was chiefly employed in walking
about with my gun in my hand, a little and a little at a time, as a man
that was gathering up his strength after a fit of sickness; for it is
hardly to be imagined how low I was, and to what weakness I was reduced.
The application which I made use of was perfectly new, and perhaps what
had never cured an ague before; neither can I recommend it to any one to
practise, by this experiment; and though it did carry off the fit, yet
it rather contributed to weakening me; for I had frequent convulsions in
my nerves and limbs for some time.

I learnt from it also this, in particular, that being abroad in the
rainy season was the most pernicious thing to my health that could be,
especially in those rains which came attended with storms and hurricanes
of wind; for as the rain which came in the dry season was always most
accompanied with such storms, so I found that rain was much more
dangerous than the rain which fell in September and October.

I had been now in this unhappy island above ten months; all possibility
of deliverance from this condition seemed to be entirely taken from me;
and I firmly believed that no human shape had ever set foot upon that
place. Having now secured my habitation, as I thought, fully to my mind,
I had a great desire to make a more perfect discovery of the island, and
to see what other productions I might find, which I yet knew nothing of.

It was the 15th of July that I began to take a more particular survey of
the island itself. I went up the creek first, where, as I hinted, I
brought my rafts on shore. I found, after I came about two miles up,
that the tide did not flow any higher, and that it was no more than a
little brook of running water, and very fresh and good; but this being
the dry season, there was hardly any water in some parts of it, at
least, not enough to run in any stream, so as it could be perceived.

On the bank of this brook I found many pleasant savannas or meadows,
plain, smooth, and covered with grass; and on the rising parts of them,
next to the higher grounds, where the water, as might be supposed, never
overflowed, I found a great deal of tobacco, green, and growing to a
great and very strong stalk. There were divers other plants, which I had
no notion of, or understanding about, and might perhaps have virtues of
their own, which I could not find out.

I searched for the cassava root, which the Indians, in all that climate,
make their bread of, but I could find none. I saw large plants of aloes,
but did not then understand them. I saw several sugar-canes, but wild,
and, for want of cultivation, imperfect. I contented myself with these
discoveries for this time, and came back, musing with myself what course
I might take to know the virtue and goodness of any of the fruits or
plants which I should discover; but could bring it to no conclusion;
for, in short, I had made so little observation while I was in the
Brazils, that I knew little of the plants in the field, at least very
little that might serve me to any purpose now in my distress.

The next day, the 16th, I went up the same way again; and after going
something farther than I had gone the day before, I found the brook and
the savannas began to cease, and the country became more woody than
before. In this part I found different fruits, and particularly I found
melons upon the ground in great abundance, and grapes upon the trees.
The vines had spread indeed over the trees, and the clusters of grapes
were just now in their prime, very ripe and rich. This was a surprising
discovery, and I was exceeding glad of them; but I was warned by my
experience to eat sparingly of them, remembering that when I was ashore
in Barbary eating of grapes killed several of our Englishmen, who were
slaves there, by throwing them into fluxes and fevers. But I found an
excellent use for these grapes; and that was, to cure or dry them in the
sun, and keep them as dried grapes or raisins are kept, which I thought
would be, as indeed they were, as wholesome as agreeable to eat, when no
grapes might be to be had.

I spent all that evening there, and went not back to my habitation;
which, by the way, was the first night, as I might say, I had lain from
home. In the night, I took my first contrivance, and got up into a tree,
where I slept well; and the next morning proceeded upon my discovery,
travelling near four miles, as I might judge by the length of the
valley, keeping still due north, with a ridge of hills on the south and
north side of me.

At the end of this march I came to an opening, where the country seemed
to descend to the west; and a little spring of fresh water, which issued
out of the side of the hill by me, ran the other way, that is, due east;
and the country appeared so fresh, so green, so flourishing, everything
being in a constant verdure or flourish of spring, that it looked like a
planted garden.

I descended a little on the side of that delicious vale, surveying it
with a secret kind of pleasure, though mixed with my other afflicting
thoughts, to think that this was all my own; that I was king and lord of
all this country indefeasibly, and had a right of possession; and, if I
could convey it, I might have it in inheritance as completely as any
lord of a manor in England. I saw here abundance of cocoa trees,
orange, and lemon, and citron trees; but all wild, and very few bearing
any fruit, at least not then. However, the green limes that I gathered
were not only pleasant to eat, but very wholesome; and I mixed their
juice afterwards with water, which made it very wholesome, and very cool
and refreshing.

I found now I had business enough to gather and carry home; and I
resolved to lay up a store, as well of grapes as limes and lemons to
furnish myself for the wet season, which I knew was approaching.

In order to do this, I gathered a great heap of grapes in one place, and
a lesser heap in another place, and a great parcel of limes and lemons
in another place; and taking a few of each with me, I travelled
homeward; and resolved to come again, and bring a bag or sack, or what I
could make, to carry the rest home.

Accordingly, having spent three days in this journey, I came home (so I
must now call my tent and my cave); but before I got thither, the grapes
were spoiled; the richness of the fruits, and the weight of the juice,
having broken them and bruised them, they were good for little or
nothing: as to the limes, they were good, but I could bring but a few.

The next day, being the 19th, I went back, having made me two small bags
to bring home my harvest; but I was surprised, when, coming to my heap
of grapes, which were so rich and fine when I gathered them, I found
them all spread about, trod to pieces, and dragged about, some here,
some there, and abundance eaten and devoured. By this I concluded there
were some wild creatures thereabouts, which had done this; but what they
were, I knew not.

However, as I found that there was no laying them up on heaps, and no
carrying them away in a sack, but that one way they would be destroyed,
and the other way they would be crushed with their own weight, I took
another course; for I gathered a large quantity of the grapes, and hung
them up upon the out-branches of the trees, that they might cure and dry
in the sun; and as for the limes and lemons, I carried as many back as I
could stand under.

When I came home from this journey, I contemplated with great pleasure
the fruitfulness of that valley, and the pleasantness of the situation;
the security from storms on that side the water and the wood; and
concluded that I had pitched upon a place to fix my abode, which was by
far the worst part of the country. Upon the whole, I began to consider
of removing my habitation, and to look out for a place equally safe as
where I now was situate, if possible, in that pleasant fruitful part of
the island.

This thought ran long in my head, and I was exceeding fond of it for
some time, the pleasantness of the place tempting me; but when I came to
a nearer view of it and to consider that I was now by the seaside, where
it was at least possible that something might happen to my advantage,
and, by the same ill fate that brought me hither, might bring some other
unhappy wretches to the same place; and though it was scarce probable
that any such thing should ever happen, yet to enclose myself among the
hills and woods in the centre of the island, was to anticipate my
bondage, and to render such an affair not only improbable, but
impossible; and that therefore I ought not by any means to remove.

However, I was so enamoured of this place, that I spent much of my time
there for the whole remaining part of the month of July; and, though,
upon second thoughts, I resolved, as above, not to remove, yet I built
me a little kind of a bower, and surrounded it at a distance with a
strong fence, being a double hedge as high as I could reach, well
staked, and filled between with brushwood. And here I lay very secure,
sometimes two or three nights together, always going over it with a
ladder, as before; so that I fancied now I had my country house and my
sea-coast house; and this work took me up to the beginning of August.

[Illustration: "Swam across the channel, which lay between the ship and
the sands, and even that with difficulty enough." (See p. 72.)]

I had but newly finished my fence, and began to enjoy my labour, but the
rains came on, and made me stick close to my first habitation; for
though I had made me a tent like the other, with a piece of a sail, and
spread it very well, yet I had not the shelter of a hill to keep me from
storms, nor a cave behind me to retreat into when the rains were
extraordinary.

About the beginning of August, as I said, I had finished my bower, and
began to enjoy myself. The 3rd of August, I found the grapes I had hung
up were perfectly dried, and indeed were excellent good raisins of the
sun; so I began to take them down from the trees. And it was very happy
that I did so, for the rains which followed would have spoiled them, and
I had lost the best part of my winter food; for I had above two hundred
large bunches of them. No sooner had I taken them all down, and carried
most of them home to my cave, but it began to rain; and from hence,
which was the 14th of August, it rained, more or less, every day till
the middle of October, and sometimes so violently, that I could not stir
out of my cave for several days.

In this season, I was much surprised with the increase of my family. I
had been concerned for the loss of one of my cats, who run away from me,
or, as I thought, had been dead, and I heard no more tale or tidings of
her, till, to my astonishment, she came home about the end of August
with three kittens. This was the more strange to me, because, though I
had killed a wild cat, as I called it, with my gun, yet I thought it
was a quite different kind from our European cats; yet the young cats
were the same kind of house-breed like the old one; and both my cats
being females, I thought it very strange. But from these three cats I
afterwards came to be so pestered with cats, that I was forced to kill
them like vermin, or wild beasts, and to drive them from my house as
much as possible.

From the 14th of August to the 26th, incessant rain, so that I could not
stir, and was now very careful not to be much wet. In this confinement,
I began to be straitened for food; but venturing out twice, I one day
killed a goat, and the last day, which was the 26th, found a very large
tortoise, which was a treat to me, and my food was regulated thus: I eat
a bunch of raisins for my breakfast, a piece of the goat's flesh, or of
the turtle, for my dinner, broiled; for, to my great misfortune, I had
no vessel to boil or stew anything; and two or three of the turtle's
eggs for my supper.

During this confinement in my cover by the rain, I worked daily two or
three hours at enlarging my cave, and by degrees worked it on towards
one side, till I came to the outside of the hill, and made a door, or
way out, which came beyond my fence or wall; and so I came in and out
this way. But I was not perfectly easy at lying so open; for as I had
managed myself before, I was in a perfect enclosure; whereas now, I
thought I lay exposed, and open for anything to come in upon me; and yet
I could not perceive that there was any living thing to fear, the
biggest creature that I had yet seen upon the island being a goat.

_Sept. 30._--I was now come to the unhappy anniversary my landing. I
cast up the notches on my post, and found I had been on shore three
hundred and sixty-five days. I kept this day as a solemn fast, setting
it apart to religious exercise, prostrating myself on the ground with
the most serious humiliation, confessing my sins to God, acknowledging
His righteous judgments upon me, and praying to Him to have mercy on me
through Jesus Christ; and having not tasted the least refreshment for
twelve hours, even till the going down of the sun, I then eat a
biscuit-cake and a bunch of grapes, and went to bed, finishing the day
as I began it.

I had all this time observed no Sabbath day, for as at first I had no
sense of religion upon my mind, I had, after some time, omitted to
distinguish the weeks, by making a longer notch than ordinary for the
Sabbath day, and so did not really know what any of the days were. But
now, having cast up the days, as above, I found I had been there a year,
so I divided it into weeks, and set apart every seventh day for a
Sabbath; though I found at the end of my account, I had lost a day or
two in my reckoning.

A little after this my ink began to fail me, and so I contented myself
to use it more sparingly, and to write down only the most remarkable
events of my life, without continuing a daily memorandum of other
things.

The rainy season and the dry season began now to appear regular to me,
and I learned to divide them so as to provide for them accordingly; but
I bought all my experience before I had it, and this I am going to
relate was one of the most discouraging experiments that I made at all.
I have mentioned that I had saved the few ears of barley and rice, which
I had so surprisingly found spring up, as I thought, of themselves, and
believe there were about thirty stalks of rice, and about twenty of
barley; and now I thought it a proper time to sow it after the rains,
the sun being in its southern position, going from me.

Accordingly I dug up a piece of ground as well as I could with my wooden
spade, and dividing it into two parts, I sowed my grain; but as I was
sowing, it casually occurred to my thoughts that I would not sow it all
at first, because I did not know when was the proper time for it, so I
sowed about two-thirds of the seed, leaving about a handful of each.

It was a great comfort to me afterwards that I did so, for not one grain
of that I sowed this time came to anything, for the dry months
following, the earth having had no rain after the seed was sown, it had
no moisture to assist its growth, and never came up at all till the wet
season had come again, and then it grew as if it had been but newly
sown.

Finding my first seed did not grow, which I easily imagined was by the
drought, I sought for a moister piece of ground to make another trial
in, and I dug up a piece of ground near my new bower, and sowed the rest
of my seed in February, a little before the vernal equinox. And this
having the rainy months of March and April to water it, sprung up very
pleasantly, and yielded a very good crop; but having part of the seed
left only, and not daring to sow all that I had, I had but a small
quantity at last, my whole crop not amounting to above half a peck of
each kind. But by this experiment I was made master of my business, and
knew exactly when the proper season was to sow, and that I might expect
two seed-times and two harvests every year.

While this corn was growing, I made a little discovery, which was of use
to me afterwards. As soon as the rains were over, and the weather began
to settle, which was about the month of November, I made a visit up the
country to my bower, where, though I had not been some months, yet I
found all things just as I left them. The circle or double hedge that I
had made was not only firm and entire, but the stakes which I had cut
out of some trees that grew thereabouts were all shot out, and grown
with long branches, as much as a willow-tree usually shoots the first
year after lopping its head. I could not tell what tree to call it that
these stakes were cut from. I was surprised, and yet very well pleased
to see the young trees grow, and I pruned them, and led them up to grow
as much alike as I could. And it is scarce credible how beautiful a
figure they grew into in three years; so that though the hedge made a
circle of about twenty-five yards in diameter, yet the trees, for such I
might now call them, soon covered it, and it was a complete shade,
sufficient to lodge under all the dry season.

This made me resolve to cut some more stakes, and make me a hedge like
this, in a semicircle round my wall (I mean that of my first dwelling),
which I did; and placing the trees or stakes in a double row, at about
eight yards distance from my first fence, they grew presently, and were
at first a fine cover to my habitation, and afterward served for a
defence also, as I shall observe in its order.

I found now that the seasons of the year might generally be divided, not
into summer and winter, as in Europe, but into the rainy seasons and the
dry seasons; which were generally thus:

    Half _February_      } Rainy, the sun being then on, or near the
         _March_         }   equinox
    Half _April_         }

    Half _April_         }
         _May_           } Dry, the sun being then to the north of
         _June_          }   the line.
         _July_          }
    Half _August_        }

    Half _August_        }
         _September_     } Rainy, the sun being then come back.
    Half _October_       }

    Half _October_       }
         _November_      } Dry, the sun being then to the south of
         _December_      }   the line.
         _January_       }
    Half _February_      }

The rainy season sometimes held longer or shorter as the winds happened
to blow, but this was the general observation I made. After I had found
by experience the ill consequence of being abroad in the rain, I took
care to furnish myself with provisions beforehand, that I might not be
obliged to go out; and I sat within doors as much as possible during the
wet months.

In this time I found much employment, and very suitable also to the
time, for I found great occasion of many things which I had no way to
furnish myself with but by hard labour and constant application;
particularly, I tried many ways to make myself a basket; but all the
twigs I could get for the purpose proved so brittle, that they would do
nothing. It proved of excellent advantage to me now, that when I was a
boy I used to take great delight in standing at a basket-maker's in the
town where my father lived, to see them make their wicker-ware; and
being, as boys usually are, very officious to help, and a great observer
of the manner how they worked those things, and sometimes lending a
hand, I had by this means full knowledge of the methods of it, that I
wanted nothing but the materials; when it came into my mind that the
twigs of that tree from whence I cut my stakes that grew might possibly
be as tough as the sallows, and willows, and osiers in England, and I
resolved to try.

Accordingly, the next day, I went to my country house, as I called it;
and cutting some of the smaller twigs, I found them to my purpose as
much as I could desire; whereupon I came the next time prepared with a
hatchet to cut down a quantity, which I soon found, for there was plenty
of them. These I set up to dry within my circle or hedge, and when they
were fit for use, I carried them to my cave; and here during the next
season I employed myself in making, as well as I could, a great many
baskets, both to carry earth, or to lay up anything as I had occasion.
And though I did not finish them very handsomely, yet I made them
sufficiently serviceable for my purpose. And thus, afterwards, I took
care never to be without them; and as my wicker-ware decayed, I made
more, especially I made strong deep baskets to place my corn in, instead
of sacks, when I should come to have any quantity of it.

Having mastered this difficulty, and employed a world of time about it,
I bestirred myself to see, if possible, how to supply two wants. I had
no vessels to hold anything that was liquid, except two runlets, which
were almost full of rum, and some glass bottles, some of the common
size, and others which were case-bottles square, for the holding of
waters, spirits, etc. I had not so much as a pot to boil anything,
except a great kettle, which I saved out of the ship, and which was too
big for such use as I desired it, viz., to make broth, and stew a bit of
meat by itself. The second thing I would fain have had was a
tobacco-pipe: but it was impossible for me to make one. However, I found
a contrivance for that, too, at last.

I employed myself in planting my second rows of stakes or piles and in
this wicker-working all the summer or dry season, when another business
took me up more time than it could be imagined I could spare.

I mentioned before that I had a great mind to see the whole island, and
that I had travelled up the brook, and so on to where I built my bower,
and where I had an opening quite to the sea, on the other side of the
island. I now resolved to travel quite across to the sea-shore on that
side; so taking my gun, a hatchet, and my dog, and a larger quantity of
powder and shot than usual, with two biscuit-cakes and a great bunch of
raisins in my pouch for my store, I began my journey. When I had passed
the vale where my bower stood, as above, I came within view of the sea
to the west; and it being a very clear day, I fairly descried land,
whether an island or a continent I could not tell; but it lay very high,
extending from the west to the W.S.W. at a very great distance; by my
guess, it could not be less than fifteen or twenty leagues off.

I could not tell what part of the world this might be, otherwise than
that I know it must be part of America, and, as I concluded, by all my
observations, must be near the Spanish dominions, and perhaps was all
inhabited by savages, where, if I should have landed, I had been in a
worse condition than I was now; and therefore I acquiesced in the
dispositions of Providence, which I began now to own and to believe
ordered everything for the best. I say, I quieted my mind with this, and
left afflicting myself with fruitless wishes of being there.

Besides, after some pause upon this affair, I considered that if this
land was the Spanish coast, I should certainly, one time or other, see
some vessel pass or repass one way or other; but if not, then it was the
savage coast between the Spanish country and Brazils, which are indeed
the worst of savages; for they are cannibals or men-eaters, and fail not
to murder and devour all the human bodies that fall into their hands.

With these considerations I walked very leisurely forward. I found that
side of the island, where I now was, much pleasanter than mine, the open
or savanna fields sweet, adorned with flowers and full of very fine
woods.

I saw abundance of parrots, and fain I would have caught one, if
possible, to have kept it to be tame, and taught it to speak to me. I
did, after some painstaking, catch a young parrot, for I knocked it down
with a stick, and having recovered it, I brought it home; but it was
some years before I could make him speak. However, at last I taught him
to call me by my name very familiarly. But the accident that followed,
though it be a trifle, will be very diverting in its place.

I was exceedingly diverted with this journey. I found in the low grounds
hares, as I thought them to be, and foxes; but they differed greatly
from all the other kinds I had met with, nor could I satisfy myself to
eat them, though I killed several. But I had no need to be venturous,
for I had no want of food, and of that which was very good too;
especially these three sorts, viz., goats, pigeons, and turtle, or
tortoise; which, added to my grapes, Leadenhall Market could not have
furnished a table better than I, in proportion to the company. And
though my case was deplorable enough, yet I had great cause for
thankfulness, and that I was not driven to any extremities for food, but
rather plenty, even to dainties.

I never travelled in this journey above two miles outright in a day, or
thereabouts; but I took so many turns and returns, to see what
discoveries I could make, that I came weary enough to the place where I
resolved to sit down for all night; and then I either reposed myself in
a tree, or surrounded myself with a row of stakes, set upright in the
ground, either from one tree to another, or so as no wild creature could
come at me without waking me.

As soon as I came to the sea-shore, I was surprised to see that I had
taken up my lot on the worst side of the island, for here indeed the
shore was covered with innumerable turtles; whereas, on the other side,
I had found but three in a year and a half. Here was also an infinite
number of fowls of many kinds, some which I had seen, and some which I
had not seen before, and many of them very good meat, but such as I knew
not the names of except those called penguins.

I could have shot as many as I pleased, but was very sparing of my
powder and shot, and therefore had more mind to kill a she-goat, if I
could, which I could better feed on; and though there were many goats
here, more than on my side the island, yet it was with much more
difficulty that I could come near them, the country being flat and even,
and they saw me much sooner than when I was on the hill.

I confess this side of the country was much pleasanter than mine; but
yet I had not the least inclination to remove, for as I was fixed in my
habitation, it became natural to me, and I seemed all the while I was
here to be as it were upon a journey, and from home. However, I
travelled along the shore of the sea towards the east, I suppose about
twelve miles, and then setting up a great pole upon the shore for a
mark, I concluded I would go home again; and that the next journey I
took should be on the other side of the island, east from my dwelling,
and so round till I came to my post again; of which in its place.

I took another way to come back than that I went, thinking I could
easily keep all the island so much in my view, that I could not miss
finding my first dwelling by viewing the country. But I found myself
mistaken; for being come about two or three miles, I found myself
descended into a very large valley, but so surrounded with hills, and
those hills covered with wood, that I could not see which was my way by
any direction but that of the sun, nor even then, unless I knew very
well the position of the sun at that time of the day.

It happened to my farther misfortune, that the weather proved hazy for
three or four days while I was in this valley; and not being able to see
the sun, I wandered about very uncomfortably, and at last was obliged to
find out the seaside, look for my post, and come back the same way I
went; and then by easy journeys I turned homeward, the weather being
exceeding hot, and my gun, ammunition, hatchet, and other things very
heavy.

In this journey my dog surprised a young kid, and seized upon it, and I
running in to take hold of it, caught it, and saved it alive from the
dog. I had a great mind to bring it home if I could, for I had often
been musing whether it might not be possible to get a kid or two, and so
raise a breed of tame goats, which might supply me when my powder and
shot should be all spent.

I made a collar to this little creature, and with a string, which I made
of some rope-yarn, which I always carried about me, I led him along,
though with some difficulty, till I came to my bower, and there I
enclosed him and left him, for I was very impatient to be at home, from
whence I had been absent above a month.

I cannot express what a satisfaction it was to me to come into my old
hutch, and lie down in my hammock-bed. This little wandering journey,
without settled place of abode, had been so unpleasant to me, that my
own house, as I called it to myself, was a perfect settlement to be
compared to that; and it rendered everything about me so comfortable,
that I resolved I would never go a great way from it again, while it
should be my lot to stay on the island.

I reposed myself here a week, to rest and regale myself after my long
journey; during which most of the time was taken up in the weighty
affair of making a cage for my Poll, who began now to be a mere
domestic, and to be mighty well acquainted with me. Then I began to
think of the poor kid which I had penned in within my little circle, and
resolved to go and fetch it home, or give it some food. Accordingly I
went, and found it where I left it, for indeed it could not get out, but
almost starved for want of food. I went and cut boughs of trees, and
branches of such shrubs as I could find, and threw it over, and having
fed it, I tied it as I did before, to lead it away; but it was so tame
with being hungry, that I had no need to have tied it, for it followed
me like a dog. And as I continually fed it, the creature became so
loving, so gentle, and so fond, that it became from that time one of my
domestics also, and would never leave me afterwards.

The rainy season of the autumnal equinox was now come, and I kept the
30th of September in the same solemn manner as before, being the
anniversary of my landing on the island, having now been there two
years, and no more prospect of being delivered than the first day I came
there. I spent the whole day in humble and thankful acknowledgments of
the many wonderful mercies which my solitary condition was attended
with, and without which it might have been infinitely more miserable. I
gave humble and hearty thanks that God had been pleased to discover to
me even that it was possible I might be more happy in this solitary
condition, than I should have been in a liberty of society, and in all
the pleasures of the world; that He could fully make up to me the
deficiencies of my solitary state, and the want of human society, by His
presence, and the communications of His grace to my soul, supporting,
comforting, and encouraging me to depend upon His providence here, and
hope for His eternal presence hereafter.

It was now that I began sensibly to feel how much more happy this life I
now led was, with all its miserable circumstances, than the wicked,
cursed, abominable life I led all the past part of my days. And now I
changed both my sorrows and my joys; my very desires altered, my
affections changed their gusts, and my delights were perfectly new from
what they were at my first coming, or indeed for the two years past.

Before, as I walked about, either on my hunting, or for viewing the
country, the anguish of my soul at my condition would break out upon me
on a sudden, and my very heart would die within me, to think of the
woods, the mountains, the deserts I was in, and how I was a prisoner,
locked up with the eternal bars and bolts of the ocean, in an
uninhabited wilderness, without redemption. In the midst of the greatest
composures of my mind, this would break out upon me like a storm, and
make me wring my hands, and weep like a child. Sometimes it would take
me in the middle of my work, and I would immediately sit down and sigh,
and look upon the ground for an hour or two together; and this was still
worse to me, for if I could burst out into tears, or vent myself by
words, it would go off, and the grief, having exhausted itself, would
abate.

But now I began to exercise myself with new thoughts. I daily read the
Word of God, and applied all the comforts of it to my present state. One
morning, being very sad, I opened the Bible upon these words, "I will
never, never leave thee, nor forsake thee." Immediately it occurred that
these words were to me; why else should they be directed in such a
manner, just at the moment when I was mourning over my condition, as one
forsaken of God and man? "Well, then," said I, "if God does not forsake
me, of what ill consequence can it be, or what matters it, though the
world should all forsake me, seeing on the other hand if I had all the
world, and should lose the favour and blessing of God, there would be no
comparison in the loss?"

From this moment I began to conclude in my mind that it was possible for
me to be more happy in this forsaken solitary condition, than it was
probable I should ever have been in any other particular state in the
world, and with this thought I was going to give thanks to God for
bringing me to this place.

I know not what it was, but something shocked my mind at that thought,
and I durst not speak the words. "How canst thou be such a hypocrite,"
said I, even audibly, "to pretend to be thankful for a condition which,
however thou mayest endeavour to be contented with, thou wouldest rather
pray heartily to be delivered from?" So I stopped there; but though I
could not say I thanked God for being there, yet I sincerely gave thanks
to God for opening my eyes, by whatever afflicting providences, to see
the former condition of my life, and to mourn for my wickedness, and
repent. I never opened the Bible, or shut it, but my very soul within me
blessed God for directing my friend in England, without any order of
mine, to pack it up among my goods, and for assisting me afterwards to
save it out of the wreck of the ship.

[Illustration: "I turned homeward, the weather being exceeding hot."
(See p. 133.)]

Thus, and in this disposition of mind, I began my third year; and though
I have not given the reader the trouble of so particular account of my
works this year as the first, yet in general it may be observed, that I
was very seldom idle, but having regularly divided my time, according to
the several daily employments that were before me, such as, first, my
duty to God, and the reading the Scriptures, which I constantly set
apart some time for, thrice every day; secondly, the going abroad with
my gun for food, which generally took me up three hours in every
morning, when it did not rain; thirdly, the ordering, curing,
preserving, and cooking what I had killed or catched for my supply;
these took up great part of the day; also, it is to be considered that
the middle of the day, when the sun was in the zenith, the violence of
the heat was too great to stir out; so that about four hours in the
evening was all the time I could be supposed to work in, with this
exception, that sometimes I changed my hours of hunting and working, and
went to work in the morning, and abroad with my gun in the afternoon.

To this short time allowed for labour, I desire may be added the
exceeding laboriousness of my work; the many hours which, for want of
tools, want of help, and want of skill, everything I did took up out of
my time. For example, I was full two and forty days making me a board
for a long shelf, which I wanted in my cave; whereas two sawyers, with
their tools and a saw-pit, would have cut six of them out of the same
tree in half a day.

My case was this: it was to be a large tree which was to be cut down,
because my board was to be a broad one. This tree I was three days
a-cutting down, and two more cutting off the boughs, and reducing it to
a log, or piece of timber. With inexpressible hacking and hewing, I
reduced both the sides of it into chips till it begun to be light enough
to move; then I turned it, and made one side of it smooth and flat as a
board from end to end; then turning that side downward, cut the other
side, till I brought the plank to be about three inches thick, and
smooth on both sides. Any one may judge the labour of my hands in such a
piece of work; but labour and patience carried me through that, and many
other things. I only observe this in particular, to show the reason why
so much of my time went away with so little work, viz., that what might
be a little to be done with help and tools was a vast labour and
required a prodigious time to do alone, and by hand. But notwithstanding
this, with patience and labour, I went through many things, and, indeed,
everything that my circumstances made necessary to me to do, as will
appear by what follows.

I was now, in the months of November and December, expecting my crop of
barley and rice. The ground I had manured or dug up for them was not
great; for as I observed, my seed of each was not above the quantity of
half a peck; for I had lost one whole crop by sowing in the dry season.
But now my crop promised very well, when on a sudden I found I was in
danger of losing it all again by enemies of several sorts, which it was
scarce possible to keep from it; as, first the goats and wild creatures
which I called hares, who, tasting the sweetness of the blade, lay in it
night and day, as soon as it came up, and eat it so close, that it could
get no time to shoot up into stalk.

This I saw no remedy for but by making an enclosure about it with a
hedge, which I did with a great deal of toil, and the more, because it
required speed. However, as my arable land was but small, suited to my
crop, I got it totally well fenced in about three weeks' time, and
shooting some of the creatures in the daytime, I set my dog to guard it
in the night, tying him up to a stake at the gate, where he would stand
and bark all night long; so in a little time the enemies forsook the
place, and the corn grew very strong and well, and began to ripen apace.

But as the beasts ruined me before while my corn was in the blade, so
the birds were as likely to ruin me now when it was in the ear; for
going along by the place to see how it throve, I saw my little crop
surrounded with fowls, of I know not how many sorts, who stood, as it
were, watching till I should be gone. I immediately let fly among them,
for I always had my gun with me. I had no sooner shot, but there rose up
a little cloud of fowls, which I had not seen at all, from among the
corn itself.

This touched me sensibly, for I foresaw that in a few days they would
devour all my hopes, that I should be starved, and never be able to
raise a crop at all, and what to do I could not tell. However, I
resolved not to lose my corn, if possible, though I should watch it
night and day. In the first place, I went among it to see what damage
was already done, and found they had spoiled a good deal of it; but that
as it was yet too green for them, the loss was not so great but that the
remainder was like to be a good crop if it could be saved.

I stayed by it to load my gun, and then coming away, I could easily see
the thieves sitting upon all the trees about me, as if they only waited
till I was gone away. And the event proved it to be so; for as I walked
off, as if I was gone, I was no sooner out of their sight but they
dropped down, one by one, into the corn again. I was so provoked, that I
could not have patience to stay till more came on, knowing that every
grain that they eat now was, as it might be said, a peck-loaf to me in
the consequence; but coming up to the hedge, I fired again, and killed
three of them. This was what I wished for; so I took them up, and served
them as we serve notorious thieves in England, viz., hanged them in
chains, for a terror to others. It is impossible to imagine almost that
this should have such an effect as it had, for the fowls would not only
not come at the corn, but, in short, they forsook all that part of the
island, and I could never see a bird near the place as long as my
scare-crows hung there.

This I was very glad of, you may be sure; and about the latter end of
December, which was our second harvest of the year, I reaped my crop.

I was sadly put to it for a scythe or a sickle to cut it down, and all I
could do was to make one as well as I could out of one of the
broadswords, or cutlasses, which I saved among the arms out of the ship.
However, as my first crop was but small, I had no great difficulty to
cut it down; in short, I reaped it my way, for I cut nothing off but the
ears, and carried it away in a great basket which I had made, and so
rubbed it out with my hands; and at the end of all my harvesting, I
found that out of my half peck of seed I had near two bushels of rice,
and above two bushels and a half of barley, that is to say, by my guess,
for I had no measure at that time.

However, this was a great encouragement to me, and I foresaw that, in
time, it would please God to supply me with bread. And yet here I was
perplexed again, for I neither knew how to grind or make meal of my
corn, or indeed how to clean it and part it; nor, if made into meal, how
to make bread of it, and if how to make it, yet I knew not how to bake
it. These things being added to my desire of having a good quantity for
store, and to secure a constant supply, I resolved not to taste any of
this crop, but to preserve it all for seed against the next season, and,
in the meantime, to employ all my study and hours of working to
accomplish this great work of providing myself with corn and bread.

It might be truly said, that now I worked for my bread. 'Tis a little
wonderful, and what I believe few people have thought much upon, viz.,
the strange multitude of little things necessary in the providing,
producing, curing, dressing, making, and finishing this one article of
bread.

I, that was reduced to a mere state of nature, found this to my daily
discouragement, and was made more and more sensible of it every hour,
even after I had got the first handful of seed-corn, which, as I have
said, came up unexpectedly, and indeed to a surprise.

First, I had no plough to turn up the earth, no spade or shovel to dig
it. Well, this I conquered by making a wooden spade, as I observed
before, but this did my work in but a wooden manner; and though it cost
me a great many days to make it, yet, for want of iron, it not only wore
out the sooner, but made my work the harder, and made it be performed
much worse.

However, this I bore with, and was content to work it out with patience,
and bear with the badness of the performance. When the corn was sowed, I
had no harrow, but was forced to go over it myself, and drag a great
heavy bough of a tree over it, to scratch it, as it may be called,
rather than rake or harrow it.

When it was growing and grown, I have observed already how many things I
wanted to fence it, secure it, mow or reap it, cure and carry it home,
thrash, part it from the chaff, and save it. Then I wanted a mill to
grind it, sieves to dress it, yeast and salt to make it into bread, and
an oven to bake it, and yet all these things I did without, as shall be
observed; and yet the corn was an inestimable comfort and advantage to
me too. All this, as I said, made everything laborious and tedious to
me, but that there was no help for; neither was my time so much loss to
me, because, as I had divided it, a certain part of it was every day
appointed to these works, and as I resolved to use none of the corn for
bread till I had a greater quantity by me, I had the next six months to
apply myself wholly, by labour and invention, to furnish myself with
utensils proper for the performing all the operations necessary for the
making the corn, when I had it, fit for my use.

But first I was to prepare more land, for I had now seed enough to sow
above an acre of ground. Before I did this, I had a week's work at least
to make me a spade, which, when it was done, was but a sorry one indeed,
and very heavy, and required double labour to work with it. However, I
went through that, and sowed my seed in two large flat pieces of ground,
as near my house as I could find them to my mind, and fenced them in
with a good hedge, the stakes of which were all cut of that wood which I
had set before, and knew it would grow; so that in one year's time I
knew I should have a quick or living hedge, that would want but little
repair. This work was not so little as to take me up less than three
months, because great part of that time was of the wet season, when I
could not go abroad.

Within doors, that is, when it rained, and I could not go out, I found
employment on the following occasions; always observing, that all the
while I was at work, I diverted myself with talking to my parrot, and
teaching him to speak, and I quickly learned him to know his own name,
and at last to speak it out pretty loud, 'Poll,' which was the first
word I ever heard spoken in the island by any mouth but my own. This,
therefore, was not my work, but an assistant to my work; for now, as I
said, I had a great employment upon my hands, as follows, viz., I had
long studied, by some means or other, to make myself some earthen
vessels, which indeed I wanted sorely, but knew not where to come at
them. However, considering the heat of the climate, I did not doubt but
if I could find out any such clay, I might botch up some such pot as
might, being dried in the sun, be hard enough and strong enough to bear
handling, and to hold anything that was dry, and required to be kept so;
and as this was necessary in the preparing corn, meal, etc., which was
the thing I was upon, I resolved to make some as large as I could, and
fit only to stand like jars, to hold what should be put into them.

It would make the reader pity me, or rather laugh at me, to tell how
many awkward ways I took to raise this paste; what odd, misshapen, ugly
things I made; how many of them fell in, and how many fell out, the clay
not being stiff enough to bear its own weight; how many cracked by the
over-violent heat of the sun, being set out too hastily; and how many
fell in pieces with only removing, as well before as after they were
dried; and, in a word, how, after having laboured hard to find the clay,
to dig it, to temper it, to bring it home, and work it, I could not make
above two large earthen ugly things (I cannot call them jars) in about
two months' labour.

However, as the sun baked these two very dry and hard, I lifted them
very gently up, and set them down again in two great wicker baskets,
which I had made on purpose for them, that they might not break; and as
between the pot and the basket there was a little room to spare, I
stuffed it full of the rice and barley straw, and these two pots being
to stand always dry, I thought would hold my dry corn, and perhaps the
meal, when the corn was bruised.

Though I miscarried so much in my design for large pots, yet I made
several smaller things with better success; such as little round pots,
flat dishes, pitchers, and pipkins, and any things my hand turned to;
and the heat of the sun baked them strangely hard. But all this would
not answer my end, which was to get an earthen pot to hold what was
liquid, and bear the fire, which none of these could do. It happened
after some time, making a pretty large fire for cooking my meat, when I
went to put it out after I had done with it, I found a broken piece of
one of my earthenware vessels in the fire, burnt as hard as a stone,
and red as a tile. I was agreeably surprised to see it, and said to
myself, that certainly they might be made to burn whole, if they would
burn broken.

This set me to studying how to order my fire, so as to make it burn me
some pots. I had no notion of a kiln, such as the potters burn in, or of
glazing them with lead, though I had some lead to do it with; but I
placed three large pipkins, and two or three pots in a pile, one upon
another, and placed my firewood all around it, with a great heap of
embers under them. I plied the fire with fresh fuel round the outside,
and upon the top, till I saw the pots in the inside red-hot quite
through, and observed that they did not crack at all. When I saw them
clear red, I let them stand in that heat about five or six hours, till I
found one of them, though it did not crack, did melt or run, for the
sand which was mixed with the clay melted by the violence of the heat,
and would have run into glass, if I had gone on; so I slacked my fire
gradually till the pots began to abate of the red colour; and watching
them all night, that I might not let the fire abate too fast, in the
morning I had three very good, I will not say handsome, pipkins, and two
other earthen pots, as hard burnt as could be desired, and one of them
perfectly glazed with the running of the sand.

After this experiment, I need not say that I wanted no sort of
earthenware for my use; but I must needs say, as to the shapes of them,
they were very indifferent, as any one may suppose, when I had no way of
making them but as the children make dirt pies, or as a woman would make
pies that never learned to raise paste.

No joy at a thing of so mean a nature was ever equal to mine, when I
found I had made an earthen pot that would bear the fire; and I had
hardly patience to stay till they were cold, before I set one upon the
fire again, with some water in it, to boil me some meat, which it did
admirably well; and with a piece of a kid I made some very good broth,
though I wanted oatmeal and several other ingredients requisite to make
it so good as I would have had it been.

My next concern was to get me a stone mortar to stamp or beat some corn
in; for as to the mill, there was no thought at arriving to that
perfection of art with one pair of hands. To supply this want I was at a
great loss; for, of all trades in the world, I was as perfectly
unqualified for a stone-cutter as for any whatever; neither had I any
tools to go about it with. I spent many a day to find out a great stone
big enough to cut hollow, and make fit for a mortar, and could find none
at all, except what was in the solid rock, and which I had no way to dig
or cut out; nor indeed were the rocks in the island of hardness
sufficient, but were all of a sandy crumbling stone, which neither would
bear the weight of a heavy pestle, or would break the corn without
filling it with sand. So, after a great deal of time lost in searching
for a stone, I gave it over, and resolved to look out for a great block
of hard wood, which I found indeed much easier; and getting one as big
as I had strength to stir, I rounded it, and formed it in the outside
with my axe and hatchet, and then, with the help of fire, and infinite
labour, made a hollow place in it, as the Indians in Brazil make their
canoes. After this, I made a great heavy pestle, or beater, of the wood
called the iron-wood; and this I prepared and laid by against I had my
next crop of corn, when I proposed to myself to grind, or rather pound,
my corn into meal, to make my bread.

My next difficulty was to make a sieve, or search, to dress my meal, and
to part it from the bran and the husk, without which I did not see it
possible I could have any bread. This was a most difficult thing, so
much as but to think on, for to be sure I had nothing like the necessary
thing to make it; I mean fine thin canvas or stuff, to search the meal
through. And here I was at a full stop for many months, nor did I really
know what to do; linen I had none left, but what was mere rags; I had
goats' hair, but neither knew I how to weave it or spin it; and had I
known how, here were no tools to work it with. All the remedy that I
found for this was, that at last I did remember I had, among the
seamen's clothes which were saved out of the ship, some neckcloths of
calico or muslin; and with some pieces of these I made three small
sieves, but proper enough for the work; and thus I made shift for some
years. How I did afterwards, I shall show in its place.

The baking part was the next thing to be considered, and how I should
make bread when I came to have corn; for, first, I had no yeast. As to
that part, as there was no supplying the want, so I did not concern
myself much about it; but for an oven I was indeed in great pain. At
length I found out an experiment for that also, which was this: I made
some earthen vessels very broad, but not deep, that is to say, about two
feet diameter, and not above nine inches deep; these I burned in the
fire, as I had done the other, and laid them by; and when I wanted to
bake, I made a great fire upon my hearth, which I had paved with some
square tiles, of my own making and burning also; but I should not call
them square.

When the firewood was burned pretty much into embers, or live coals, I
drew them forward upon this hearth, so as to cover it all over, and
there I let them lie till the hearth was very hot; then sweeping away
all the embers, I set down my loaf, or loaves, and whelming down the
earthen pot upon them, drew the embers all round the outside of the pot,
to keep in and add to the heat. And thus, as well as in the best oven in
the world, I baked my barley-loaves, and became, in little time, a mere
pastry-cook into the bargain; for I made myself several cakes of the
rice, and puddings; indeed I made no pies, neither had I anything to put
into them, supposing I had, except the flesh either of fowls or goats.

It need not be wondered at, if all these things took me up most part of
the third year of my abode here; for it is to be observed, that in the
intervals of these things I had my new harvest and husbandry to manage;
for I reaped my corn in its season, and carried it home as well as I
could, and laid it up in the ear, in my large baskets, till I had time
to rub it out, for I had no floor to thrash it on, or instrument to
thrash it with.

And now, indeed, my stock of corn increasing, I really wanted to build
my barns bigger. I wanted a place to lay it up in, for the increase of
the corn now yielded me so much, that I had of the barley about twenty
bushels, and of the rice as much, or more, insomuch that now I resolved
to begin to use it freely; for my bread had been quite gone a great
while; also, I resolved to see what quantity would be sufficient for me
a whole year, and to sow but once a year.

Upon the whole, I found that the forty bushels of barley and rice was
much more than I could consume in a year; so I resolved to sow just the
same quantity every year that I sowed the last, in hopes that such a
quantity would fully provide me with bread, etc.

All the while these things were doing, you may be sure my thoughts run
many times upon the prospect of land which I had seen from the other
side of the island, and I was not without secret wishes that I were on
shore there, fancying the seeing the mainland, and in an inhabited
country, I might find some way or other to convey myself farther, and
perhaps at last find some means of escape.

But all this while I made no allowance for the dangers of such a
condition, and how I might fall into the hands of savages, and perhaps
such as I might have reason to think far worse than the lions and tigers
of Africa; that if I once came into their power, I should run a hazard
more than a thousand to one of being killed, and perhaps of being eaten;
for I had heard that the people of the Caribbean coasts were cannibals,
or man-eaters, and I knew by the latitude that I could not be far off
from that shore. That suppose they were not cannibals, yet that they
might kill me, as many Europeans who had fallen into their hands had
been served, even when they had been ten or twenty together, much more
I, that was but one, and could make little or no defence; all these
things, I say, which I ought to have considered well of, and did cast up
in my thoughts afterwards, yet took up none of my apprehensions at
first, but my head ran mightily upon the thought of getting over to the
shore.

Now I wished for my boy Xury, and the long-boat with the
shoulder-of-mutton sail, with which I sailed above a thousand miles on
the coast of Africa; but this was in vain. Then I thought I would go and
look at our ship's boat, which, as I have said, was blown up upon the
shore a great way, in the storm, when we were first cast away. She lay
almost where she did at first, but not quite; and was turned, by the
force of the waves and the winds, almost bottom upward, against a high
ridge of beachy rough sand, but no water about her, as before.

If I had had hands to have refitted her, and to have launched her into
the water, the boat would have done well enough, and I might have gone
back into the Brazils with her easily enough; but I might have foreseen
that I could no more turn her and set her upright upon her bottom, than
I could remove the island. However, I went to the woods, and cut levers
and rollers, and brought them to the boat, resolved to try what I could
do; suggesting to myself that if I could but turn her down, I might
easily repair the damage she had received, and she would be a very good
boat, and I might go to sea in her very easily.

I spared no pains, indeed, in this piece of fruitless toil, and spent, I
think, three or four weeks about it. At last finding it impossible to
heave it up with my little strength, I fell to digging away the sand, to
undermine it, and so to make it fall down, setting pieces of wood to
thrust and guide it right in the fall. But when I had done this, I was
unable to stir it up again, or to get under it, much less to move it
forward towards the water; so I was forced to give it over. And yet,
though I gave over the hopes of the boat, my desire to venture over for
the main increased, rather than decreased, as the means for it seemed
impossible.

This at length put me upon thinking whether it was not possible to make
myself a canoe, or _periagua_, such as the natives of those climates
make, even without tools, or, as I might say, without hands, viz., of
the trunk of a great tree. This I not only thought possible, but easy,
and pleased myself extremely with the thoughts of making it, and with my
having much more convenience for it than any of the negroes or Indians;
but not at all considering the particular inconveniences which I lay
under more than the Indians did, viz., want of hands to move it, when it
was made, into the water, a difficulty much harder for me to surmount
than all the consequences of want of tools could be to them. For what
was it to me, that when I had chosen a vast tree in the woods, I might
with much trouble cut it down, if, after I might be able with my tools
to hew and dub the outside into the proper shape of a boat, and burn or
cut out the inside to make it hollow, so to make a boat of it; if, after
all this, I must leave it just there where I found it, and was not able
to launch it into the water?

One would have thought I could not have had the least reflection upon my
mind of my circumstance while I was making this boat, but I should have
immediately thought how I should get it into the sea; but my thoughts
were so intent upon my voyage over the sea in it, that I never once
considered how I should get it off of the land; and it was really, in
its own nature, more easy for me to guide it over forty-five miles of
sea, than about forty-five fathoms of land, where it lay, to set it
afloat in the water.

I went to work upon this boat the most like a fool that ever man did who
had any of his senses awake. I pleased myself with the design, without
determining whether I was ever able to undertake it. Not but that the
difficulty of launching my boat came often into my head; but I put a
stop to my own inquiries into it, by this foolish answer which I gave
myself, "Let's first make it; I'll warrant I'll find some way or other
to get it along when 'tis done."

This was a most preposterous method; but the eagerness of my fancy
prevailed, and to work I went. I felled a cedar tree: I question much
whether Solomon ever had such a one for the building of the Temple at
Jerusalem. It was five feet ten inches diameter at the lower part next
the stump, and four feet eleven inches diameter at the end of twenty-two
feet, after which it lessened for awhile, and then parted into branches.
It was not without infinite labour that I felled this tree. I was twenty
days hacking and hewing at it at the bottom; I was fourteen more getting
the branches and limbs, and the vast spreading head of it cut off, which
I hacked and hewed through with axe and hatchet, and inexpressible
labour. After this, it cost me a month to shape it and dub it to a
proportion, and to something like the bottom of a boat, that it might
swim upright as it ought to do. It cost me near three months more to
clear the inside, and work it so as to make an exact boat of it. This I
did, indeed, without fire, by mere mallet and chisel, and by the dint of
hard labour, till I had brought it to be a very handsome _periagua_ and
big enough to have carried six and twenty men, and consequently big
enough to have carried me and all my cargo.

When I had gone through this work, I was extremely delighted with it.
The boat was really much bigger than I ever saw a canoe or _periagua_,
that was made of one tree, in my life. Many a weary stroke it had cost,
you may be sure; and there remained nothing but to get it into the
water; and had I gotten it into the water, I make no question but I
should have begun the maddest voyage, and the most unlikely to be
performed, that ever was undertaken.

But all my devices to get it into the water failed me, though they cost
me infinite labour too. It lay about one hundred yards from the water,
and not more; but the first inconvenience was, it was uphill towards the
creek. Well, to take away this discouragement, I resolved to dig into
the surface of the earth, and so make a declivity. This I began, and it
cost me a prodigious deal of pains; but who grudges pains, that have
their deliverance in view? But when this was worked through, and this
difficulty managed, it was still much at one, for I could no more stir
the canoe than I could the other boat.

Then I measured the distance of ground, and resolved to cut a dock or
canal, to bring the water up to the canoe, seeing I could not bring the
canoe down to the water. Well, I began this work; and when I began to
enter into it, and calculate how deep it was to be dug, how broad, how
the stuff to be thrown out, I found that by the number of hands I had,
being none but my own, it must have been ten or twelve years before I
should have gone through with it; for the shore lay high, so that at the
upper end it must have been at least twenty feet deep; so at length,
though with great reluctancy, I gave this attempt over also.

This grieved me heartily; and now I saw, though too late, the folly of
beginning a work before we count the cost, and before we judge rightly
of our own strength to go through with it.

In the middle of this work I finished my fourth year in this place, and
kept my anniversary with the same devotion, and with as much comfort as
ever before; for, by a constant study and serious application of the
Word of God, and by the assistance of His grace, I gained a different
knowledge from what I had before. I entertained different notions of
things. I looked now upon the world as a thing remote, which I had
nothing to do with, no expectation from, and, indeed, no desires about.
In a word, I had nothing indeed to do with it, nor was ever like to
have; so I thought it looked, as we may perhaps look upon it hereafter,
viz., as a place I had lived in, but was come out of it; and well might
I say, as father Abraham to Dives, "Between me and thee is a great gulf
fixed."

In the first place, I was removed from all the wickedness of the world
here. I had neither the lust of the flesh, the lust of the eye, or the
pride of life. I had nothing to covet, for I had all that I was now
capable of enjoying. I was lord of the whole manor; or, if I pleased, I
might call myself king or emperor over the whole country which I had
possession of. There were no rivals: I had no competitor, none to
dispute sovereignty or command with me. I might have raised
ship-loadings of corn, but I had no use for it; so I let as little
grow as I thought enough for my occasion. I had tortoise or turtles
enough, but now and then one was as much as I could put to any use. I
had timber enough to have built a fleet of ships. I had grapes enough to
have made wine, or to have cured into raisins, to have loaded that fleet
when they had been built.

[Illustration: "Most of the time was taken up in the weighty affair of
making a cage for my Poll." (See p. 134.)]

But all I could make use of was all that was valuable. I had enough to
eat and to supply my wants, and what was all the rest to me? If I killed
more flesh than I could eat, the dog must eat it, or the vermin. If I
sowed more corn than I could eat, it must be spoiled. The trees that I
cut down were lying to rot on the ground; I could make no more use of
them than for fuel, and that I had no occasion for but to dress my food.

In a word, the nature and experience of things dictated to me, upon just
reflection, that all the good things of this world are no farther good
to us than they are for our use; and that whatever we may heap up indeed
to give others, we enjoy just as much as we can use, and no more. The
most covetous, griping miser in the world would have been cured of the
vice of covetousness, if he had been in my case; for I possessed
infinitely more than I knew what to do with. I had no room for desire,
except it was of things which I had not, and they were but trifles,
though indeed of great use to me. I had, as I hinted before, a parcel of
money, as well gold as silver, about thirty-six pounds sterling. Alas!
there the nasty, sorry, useless stuff lay; I had no manner of business
for it; and I often thought with myself, that I would have given a
handful of it for a gross of tobacco-pipes, or for a hand-mill to grind
my corn; nay, I would have given it all for six-pennyworth of turnip and
carrot seed out of England, or for a handful of peas and beans, and a
bottle of ink. As it was, I had not the least advantage by it, or
benefit from it; but there it lay in a drawer, and grew mouldy with the
damp of the cave in the wet season; and if I had had the drawer full of
diamonds, it had been the same case, and they had been of no manner of
value to me because of no use.

I had now brought my state of life to be much easier in itself than it
was at first, and much easier to my mind, as well as to my body. I
frequently sat down to my meat with thankfulness, and admired the hand
of God's providence, which had thus spread my table in the wilderness. I
learned to look more upon the bright side of my condition, and less upon
the dark side, and to consider what I enjoyed, rather than what I
wanted; and this gave me sometimes such secret comforts, that I cannot
express them; and which I take notice of here, to put those discontented
people in mind of it, who cannot enjoy comfortably what God has given
them, because they see and covet something that He has not given them.
All our discontents about what we want, appeared to me to spring from
the want of thankfulness for what we have.

Another reflection was of great use to me, and doubtless would be so to
any one that should fall into such distress as mine was; and this was,
to compare my present condition with what I at first expected it should
be; nay, with what it would certainly have been, if the good providence
of God had not wonderfully ordered the ship to be cast up nearer to the
shore, where I not only could come at her, but could bring what I got
out of her to the shore, for my relief and comfort; without which I had
wanted for tools to work, weapons for defence, or gunpowder and shot for
getting my food.

I spent whole hours, I may say whole days, in representing to myself, in
the most lively colours, how I must have acted if I had got nothing out
of the ship. How I could not have so much as got any food, except fish
and turtles; and that as it was long before I found any of them, I must
have perished first; that I should have lived, if I had not perished,
like a mere savage; that if I had killed a goat or a fowl, by any
contrivance, I had no way to flay or open them, or part the flesh from
the skin and the bowels, or to cut it up; but must gnaw it with my
teeth, and pull it with my claws, like a beast.

These reflections made me very sensible of the goodness of Providence to
me, and very thankful for my present condition, with all its hardships
and misfortunes; and this part also I cannot but recommend to the
reflection of those who are apt, in their misery, to say, Is any
affliction like mine? Let them consider how much worse the cases of some
people are, and their case might have been, if Providence had thought
fit.

I had another reflection, which assisted me also to comfort my mind with
hopes; and this was, comparing my present condition with what I had
deserved, and had therefore reason to expect from the hand of
Providence. I had lived a dreadful life, perfectly destitute of the
knowledge and fear of God. I had been well instructed by father and
mother; neither had they been wanting to me in their early endeavours to
infuse a religious awe of God into my mind, a sense of my duty, and of
what the nature and end of my being required of me. But alas! falling
early into the seafaring life, which, of all the lives, is the most
destitute of the fear of God, though His terrors are always before them;
I say, falling early into the seafaring life, and into seafaring
company, all that little sense of religion which I had entertained was
laughed out of me by my messmates; by a hardened despising of dangers,
and the views of death, which grew habitual to me; by my long absence
from all manner of opportunities to converse with anything but what was
like myself, or to hear anything that was good, or tended towards it.

So void was I of everything that was good, or of the least sense of what
I was, or was to be, that in the greatest deliverances I enjoyed, such
as my escape from Sallee; my being taken up by the Portuguese master of
the ship; my being planted so well in the Brazils; my receiving the
cargo from England, and the like; I never had once the words, "Thank
God," as much as on my mind, or in my mouth; nor in the greatest
distress had I so much as a thought to pray to Him, or so much as to
say, "Lord, have mercy upon me!" no, nor to mention the name of God,
unless it was to swear by and blaspheme it.

I had terrible reflections upon my mind for many months, as I have
already observed, on the account of my wicked and hardened life past;
and when I looked about me, and considered what particular providences
had attended me since my coming into this place, and how God had dealt
bountifully with me, had not only punished me less than my iniquity had
deserved, but had so plentifully provided for me; this gave me great
hopes that my repentance was accepted, and that God had yet mercy in
store for me.

With these reflections, I worked my mind up, not only to resignation to
the will of God in the present disposition of my circumstances, but even
to a sincere thankfulness for my condition; and that I, who was yet a
living man, ought not to complain, seeing I had not the due punishment
of my sins; that I enjoyed so many mercies, which I had no reason to
have expected in that place; that I ought never more to repine at my
condition, but to rejoice, and to give daily thanks for that daily
bread, which nothing but a crowd of wonders could have brought; that I
ought to consider I had been fed even by miracle, even as great as that
of feeding Elijah by ravens; nay, by a long series of miracles; and
that I could hardly have named a place in the unhabitable part of the
world where I could have been cast more to my advantage; a place where,
as I had no society, which was my affliction on one hand, so I found no
ravenous beasts, no furious wolves or tigers, to threaten my life; no
venomous creatures or poisonous, which I might feed on to my hurt; no
savages to murder and devour me.

In a word, as my life was a life of sorrow one way, so it was a life of
mercy another; and I wanted nothing to make it a life of comfort, but to
be able to make my sense of God's goodness to me, and care over me in
this condition, be my daily consolation; and after I did make a just
improvement of these things, I went away, and was no more sad.

I had now been here so long, that many things which I brought on shore
for my help were either quite gone, or very much wasted, and near spent.
My ink, as I observed, had been gone for some time, all but a very
little, which I eked out with water, a little and a little, till it was
so pale it scarce left any appearance of black upon the paper. As long
as it lasted, I made use of it to minute down the days of the month on
which any remarkable thing happened to me. And, first, by casting up
times past, I remember that there was a strange concurrence of days in
the various providences which befell me, and which, if I had been
superstitiously inclined to observe days as fatal or fortunate, I might
have had reason to have looked upon with a great deal of curiosity.

First, I had observed that the same day that I broke away from my father
and my friends, and run away to Hull, in order to go to sea, the same
day afterwards I was taken by the Sallee man-of-war, and made a slave.

The same day of the year that I escaped out of the wreck of that ship
in Yarmouth Roads, that same day-year afterwards I made my escape from
Sallee in the boat.

The same day of the year I was born on, viz., the 30th of September,
that same day I had my life so miraculously saved twenty-six years
after, when I was cast on shore in this island; so that my wicked life
and my solitary life began both on a day.

The next thing to my ink's being wasted, was that of my bread; I mean
the biscuit, which I brought out of the ship. This I had husbanded to
the last degree, allowing myself but one cake of bread a day for above a
year; and yet I was quite without bread for near a year before I got any
corn of my own; and great reason I had to be thankful that I had any at
all, the getting it being, as has been already observed, next to
miraculous.

My clothes began to decay, too, mightily. As to linen, I had none a good
while, except some chequered shirts which I found in the chests of the
other seamen, and which I carefully preserved, because many times I
could bear no other clothes on but a shirt; and it was a very great help
to me that I had, among all the men's clothes of the ship, almost three
dozen of shirts. There were also several thick watch-coats of the
seamen's which were left indeed, but they were too hot to wear; and
though it is true that the weather was so violent hot that there was no
need of clothes, yet I could not go quite naked, no, though I had been
inclined to it, which I was not, nor could abide the thoughts of it,
though I was all alone.

The reason why I could not go quite naked was, I could not bear the heat
of the sun so well when quite naked as with some clothes on; nay, the
very heat frequently blistered my skin; whereas, with a shirt on, the
air itself made some motion, and whistling under that shirt, was twofold
cooler than without it. No more could I ever bring myself to go out in
the heat of the sun without a cap or hat. The heat of the sun beating
with such violence, as it does in that place, would give me the headache
presently, by darting so directly on my head, without a cap or hat on,
so that I could not bear it; whereas, if I put on my hat, it would
presently go away.

Upon those views, I began to consider about putting the few rags I had,
which I called clothes, into some order. I had worn out all the
waistcoats I had, and my business was now to try if I could not make
jackets out of the great watch-coats which I had by me, and with such
other materials as I had; so I set to work a-tailoring, or rather,
indeed, a-botching, for I made most piteous work of it. However, I made
shift to make me two or three new waistcoats, which I hoped would serve
me a great while. As for breeches or drawers, I made but a very sorry
shift indeed till afterward.

I have mentioned that I saved the skins of all the creatures that I
killed, I mean four-footed ones, and I had hung them up stretched out
with sticks in the sun, by which means some of them were so dry and hard
that they were fit for little, but others it seems were very useful. The
first thing I made of these was a great cap for my head, with the hair
on the outside, to shoot off the rain; and this I performed so well,
that after this I made me a suit of clothes wholly of these skins, that
is to say, a waistcoat, and breeches open at knees, and both loose, for
they were rather wanting to keep me cool than to keep me warm. I must
not omit to acknowledge that they were wretchedly made; for if I was a
bad carpenter, I was a worse tailor. However, they were such as I made
very good shift with; and when I was abroad, if it happened to rain, the
hair of my waistcoat and cap being outermost, I was kept very dry.

After this I spent a great deal of time and pains to make me an
umbrella. I was indeed in great want of one, and had a great mind to
make one. I had seen them made in the Brazils, where they are very
useful in the great heats which are there; and I felt the heats every
jot as great here, and greater too, being nearer the equinox. Besides,
as I was obliged to be much abroad, it was a most useful thing to me, as
well for the rains as the heats. I took a world of pains at it, and was
a great while before I could make anything likely to hold; nay, after I
thought I had hit the way, I spoiled two or three before I made one to
my mind; but at last I made one that answered indifferently well. The
main difficulty I found was to make it to let down. I could make it to
spread; but if it did not let down too, and draw in, it was not portable
for me any way but just over my head, which would not do. However, at
last, as I said, I made one to answer, and covered it with skins, the
hair upwards, so that it cast off the rains like a pent-house, and kept
off the sun so effectually, that I could walk out in the hottest of the
weather with greater advantage than I could before in the coolest; and
when I had no need of it, could close it, and carry it under my arm.

Thus I lived mighty comfortably, my mind being entirely composed by
resigning to the will of God, and throwing myself wholly upon the
disposal of His providence. This made my life better than sociable; for
when I began to regret the want of conversation, I would ask myself
whether thus conversing mutually with my own thoughts and, as I hope I
may say, with even God Himself, by ejaculations, was not better than the
utmost enjoyment of human society in the world?

I cannot say that after this, for five years, any extraordinary thing
happened to me; but I lived on in the same course, in the same posture
and place, just as before. The chief things I was employed in, besides
my yearly labour of planting my barley and rice, and curing my raisins,
of both which I always kept up just enough to have sufficient stock of
one year's provisions beforehand--I say, besides this yearly labour, and
my daily labour of going out with my gun, I had one labour, to make me a
canoe, which at last I finished; so that by digging a canal to it of six
feet wide, and four feet deep, I brought it into the creek, almost half
a mile. As for the first, which was so vastly big, as I made it without
considering beforehand, as I ought to do, how I should be able to launch
it; so, never being able to bring it to the water, or bring the water to
it, I was obliged to let it lie where it was, as a memorandum to teach
me to be wiser next time. Indeed, the next time, though I could not get
a tree proper for it, and in a place where I could not get the water to
it at any less distance than, as I have said, near half a mile, yet as I
saw it was practicable at last, I never gave it over; and though I was
near two years about it, yet I never grudged my labour, in hopes of
having a boat to go off to sea at last.

However, though my little _periagua_ was finished, yet the size of it
was not at all answerable to the design which I had in view when I made
the first; I mean, of venturing over to the _terra firma_, where it was
above forty miles broad. Accordingly, the smallness of my boat assisted
to put an end to that design, and now I thought no more of it. But as I
had a boat, my next design was to make a tour round the island; for as I
had been on the other side in one place, crossing, as I have already
described it, over the land, so the discoveries I made in that little
journey made me very eager to see other parts of the coast; and now I
had a boat, I thought of nothing but sailing round the island.

For this purpose, that I might do everything with discretion and
consideration, I fitted up a little mast to my boat, and made a sail to
it out of some of the pieces of the ship's sail, which lay in store, and
of which I had a great stock by me.

Having fitted my mast and sail, and tried the boat, I found she would
sail very well. Then I made little lockers, or boxes, at either end of
my boat, to put provisions, necessaries, and ammunition, etc., into, to
be kept dry, either from rain or the spray of the sea; and a little long
hollow place I cut in the inside of the boat, where I could lay my gun,
making a flap to hang down over it to keep it dry.

I fixed my umbrella also in a step at the stern, like a mast, to stand
over my head, and keep the heat of the sun off of me, like an awning;
and thus I every now and then took a little voyage upon the sea, but
never went far out, nor far from the little creek. But at last, being
eager to view the circumference of my little kingdom, I resolved upon my
tour; and accordingly I victualled my ship for the voyage, putting in
two dozen of my loaves (cakes I should rather call them) of barley
bread, an earthen pot full of parched rice, a food I eat a great deal
of, a little bottle of rum, half a goat, and powder and shot for killing
more, and two large watch-coats, of those which, as I mentioned before,
I had saved out of the seamen's chests; these I took, one to lie upon,
and the other to cover me in the night.

It was the 6th of November, in the sixth year of my reign, or my
captivity, which you please, that I set out on this voyage, and I found
it much longer than I expected; for though the island itself was not
very large, yet when I came to the east side of it I found a great
ledge of rocks lie out about two leagues into the sea, some above water,
some under it, and beyond that a shoal of sand, lying dry half a league
more; so that I was obliged to go a great way out to sea to double the
point.

When first I discovered them, I was going to give over my enterprise,
and come back again, not knowing how far it might oblige me to go out to
sea, and, above all, doubting how I should get back again, so I came to
an anchor; for I had made me a kind of an anchor with a piece of a
broken grappling which I got out of the ship.

Having secured my boat, I took my gun and went on shore, climbing up
upon a hill, which seemed to overlook that point, where I saw the full
extent of it, and resolved to venture.

In my viewing the sea from that hill, where I stood, I perceived a
strong, and indeed a most furious current, which run to the east, and
even came close to the point; and I took the more notice of it, because
I saw there might be some danger that when I came into it I might be
carried out to sea by the strength of it, and not be able to make the
island again. And indeed, had I not gotten first up upon this hill, I
believe it would have been so; for there was the same current on the
other side the island, only that it set off at a farther distance; and I
saw there was a strong eddy under the shore; so I had nothing to do but
to get in out of the first current, and I should presently be in an
eddy.

I lay here, however, two days; because the wind, blowing pretty fresh at
E.S.E., and that being just contrary to the said current, made a great
breach of the sea upon the point; so that it was not safe for me to keep
too close to the shore for the breach, nor to go too far off because of
the stream.

The third day, in the morning, the wind having abated overnight, the sea
was calm, and I ventured. But I am a warning-piece again to all rash and
ignorant pilots; for no sooner was I come to the point, when even I was
not my boat's length from the shore, but I found myself in a great depth
of water, and a current like the sluice of a mill. It carried my boat
along with it with such violence, that all I could do could not keep her
so much as on the edge of it, but I found it hurried me farther and
farther out from the eddy, which was on my left hand. There was no wind
stirring to help me, and all I could do with my paddlers signified
nothing. And now I began to give myself over for lost; for, as the
current was on both sides the island, I knew in a few leagues' distance
they must join again, and then I was irrecoverably gone. Nor did I see
any possibility of avoiding it; so that I had no prospect before me but
of perishing; not by the sea, for that was calm enough, but of starving
for hunger. I had indeed found a tortoise on the shore, as big almost as
I could lift, and had tossed it into the boat; and I had a great jar of
fresh water, that is to say, one of my earthen pots; but what was all
this to being driven into the vast ocean, where, to be sure, there was
no shore, no mainland or island, for a thousand leagues at least.

And now I saw how easy it was for the providence of God to make the most
miserable condition mankind could be in worse. Now I looked back upon my
desolate solitary island as the most pleasant place in the world, and
all the happiness my heart could wish for was to be but there again. I
stretched out my hands to it, with eager wishes. "O happy desert!" said
I, "I shall never see thee more. O miserable creature," said I, "whither
am I going?" Then I reproached myself with my unthankful temper, and how
I had repined at my solitary condition; and now what would I give to be
on shore there again. Thus we never see the true state of our condition
till it is illustrated to us by its contraries; nor know how to value
what we enjoy, but by the want of it. It is scarce possible to imagine
the consternation I was now in, being driven from my beloved island (for
so it appeared to me now to be) into the wide ocean, almost two leagues,
and in the utmost despair of ever recovering it again. However, I worked
hard, till indeed my strength was almost exhausted, and kept my boat as
much to the northward, that is, towards the side of the current which
the eddy lay on, as possibly I could; when about noon, as the sun passed
the meridian, I thought I felt a little breeze of wind in my face,
springing up from the S.S.E. This cheered my heart a little, and
especially when, in about half an hour more, it blew a pretty small
gentle gale. By this time I was gotten at a frightful distance from the
island; and had the least cloud or hazy weather intervened, I had been
undone another way too; for I had no compass on board, and should never
have known how to have steered towards the island if I had but once lost
sight of it. But the weather continuing clear, I applied myself to get
up my mast again, and spread my sail, standing away to the north as much
as possible, to get out of the current.

Just as I had set my mast and sail, and the boat began to stretch away,
I saw even by the clearness of the water some alteration of the current
was near; for where the current was so strong, the water was foul. But
perceiving the water clear, I found the current abate, and presently I
found to the east, at about half a mile, a breach of the sea upon some
rocks. These rocks I found caused the current to part again; and as the
main stress of it ran away more southerly, leaving the rocks to the
north-east, so the other returned by the repulse of the rocks, and made
a strong eddy, which ran back again to the north-west with a very sharp
stream.

They who know what it is to have a reprieve brought to them upon the
ladder, or to be rescued from thieves just going to murder them, or who
have been in such like extremities, may guess what my present surprise
of joy was, and how gladly I put my boat into the stream of this eddy;
and the wind also freshening, how gladly I spread my sail to it, running
cheerfully before the wind, and with a strong tide or eddy under foot.

This eddy carried me about a league in my way back again, directly
towards the island, but about two leagues more to the northward than the
current which carried me away at first; so that when I came near the
island, I found myself open to the northern shore of it, that is to say,
the other end of the island, opposite to that which I went out from.

When I had made something more than a league of way by the help of this
current or eddy, I found it was spent, and served me no farther.
However, I found that being between the two great currents, viz., that
on the south side, which had hurried me away, and that on the north,
which lay about a league on the other side; I say, between these two, in
the wake of the island, I found the water at least still, and running no
way; and having still a breeze of wind fair for me, I kept on steering
directly for the island, though not making such fresh way as I did
before.

[Illustration: "I was a prisoner, locked up with the eternal bars and
bolts of the ocean." (See p. 135.)]

About four o'clock in the evening, being then within about a league of
the island, I found the point of the rocks which occasioned this
disaster stretching out, as is described before, to the southward, and
casting off the current more southwardly had, of course, made another
eddy to the north, and this I found very strong, but not directly
setting the way my course lay, which was due west, but almost full
north. However, having a fresh gale, I stretched across this eddy,
slanting north-west; and in about an hour came within about a mile of
the shore, where, it being smooth water, I soon got to land.

When I was on shore, I fell on my knees, and gave God thanks for my
deliverance, resolving to lay aside all thoughts of my deliverance by my
boat; and refreshing myself with such things as I had, I brought my boat
close to the shore, in a little cove that I had spied under some trees,
and laid me down to sleep, being quite spent with the labour and fatigue
of the voyage.

I was now at a great loss which way to get home with my boat. I had run
so much hazard, and knew too much the case, to think of attempting it by
the way I went out; and what might be at the other side (I mean the west
side) I knew not, nor had I any mind to run any more ventures. So I only
resolved in the morning to make my way westward along the shore, and to
see if there was no creek where I might lay up my frigate in safety, so
as to have her again if I wanted her. In about three miles, or
thereabouts, coasting the shore, I came to a very good inlet or bay,
about a mile over, which narrowed till it came to a very little rivulet
or brook, where I found a very convenient harbour for my boat, and where
she lay as if she had been in a little dock made on purpose for her.
Here I put in, and having stowed my boat very safe, I went on shore to
look about me, and see where I was.

I soon found I had but a little passed by the place where I had been
before, when I travelled on foot to that shore; so taking nothing out of
my boat but my gun and my umbrella, for it was exceedingly hot, I began
my march. The way was comfortable enough after such a voyage as I had
been upon, and I reached my old bower in the evening, where I found
everything standing as I left it; for I always kept it in good order,
being, as I said before, my country house.

I got over the fence, and laid me down in the shade to rest my limbs,
for I was very weary, and fell asleep. But judge you, if you can, that
read my story, what a surprise I must be in, when I was waked out of my
sleep by a voice calling me by my name several times, "Robin, Robin,
Robin Crusoe, poor Robin Crusoe! Where are you, Robin Crusoe? Where are
you? Where have you been?"

I was so dead asleep at first, being fatigued with rowing, or paddling,
as it is called, the first part of the day, and with walking the latter
part, that I did not wake thoroughly; but dozing between sleeping and
waking, thought I dreamed that somebody spoke to me. But as the voice
continued to repeat "Robin Crusoe, Robin Crusoe," at last I began to
wake more perfectly, and was at first dreadfully frighted, and started
up in the utmost consternation. But no sooner were my eyes open, but I
saw my Poll sitting on the top of the hedge, and immediately knew that
it was he that spoke to me; for just in such bemoaning language I had
used to talk to him, and teach him; and he had learned it so perfectly,
that he would sit upon my finger, and lay his bill close to my face, and
cry, "Poor Robin Crusoe! Where are you? Where have you been? How come
you here?" and such things as I had taught him.

However, even though I knew it was the parrot, and that indeed it could
be nobody else, it was a good while before I could compose myself.
First, I was amazed how the creature got thither, and then, how he
should just keep about the place, and nowhere else. But as I was well
satisfied it could be nobody but honest Poll, I got it over; and holding
out my hand, and calling him by his name, Poll, the sociable creature,
came to me, and sat upon my thumb, as he used to do, and continued
talking to me, "Poor Robin Crusoe! and how did I come here? and where
had I been?" just as if he had been overjoyed to see me again; and so I
carried him home along with me.

I had now had enough of rambling to sea for some time, and had enough to
do for many days to sit still, and reflect upon the danger I had been
in. I would have been very glad to have had my boat again on my side of
the island; but I knew not how it was practicable to get it about. As to
the east side of the island, which I had gone round, I knew well enough
there was no venturing that way; my very heart would shrink, and my very
blood run chill, but to think of it. And as to the other side of the
island, I did not know how it might be there; but supposing the current
ran with the same force against the shore at the east as it passed by it
on the other, I might run the same risk of being driven down the stream,
and carried by the island, as I had been before of being carried away
from it. So, with these thoughts, I contented myself to be without any
boat, though it had been the product of so many months' labour to make
it, and of so many more to get it unto the sea.

In this government of my temper I remained near a year, lived a very
sedate, retired life, as you may well suppose; and my thoughts being
very much composed as to my condition, and fully comforted in resigning
myself to the dispositions of Providence, I thought I lived really very
happily in all things, except that of society.

I improved myself in this time in all the mechanic exercises which my
necessities put me upon applying myself to, and I believe could, upon
occasion, make a very good carpenter, especially considering how few
tools I had. Besides this, I arrived at an unexpected perfection in my
earthenware, and contrived well enough to make them with a wheel, which
I found infinitely easier and better, because I made things round and
shapable which before were filthy things indeed to look on. But I think
I was never more vain of my own performance, or more joyful for anything
I found out, than for my being able to make a tobacco-pipe. And though
it was a very ugly, clumsy thing when it was done, and only burnt red,
like other earthenware, yet as it was hard and firm, and would draw the
smoke, I was exceedingly comforted with it; for I had been always used
to smoke, and there were pipes in the ship, but I forgot them at first,
not knowing that there was tobacco in the island; and afterwards, when I
searched the ship again, I could not come at any pipes at all.

In my wicker-ware also I improved much, and made abundance of necessary
baskets, as well as my invention showed me; though not very handsome,
yet they were such as were very handy and convenient for my laying
things up in, or fetching things home in. For example, if I killed a
goat abroad, I could hang it up in a tree, flay it, and dress it, and
cut it in pieces, and bring it home in a basket; and the like by a
turtle; I could cut it up, take out the eggs, and a piece or two of the
flesh, which was enough for me, and bring them home in a basket, and
leave the rest behind me. Also large deep baskets were my receivers for
my corn, which I always rubbed out as soon as it was dry, and cured, and
kept it in great baskets.

I began now to perceive my powder abated considerably, and this was a
want which it was impossible for me to supply, and I began seriously to
consider what I must do when I should have no more powder; that is to
say, how I should do to kill any goats. I had, as is observed, in the
third year of my being here kept a young kid, and bred her up tame, and
I was in hope of getting a he-goat. But I could not by any means bring
it to pass, till my kid grew an old goat; and I could never find in my
heart to kill her, till she died at last of mere age.

But being now in the eleventh year of my residence, and, as I have said,
my ammunition growing low, I set myself to study some art to trap and
snare the goats, to see whether I could not catch some of them alive;
and particularly, I wanted a she-goat great with young.

To this purpose, I made snares to hamper them, and I do believe they
were more than once taken in them; but my tackle was not good, for I had
no wire, and I always found them broken, and my bait devoured. At length
I resolved to try a pitfall; so I dug several large pits in the earth,
in places where I had observed the goats used to feed, and over these
pits I placed hurdles, of my own making too, with a great weight upon
them; and several times I put ears of barley and dry rice, without
setting the trap, and I could easily perceive that the goats had gone in
and eaten up the corn, for I could see the mark of their feet. At length
I set three traps in one night, and going the next morning, I found them
all standing, and yet the bait eaten and gone; this was very
discouraging. However, I altered my trap; and, not to trouble you with
particulars, going one morning to see my trap, I found in one of them a
large old he-goat, and in one of the other three kids, a male and two
females.

As to the old one, I knew not what to do with him, he was so fierce I
durst not go into the pit to him; that is to say, to go about to bring
him away alive, which was what I wanted. I could have killed him, but
that was not my business, nor would it answer my end; so I even let him
out, and he ran away, as if he had been frighted out of his wits. But I
had forgotten then what I learned afterwards, that hunger will tame a
lion. If I had let him stay there three or four days without food, and
then have carried him some water to drink, and then a little corn, he
would have been as tame as one of the kids, for they are mighty
sagacious, tractable creatures where they are well used.

However, for the present I let him go, knowing no better at that time.
Then I went to the three kids, and taking them one by one, I tied them
with strings together, and with some difficulty brought them all home.

It was a good while before they would feed, but throwing them some sweet
corn, it tempted them, and they began to be tame. And now I found that
if I expected to supply myself with goat-flesh when I had no powder or
shot left, breeding some up tame was my only way, when perhaps I might
have them about my house like a flock of sheep.

But then it presently occurred to me that I must keep the tame from the
wild, or else they would always run wild when they grew up; and the only
way for this was to have some enclosed piece of ground, well fenced
either with hedge or pale, to keep them in so effectually, that those
within might not break out, or those without break in.

This was a great undertaking for one pair of hands; yet as I saw there
was an absolute necessity of doing it, my first piece of work was to
find out a proper piece of ground, viz., where there was likely to be
herbage for them to eat, water for them to drink, and cover to keep them
from the sun.

Those who understand such enclosures will think I had very little
contrivance when I pitched upon a place very proper for all these, being
a plain open piece of meadow land, or savanna (as our people call it in
the western colonies), which had two or three little drills of fresh
water in it, and at one end was very woody; I say, they will smile at my
forecast, when I shall tell them I began my enclosing of this piece of
ground in such a manner, that my hedge or pale must have been at least
two miles about. Nor was the madness of it so great as to the compass,
for if it was ten miles about, I was like to have time enough to do it
in. But I did not consider that my goats would be as wild in so much
compass as if they had had the whole island, and I should have so much
room to chase them in, that I should never catch them.

My hedge was begun and carried on, I believe, about fifty yards, when
this thought occurred to me, so I presently stopped short, and, for the
first beginning, I resolved to enclose a piece of about 150 yards in
length, and 100 yards in breadth; which, as it would maintain as many as
I should have in any reasonable time, so, as my flock increased, I could
add more ground to my enclosure.

This was acting with some prudence, and I went to work with courage. I
was about three months hedging in the first piece, and, till I had done
it, I tethered the three kids in the best part of it, and used them to
feed as near me as possible, to make them familiar; and very often I
would go and carry them some ears of barley, or a handful of rice, and
feed them out of my hand; so that after my enclosure was finished, and I
let them loose, they would follow me up and down, bleating after me for
a handful of corn.

This answered my end, and in about a year and half I had a flock of
about twelve goats, kids and all; and in two years more I had three and
forty, besides several that I took and killed for my food. And after
that I enclosed five several pieces of ground to feed them in, with
little pens to drive them into, to take them as I wanted, and gates out
of one piece of ground into another.

But this was not all, for now I not only had goat's flesh to feed on
when I pleased, but milk too, a thing which, indeed, in my beginning, I
did not so much as think of, and which, when it came into my thoughts,
was really an agreeable surprise. For now I set up my dairy, and had
sometimes a gallon or two of milk in a day; and as Nature, who gives
supplies of food to every creature, dictates even naturally how to make
use of it, so I, that had never milked a cow, much less a goat, or seen
butter or cheese made, very readily and handily, though after a great
many essays and miscarriages, made me both butter and cheese at last,
and never wanted it afterwards.

How mercifully can our great Creator treat His creatures, even in those
conditions in which they seemed to be overwhelmed in destruction! How
can He sweeten the bitterest providences, and give us cause to praise
Him for dungeons and prisons! What a table was here spread for me in a
wilderness, where I saw nothing at first but to perish for hunger!

It would have made a stoic smile, to have seen me and my little family
sit down to dinner. There was my majesty, the prince and lord of the
whole island; I had the lives of all my subjects at my absolute command.
I could hang, draw, give liberty, and take it away; and no rebels among
all my subjects.

Then to see how like a king I dined, too, all alone, attended by my
servants. Poll, as if he had been my favourite, was the only person
permitted to talk to me. My dog, who was now grown very old and crazy,
and had found no species to multiply his kind upon, sat always at my
right hand, and two cats, one on one side the table, and one on the
other, expecting now and then a bit from my hand, as a mark of special
favour.

But these were not the two cats which I brought on shore at first, for
they were both of them dead, and had been interred near my habitation,
by my own hand. But one of them having multiplied by I know not what
kind of creature, these were two which I had preserved tame, whereas the
rest run wild in the woods, and became indeed troublesome to me at last;
for they would often come into my house, and plunder me too, till at
last I was obliged to shoot them, and did kill a great many; at length
they left me. With this attendance, and in this plentiful manner, I
lived; neither could I be said to want anything but society; and of that
in some time after this, I was like to have too much.

I was something impatient, as I have observed, to have the use of my
boat, though very loth to run any more hazards; and therefore sometimes
I sat contriving ways to get her about the island, and at other times I
sat myself down contented enough without her. But I had a strange
uneasiness in my mind to go down to the point of the island, where, as I
have said, in my last ramble, I went up the hill to see how the shore
lay, and how the current set, that I might see what I had to do. This
inclination increased upon me every day, and at length I resolved to
travel thither by land, following the edge of the shore. I did so; but
had any one in England been to meet such a man as I was, it must either
have frighted them, or raised a great deal of laughter; and as I
frequently stood still to look at myself, I could not but smile at the
notion of my travelling through Yorkshire, with such an equipage, and in
such a dress. Be pleased to take a sketch of my figure, as follows.

I had a great high shapeless cap, made of a goat's skin, with a flap
hanging down behind, as well to keep the sun from me, as to shoot the
rain off from running into my neck; nothing being so hurtful in these
climates as the rain upon the flesh, under the clothes.

I had a short jacket of goat's skin, the skirts coming down to about the
middle of my thighs; and a pair of open-kneed breeches of the same. The
breeches were made of the skin of an old he-goat, whose hair hung down
such a length on either side, that, like pantaloons, it reached to the
middle of my legs. Stockings and shoes I had none, but had made me a
pair of somethings, I scarce know what to call them, like buskins, to
flap over my legs, and lace on either side like spatterdashes; but of a
most barbarous shape, as indeed were all the rest of my clothes.

I had on a broad belt of goat's skin dried, which I drew together with
two thongs of the same, instead of buckles; and in a kind of a frog on
either side of this, instead of a sword and a dagger, hung a little saw
and a hatchet, one on one side, one on the other. I had another belt,
not so broad, and fastened in the same manner, which hung over my
shoulder; and at the end of it, under my left arm, hung two pouches,
both made of goat's skin too; in one of which hung my powder, in the
other my shot. At my back I carried my basket, on my shoulder my gun,
and over my head a great clumsy ugly goat-skin umbrella, but which,
after all, was the most necessary thing I had about me, next to my gun.
As for my face, the colour of it was really not so mulatto-like as one
might expect from a man not at all careful of it, and living within
nineteen degrees of the equinox. My beard I had once suffered to grow
till it was about a quarter of a yard long; but as I had both scissors
and razors sufficient, I had cut it pretty short, except what grew on
my upper lip, which I had trimmed into a large pair of Mahometan
whiskers, such as I had seen worn by some Turks whom I saw at Sallee;
for the Moors did not wear such, though the Turks did. Of these
mustachios or whiskers, I will not say they were long enough to hang my
hat upon them, but they were of a length and shape monstrous enough, and
such as, in England, would have passed for frightful.

But all this is by the bye; for, as to my figure, I had so few to
observe me, that it was of no manner of consequence; so I say no more to
that part. In this kind of figure I went my new journey, and was out
five or six days. I travelled first along the sea-shore, directly to the
place where I first brought my boat to an anchor, to get up upon the
rocks. And having no boat now to take care of, I went over the land, a
nearer way, to the same height that I was upon before; when, looking
forward to the point of the rocks which lay out, and which I was obliged
to double with my boat, as is said above, I was surprised to see the sea
all smooth and quiet, no rippling, no motion, no current, any more there
than in other places.

I was at a strange loss to understand this, and resolved to spend some
time in the observing it, to see if nothing from the sets of the tide
had occasioned it. But I was presently convinced how it was, viz., that
the tide of ebb setting from the west, and joining with the current of
waters from some great river on the shore, must be the occasion of this
current; and that according as the wind blew more forcibly from the
west, or from the north, this current came near, or went farther from
the shore; for waiting thereabouts till evening, I went up to the rock
again, and then the tide of ebb being made, I plainly saw the current
again as before, only that it run farther off, being near half a league
from the shore; whereas in my case it set close upon the shore, and
hurried me and my canoe along with it, which, at another time, it would
not have done.

This observation convinced me that I had nothing to do but to observe
the ebbing and the flowing of the tide, and I might very easily bring my
boat about the island again. But when I began to think of putting it in
practice, I had such a terror upon my spirits at the remembrance of the
danger I had been in, that I could not think of it again with any
patience; but, on the contrary, I took up another resolution, which was
more safe, though more laborious; and this was, that I would build, or
rather make me another _periagua_ or canoe; and so have one for one side
of the island, and one for the other.

You are to understand that now I had, as I may call it, two plantations
in the island; one, my little fortification or tent, with the wall about
it, under the rock, with the cave behind me, which, by this time, I had
enlarged into several apartments or caves, one within another. One of
these, which was the driest and largest, and had a door out beyond my
wall or fortification, that is to say, beyond where my wall joined to
the rock, was all filled up with the large earthen pots, of which I have
given an account, and with fourteen or fifteen great baskets, which
would hold five or six bushels each, where I laid up my stores of
provision, especially my corn, some in the ear, cut off short from the
straw, and the other rubbed out with my hand.

As for my wall, made, as before, with long stakes or piles, those piles
grew all like trees, and were by this time grown so big, and spread so
very much, that there was not the least appearance, to any one's view,
of any habitation behind them.

Near this dwelling of mine, but a little farther within the land, and
upon lower ground, lay my two pieces of corn ground, which I kept duly
cultivated and sowed, and which duly yielded me their harvest in its
season; and whenever I had occasion for more corn, I had more land
adjoining as fit as that.

Besides this, I had my country seat, and I had now a tolerable
plantation there also; for, first, I had my little bower, as I called
it, which I kept in repair; that is to say, I kept the hedge which
circled it in constantly fitted up to its usual height, the ladder
standing always in the inside. I kept the trees, which at first were no
more than my stakes, but were now grown very firm and tall, I kept them
always so cut, that they might spread and grow thick and wild, and make
the more agreeable shade, which they did effectually to my mind. In the
middle of this, I had my tent always standing, being a piece of a sail,
spread over poles, set up for that purpose, and which never wanted any
repair or renewing; and under this I had made me a squab or couch, with
the skins of the creatures I had killed, and with other soft things, and
a blanket laid on them, such as belonged to our sea-bedding, which I had
saved, and a great watch-coat to cover me; and here, whenever I had
occasion to be absent from my chief seat, I took up my country
habitation.

Adjoining to this I had my enclosures for my cattle, that is to say, my
goats. And as I had taken an inconceivable deal of pains to fence and
enclose this ground, so I was so uneasy to see it kept entire, lest the
goats should break through, that I never left off till, with infinite
labour, I had stuck the outside of the hedge so full of small stakes,
and so near to one another, that it was rather a pale than a hedge, and
there was scarce room to put a hand through between them; which
afterwards, when those stakes grew, as they all did in the next rainy
season, made the enclosure strong like a wall, indeed, stronger than any
wall.

This will testify for me that I was not idle, and that I spared no pains
to bring to pass whatever appeared necessary for my comfortable support;
for I considered the keeping up a breed of tame creatures thus at my
hand would be a living magazine of flesh, milk, butter, and cheese for
me as long as I lived in the place, if it were to be forty years; and
that keeping them in my reach depended entirely upon my perfecting my
enclosures to such a degree, that I might be sure of keeping them
together; which, by this method, indeed, I so effectually secured, that
when these little stakes began to grow, I had planted them so very
thick, I was forced to pull some of them up again.

In this place also I had my grapes growing, which I principally depended
on for my winter store of raisins, and which I never failed to preserve
very carefully, as the best and most agreeable dainty of my whole diet.
And indeed they were not agreeable only, but physical, wholesome,
nourishing, and refreshing to the last degree.

As this was also about half-way between my other habitation and the
place where I had laid up my boat, I generally stayed and lay here in my
way thither; for I used frequently to visit my boat, and I kept all
things about, or belonging to her, in very good order. Sometimes I went
out in her to divert myself, but no more hazardous voyages would I go,
nor scarce ever above a stone's cast or two from the shore, I was so
apprehensive of being hurried out of my knowledge again by the currents
or winds, or any other accident. But now I come to a new scene of my
life.

It happened one day, about noon, going towards my boat, I was
exceedingly surprised with the print of a man's naked foot on the shore,
which was very plain to be seen in the sand. I stood like one
thunderstruck, or as if I had seen an apparition. I listened, I looked
round me, I could hear nothing, nor see anything. I went up to a rising
ground, to look farther. I went up the shore, and down the shore, but it
was all one; I could see no other impression but that one. I went to it
again to see if there were any more, and to observe if it might not be
my fancy; but there was no room for that, for there was exactly the very
print of a foot--toes, heel, and every part of a foot. How it came
thither I knew not, nor could in the least imagine. But after
innumerable fluttering thoughts, like a man perfectly confused and out
of myself, I came home to my fortification, not feeling, as we say, the
ground I went on, but terrified to the last degree, looking behind me at
every two or three steps, mistaking every bush and tree, and fancying
every stump at a distance to be a man; nor is it possible to describe
how many various shapes affrighted imagination represented things to me
in, how many wild ideas were found every moment in my fancy, and what
strange, unaccountable whimsies came into my thoughts by the way.

When I came to my castle, for so I think I called it ever after this, I
fled into it like one pursued. Whether I went over by the ladder, as
first contrived, or went in at the hole in the rock, which I called a
door, I cannot remember; no, nor could I remember the next morning, for
never frighted hare fled to cover, or fox to earth, with more terror of
mind than I to this retreat.

I slept none that night. The farther I was from the occasion of my
fright, the greater my apprehensions were; which is something contrary
to the nature of such things, and especially to the usual practice of
all creatures in fear. But I was so embarrassed with my own frightful
ideas of the thing, that I formed nothing but dismal imaginations to
myself, even though I was now a great way off it. Sometimes I fancied it
must be the devil, and reason joined in with me upon this supposition;
for how should any other thing in human shape come into the place? Where
was the vessel that brought them? What marks were there of any other
footsteps? And how was it possible a man should come there? But then to
think that Satan should take human shape upon him in such a place, where
there could be no manner of occasion for it, but to leave the print of
his foot behind him, and that even for no purpose too, for he could not
be sure I should see it; this was an amusement the other way. I
considered that the devil might have found out abundance of others ways
to have terrified me than this of the single print of a foot; that as I
lived quite on the other side of the island, he would never have been so
simple to leave a mark in a place where it was ten thousand to one
whether I should ever see it or not, and in the sand too, which the
first surge of the sea, upon a high wind, would have defaced entirely.
All this seemed inconsistent with the thing itself, and with all the
notions we usually entertain of the subtilty of the devil.

Abundance of such things as these assisted to argue me out of all
apprehensions of its being the devil; and I presently concluded then,
that it must be some more dangerous creature, viz., that it must be some
of the savages of the mainland over against me, who had wandered out to
sea in their canoes, and, either driven by the currents or by contrary
winds, had made the island, and had been on shore, but were gone away
again to sea being as loth, perhaps, to have stayed in this desolate
island as I would have been to have had them.

[Illustration: "This tree I was three days a-cutting down." (See p.
137.)]

While these reflections were rolling upon my mind, I was very
thankful in my thoughts that I was so happy as not to be thereabouts at
that time, or that they did not see my boat, by which they would have
concluded that some inhabitants had been in the place, and perhaps have
searched farther for me. Then terrible thoughts racked my imagination
about their having found my boat, and that there were people here; and
that if so, I should certainly have them come again in greater numbers,
and devour me; and if it should happen so that they should not find me,
yet they would find my enclosure, destroy all my corn, carry away all my
flock of tame goats, and I should perish at last for mere want.

Thus my fear banished all my religious hope. All that former confidence
in God, which was founded upon such wonderful experience as I had had of
His goodness, now vanished, as if He that had fed me by miracle hitherto
could not preserve, by His power, the provision which He had made for me
by His goodness. I reproached myself with my easiness, that would not
sow any more corn one year than would just serve me till the next
season, as if no accident could intervene to prevent my enjoying the
crop that was upon the ground. And this I thought so just a reproof,
that I resolved for the future to have two or three years' corn
beforehand, so that, whatever might come, I might not perish for want of
bread.

How strange a chequer-work of Providence is the life of man! and by what
secret differing springs are the affections hurried about as differing
circumstances present! To-day we love what to-morrow we hate; to-day we
seek what to-morrow we shun; to-day we desire what to-morrow we fear;
nay, even tremble at the apprehensions of. This was exemplified in me,
at this time, in the most lively manner imaginable; for I, whose only
affliction was that I seemed banished from human society, that I was
alone, circumscribed by the boundless ocean, cut off from mankind, and
condemned to what I called silent life; that I was as one whom Heaven
thought not worthy to be numbered among the living, or to appear among
the rest of His creatures; that to have seen one of my own species would
have seemed to me a raising me from death to life, and the greatest
blessing that Heaven itself, next to the supreme blessing of salvation,
could bestow; I say, that I should now tremble at the very apprehensions
of seeing a man, and was ready to sink into the ground at but the shadow
or silent appearance of a man's having set his foot in the island!

Such is the uneven state of human life; and it afforded me a great many
curious speculations afterwards, when I had a little recovered my first
surprise. I considered that this was the station of life the infinitely
wise and good providence of God had determined for me; that, as I could
not foresee what the ends of Divine wisdom might be in all this, so I
was not to dispute His sovereignty, who, as I was His creature, had an
undoubted right, by creation, to govern and dispose of me absolutely as
He thought fit, and who, as I was a creature who had offended Him, had
likewise a judicial right to condemn me to what punishment He thought
fit; and that it was my part to submit to bear His indignation, because
I had sinned against Him.

I then reflected that God, who was not only righteous, but omnipotent,
as He had thought fit thus to punish and afflict me, so He was able to
deliver me; that if He did not think fit to do it, 'twas my unquestioned
duty to resign myself absolutely and entirely to His will; and, on the
other hand, it was my duty also to hope in Him, pray to Him, and quietly
to attend the dictates and directions of His daily providence.

These thoughts took me up many hours, days, nay, I may say, weeks and
months; and one particular effect of my cogitations on this occasion I
cannot omit, viz., one morning early, lying in my bed, and filled with
thought about my danger from the appearance of savages, I found it
discomposed me very much; upon which those words of the Scripture came
into my thoughts, "Call upon Me in the day of trouble, and I will
deliver, and thou shalt glorify Me."

Upon this, rising cheerfully out of my bed, my heart was not only
comforted, but I was guided and encouraged to pray earnestly to God for
deliverance. When I had done praying, I took up my Bible, and opening it
to read, the first words that presented to me were, "Wait on the Lord,
and be of good cheer, and He shall strengthen thy heart; wait, I say, on
the Lord." It is impossible to express the comfort this gave me. In
answer, I thankfully laid down the book, and was no more sad, at least,
not on that occasion.

In the middle of these cogitations, apprehensions, and reflections, it
came into my thought one day, that all this might be a mere chimera of
my own; and that this foot might be the print of my own foot, when I
came on shore from my boat. This cheered me up a little too, and I began
to persuade myself it was all a delusion, that it was nothing else but
my own foot; and why might not I come that way from the boat, as well as
I was going that way to the boat? Again, I considered also, that I could
by no means tell, for certain, where I had trod, and where I had not;
and that if, at last, this was only the print of my own foot, I had
played the part of those fools who strive to make stories of spectres
and apparitions, and then are frighted at them more than anybody.

Now I began to take courage, and to peep abroad again, for I had not
stirred out of my castle for three days and nights, so that I began to
starve for provision; for I had little or nothing within doors but some
barley-cakes and water. Then I knew that my goats wanted to be milked
too, which usually was my evening diversion; and the poor creatures were
in great pain and inconvenience for want of it; and, indeed, it almost
spoiled some of them, and almost dried up their milk.

Heartening myself, therefore, with the belief that this was nothing but
the print of one of my own feet, and so I might be truly said to start
at my own shadow, I began to go abroad again, and went to my country
house to milk my flock. But to see with what fear I went forward, how
often I looked behind me, how I was ready, every now and then, to lay
down my basket, and run for my life, it would have made any one have
thought I was haunted with an evil conscience, or that I had been lately
most terribly frighted; and so, indeed, I had.

However, as I went down thus two or three days, and having seen nothing,
I began to be a little bolder, and to think there was really nothing in
it but my own imagination. But I could not persuade myself fully of this
till I should go down to the shore again, and see this print of a foot,
and measure it by my own, and see if there was any similitude or
fitness, that I might be assured it was my own foot. But when I came to
the place, first, it appeared evidently to me, that when I laid up my
boat, I could not possibly be on shore anywhere thereabout; secondly,
when I came to measure the mark with my own foot, I found my foot not so
large by a great deal. Both these things filled my head with new
imaginations, and gave me the vapours again to the highest degree; so
that I shook with cold, like one in an ague; and I went home again,
filled with the belief that some man or men had been on shore there;
or, in short, that the island was inhabited, and I might be surprised
before I was aware. And what course to take for my security, I knew not.

Oh, what ridiculous resolutions men take when possessed with fear! It
deprives them of the use of those means which reason offers for their
relief. The first thing I proposed to myself was to throw down my
enclosures, and turn all my tame cattle wild into the woods, that the
enemy might not find them, and then frequent the island in prospect of
the same or the like booty; then to the simple thing of digging up my
two corn-fields, that they might not find such a grain there, and still
be prompted to frequent the island; then to demolish my bower and tent,
that they might not see any vestiges of habitation, and be prompted to
look farther, in order to find out the persons inhabiting.

These were the subject of the first night's cogitation, after I was come
home again, while the apprehensions which had so overrun my mind were
fresh upon me, and my head was full of vapours, as above. Thus fear of
danger is ten thousand times more terrifying than danger itself when
apparent to the eyes; and we find the burthen of anxiety greater, by
much, than the evil which we are anxious about; and, which was worse
than all this, I had not that relief in this trouble from the
resignation I used to practise, that I hoped to have. I looked, I
thought, like Saul, who complained not only that the Philistines were
upon him, but that God had forsaken him; for I did not now take due ways
to compose my mind, by crying to God in my distress, and resting upon
His providence, as I had done before, for my defence and deliverance;
which, if I had done, I had at least been more cheerfully supported
under this new surprise, and perhaps carried through it with more
resolution.

This confusion of my thoughts kept me waking all night, but in the
morning I fell asleep; and having, by the amusement of my mind, been, as
it were, tired, and my spirits exhausted, I slept very soundly, and
waked much better composed than I had ever been before. And now I began
to think sedately; and upon the utmost debate with myself, I concluded
that this island, which was so exceeding pleasant, fruitful, and no
farther from the mainland than as I had seen, was not so entirely
abandoned as I might imagine; that although there were no stated
inhabitants who lived on the spot, yet that there might sometimes come
boats off from the shore, who, either with design, or perhaps never but
when they were driven by cross winds, might come to this place; that I
had lived here fifteen years now, and had not met with the least shadow
or figure of any people yet; and that if at any time they should be
driven here, it was probable they went away again as soon as ever they
could, seeing they had never thought fit to fix there upon any occasion
to this time; that the most I could suggest any danger from, was from
any such casual accidental landing of straggling people from the main,
who, as it was likely if they were driven hither, were here against
their wills; so they made no stay here, but went off again with all
possible speed, seldom staying one night on shore, lest they should not
have the help of the tides and daylight back again; and that, therefore,
I had nothing to do but to consider of some safe retreat, in case I
should see any savages land upon the spot.

Now I began sorely to repent that I had dug my cave so large as to bring
a door through again, which door, as I said, came out beyond where my
fortification joined to the rock. Upon maturely considering this,
therefore, I resolved to draw me a second fortification in the same
manner of a semicircle, at a distance from my wall, just where I had
planted a double row of trees about twelve years before, of which I made
mention. These trees having been planted so thick before, they wanted
but a few piles to be driven between them, that they should be thicker
and stronger, and my wall would be soon finished.

So that I had now a double wall; and my outer wall was thickened with
pieces of timber, old cables, and everything I could think of, to make
it strong, having in it seven little holes, about as big as I might put
my arm out at. In the inside of this I thickened my wall to about ten
feet thick, with continual bringing earth out of my cave, and laying it
at the foot of the wall, and walking upon it; and through the seven
holes I contrived to plant the muskets, of which I took notice that I
got seven on shore out of the ship. These, I say, I planted like my
cannon, and fitted them into frames, that held them like a carriage,
that so I could fire all the seven guns in two minutes' time. This wall
I was many a weary month a-finishing, and yet never thought myself safe
till it was done.

When this was done, I stuck all the ground without my wall, for a great
way every way, as full with stakes, or sticks, of the osier-like wood,
which I found so apt to grow, as they could well stand; insomuch, that I
believe I might set in near twenty thousand of them, leaving a pretty
large space between them and my wall, that I might have room to see an
enemy, and they might have no shelter from the young trees, if they
attempted to approach my outer wall.

Thus in two years' time I had a thick grove; and in five or six years'
time I had a wood before my dwelling, growing so monstrous thick and
strong, that it was indeed perfectly impassable; and no men, or what
kind soever, would ever imagine that there was anything beyond it, much
less a habitation. As for the way which I proposed to myself to go in
and out, for I left no avenue, it was by setting two ladders, one to a
part of the rock which was low, and then broke in, and left room to
place another ladder upon that; so when the two ladders were taken down,
no man living could come down to me without mischieving himself; and if
they had come down, they were still on the outside of my outer wall.

Thus I took all the measures human prudence could suggest for my own
preservation; and it will be seen, at length, that they were not
altogether without just reason; though I foresaw nothing at that time
more than my mere fear suggested to me.

While this was doing, I was not altogether careless of my other affairs;
for I had a great concern upon me for my little herd of goats. They were
not only a present supply to me upon every occasion, and began to be
sufficient to me, without the expense of powder and shot, but also
without the fatigue of hunting after the wild ones; and I was loth to
lose the advantage of them, and to have them all to nurse up over again.

To this purpose, after long consideration, I could think of but two ways
to preserve them. One was, to find another convenient place to dig a
cave under ground, and to drive them into it every night; and the other
was, to enclose two or three little bits of land, remote from one
another, and as much concealed as I could, where I might keep about half
a dozen young goats in each place; so that if any disaster happened to
the flock in general, I might be able to raise them again with little
trouble and time. And this, though it would require a great deal of time
and labour, I thought was the most rational design.

Accordingly I spent some time to find out the most retired parts of the
island; and I pitched upon one which was as private indeed as my heart
could wish for. It was a little damp piece of ground, in the middle of
the hollow and thick woods, where, as is observed, I almost lost myself
once before, endeavouring to come back that way from the eastern part of
the island. Here I found a clear piece of land, near three acres, so
surrounded with woods, that it was almost an enclosure by Nature; at
least, it did not want near so much labour to make it so as the other
pieces of ground I had worked so hard at.

I immediately went to work with this piece of ground, and in less than a
month's time I had so fenced it round, that my flock, or herd, call it
which you please, who were not so wild now as at first they might be
supposed to be, were well enough secured in it. So, without any farther
delay, I removed ten young she-goats and two he-goats to this piece. And
when they were there, I continued to perfect the fence, till I had made
it as secure as the other, which, however, I did at more leisure, and it
took me up more time by a great deal.

All this labour I was at the expense of, purely from my apprehensions on
the account of the print of a man's foot which I had seen; for, as yet,
I never saw any human creature come near the island. And I had now lived
two years under these uneasinesses, which, indeed, made my life much
less comfortable than it was before, as may well be imagined by any who
know what it is to live in the constant snare of the fear of man. And
this I must observe, with grief too, that the discomposure of my mind
had too great impressions also upon the religious part of my thoughts;
for the dread and terror of falling into the hands of savages and
cannibals lay so upon my spirits, that I seldom found myself in a due
temper or application to my Maker, at least not with the sedate calmness
and resignation of soul which I was wont to do. I rather prayed to God
as under great affliction and pressure of mind, surrounded with danger,
and in expectation every night of being murdered and devoured before
morning; and I must testify from my experience, that a temper of peace,
thankfulness, love, and affection, is much more the proper frame for
prayer than that of terror and discomposure; and that under the dread of
mischief impending, a man is no more fit for a comforting performance of
the duty of praying to God, than he is for repentance on a sick-bed. For
these discomposures affect the mind, as the others do the body; and the
discomposure of the mind must necessarily be as great a disability as
that of the body, and much greater, praying to God being properly an act
of the mind, not of the body.

But to go on. After I had thus secured one part of my little living
stock, I went about the whole island, searching for another private
place to make such another deposit; when, wandering more to the west
point of the island than I had ever done yet, and looking out to sea, I
thought I saw a boat upon the sea, at a great distance. I had found a
prospective glass or two in one of the seamen's chests, which I saved
out of our ship, but I had it not about me; and this was so remote, that
I could not tell what to make of it, though I looked at it till my eyes
were not able to hold to look any longer. Whether it was a boat or not,
I do not know; but as I descended from the hill, I could see no more of
it, so I gave it over; only I resolved to go no more out without a
prospective glass in my pocket.

When I was come down the hill to the end of the island, where, indeed, I
had never been before, I was presently convinced that the seeing the
print of a man's foot was not such a strange thing in the island as I
imagined. And, but that it was a special providence that I was cast upon
the side of the island where the savages never came, I should easily
have known that nothing was more frequent than for the canoes from the
main, when they happened to be a little too far out at sea, to shoot
over to that side of the island for harbour; likewise, as they often met
and fought in their canoes, the victors having taken any prisoners would
bring them over to this shore, where, according to their dreadful
customs, being all cannibals, they would kill and eat them; of which
hereafter.

When I was come down the hill to the shore, as I said above, being the
S.W. point of the island, I was perfectly confounded and amazed; nor is
it possible for me to express the horror of my mind at seeing the shore
spread with skulls, hands, feet, and other bones of human bodies; and
particularly, I observed a place where there had been a fire made, and a
circle dug in the earth, like a cockpit, where it is supposed the savage
wretches had sat down to their inhuman feastings upon the bodies of
their fellow-creatures.

I was so astonished with the sight of these things, that I entertained
no notion of any danger to myself from it for a long while. All my
apprehensions were buried in the thoughts of such a pitch of inhuman,
hellish brutality, and the horror of the degeneracy of human nature,
which, though I had heard of often, yet I never had so near a view of
before. In short, I turned away my face from the horrid spectacle. My
stomach grew sick, and I was just at the point of fainting, when Nature
discharged the disorder from my stomach. And having vomited with an
uncommon violence, I was a little relieved, but could not bear to stay
in the place a moment; so I got me up the hill again with all the speed
I could, and walked on towards my own habitation.

When I came a little out of that part of the island, I stood still a
while, as amazed; and then recovering myself, I looked up with the
utmost affection of my soul, and with a flood of tears in my eyes, gave
God thanks, that had cast my first lot in a part of the world where I
was distinguished from such dreadful creatures as these; and that,
though I had esteemed my present condition very miserable, had yet given
me so many comforts in it, that I had still more to give thanks for than
to complain of; and this above all, that I had, even in this miserable
condition, been comforted with the knowledge of Himself, and the hope of
His blessing; which was a felicity more than sufficiently equivalent to
all the misery which I had suffered, or could suffer.

In this frame of thankfulness I went home to my castle, and began to be
much easier now, as to the safety of my circumstances, than ever I was
before; for I observed that these wretches never came to this island in
search of what they could get; perhaps not seeking, not wanting, or not
expecting, anything here; and having often, no doubt, been up in the
covered, woody part of it, without finding anything to their purpose. I
knew I had been here now almost eighteen years, and never saw the least
footsteps of human creature there before; and I might be here eighteen
more as entirely concealed as I was now, if I did not discover myself to
them, which I had no manner of occasion to do; it being my only business
to keep myself entirely concealed where I was, unless I found a better
sort of creatures than cannibals to make myself known to.

Yet I entertained such an abhorrence of the savage wretches that I have
been speaking of, and of the wretched, inhuman custom of their devouring
and eating one another up, that I continued pensive and sad, and kept
close within my own circle for almost two years after this. When I say
my own circle, I mean by it my three plantations, viz., my castle, my
country seat, which I called my bower, and my enclosure in the woods.
Nor did I look after this for any other use than as an enclosure for my
goats; for the aversion which Nature gave me to these hellish wretches
was such, that I was fearful of seeing them as of seeing the devil
himself. Nor did I so much as go to look after my boat in all this time,
but began rather to think of making me another; for I could not think of
ever making any more attempts to bring the other boat round the island
to me, lest I should meet with some of these creatures at sea, in which,
if I had happened to have fallen into their hands, I knew what would
have been my lot.

Time, however, and the satisfaction I had that I was in no danger of
being discovered by these people, began to wear off my uneasiness about
them; and I began to live just in the same composed manner as before;
only with this difference, that I used more caution, and kept my eyes
more about me, than I did before, lest I should happen to be seen by any
of them; and particularly, I was more cautious of firing my gun, lest
any of them being on the island should happen to hear of it. And it was,
therefore, a very good providence to me that I had furnished myself with
a tame breed of goats, that I needed not hunt any more about the woods,
or shoot at them. And if I did catch any of them after this, it was by
traps and snares, as I had done before; so that for two years after this
I believe I never fired my gun once off, though I never went out without
it; and, which was more, as I had saved three pistols out of the ship, I
always carried them out with me, or at least two of them, sticking them
in my goat-skin belt. Also I furbished up one of the great cutlasses
that I had out of the ship, and made me a belt to put it on also; so
that I was now a most formidable fellow to look at when I went abroad,
if you add to the former description of myself the particular of two
pistols, and a great broadsword hanging at my side in a belt, but
without a scabbard.

Things going on thus, as I have said, for some time, I seemed, excepting
these cautions, to be reduced to my former calm, sedate way of living.
All these things tended to showing me, more and more, how far my
condition was from being miserable, compared to some others; nay, to
many other particulars of life, which it might have pleased God to have
made my lot. It put me upon reflecting how little repining there would
be among mankind at any condition of life, if people would rather
compare their condition with those that are worse, in order to be
thankful, than be always comparing them with those which are better, to
assist their murmurings and complainings.

As in my present condition there were not really many things which I
wanted, so indeed I thought that the frights I had been in about these
savage wretches, and the concern I had been in for my own preservation,
had taken off the edge of my invention for my own conveniences. And I
had dropped a good design, which I had once bent my thoughts too much
upon; and that was, to try if I could not make some of my barley into
malt, and then try to brew myself some beer. This was really a whimsical
thought, and I reproved myself often for the simplicity of it; for I
presently saw there would be the want of several things necessary to the
making my beer, that it would be impossible for me to supply. As, first,
casks to preserve it in, which was a thing that, as I have observed
already, I could never compass; no, though I spent not many days, but
weeks, nay, months, in attempting it, but to no purpose. In the next
place, I had no hops to make it keep, no yeast to make it work, no
copper or kettle to make it boil; and yet all these things
notwithstanding, I verily believe, had not these things intervened, I
mean the frights and terrors I was in about the savages, I had
undertaken it, and perhaps brought it to pass too; for I seldom gave
anything over without accomplishing it when I once had it in my head
enough to begin it.

[Illustration: "What odd, misshapen, ugly things I made." (See p. 143.)]

But my invention now ran quite another way; for, night and day, I could
think of nothing but how I might destroy some of these monsters in their
cruel, bloody entertainment, and, if possible, save the victim they
should bring hither to destroy. It would take up a larger volume than
this whole work is intended to be, to set down all the contrivances I
hatched, or rather brooded upon, in my thought, for the destroying these
creatures, or at least frighting them so as to prevent their coming
hither any more. But all was abortive; nothing could be possible to take
effect, unless I was to be there to do it myself. And what could one man
do among them, when perhaps there might be twenty or thirty of them
together, with their darts, or their bows and arrows, which they could
shoot as true to a mark as I could with my gun?

Sometimes I contrived to dig a hole under the place where they made
their fire, and put in five or six pound of gunpowder, which, when they
kindled their fire, would consequently take fire, and blow up all that
was near it. But as, in the first place, I should be very loth to waste
so much powder upon them, my store being now within the quantity of one
barrel, so neither could I be sure of its going off at any certain time,
when it might surprise them; and, at best, that it would do little more
than just blow the fire about their ears, and fright them, but not
sufficient to make them forsake the place. So I laid it aside, and then
proposed that I would place myself in ambush in some convenient place,
with my three guns all double-loaded, and, in the middle of their bloody
ceremony, let fly at them, when I should be sure to kill or wound
perhaps two or three at every shot; and then falling in upon them with
my three pistols and my sword, I made no doubt but that if there was
twenty I should kill them all. This fancy pleased my thoughts for some
weeks; and I was so full of it, that I often dreamed of it, and
sometimes that I was just going to let fly at them in my sleep.

I went so far with it in my imagination, that I employed myself several
days to find out proper places to put myself in ambuscade, as I said, to
watch for them; and I went frequently to the place itself, which was now
grown more familiar to me; and especially while my mind was thus filled
with thoughts of revenge, and of a bloody putting twenty or thirty of
them to the sword, as I may call it, the horror I had at the place, and
at the signals of the barbarous wretches devouring one another, abated
my malice.

Well, at length I found a place in the side of the hill, where I was
satisfied I might securely wait till I saw any of their boats coming;
and might then, even before they would be ready to come on shore, convey
myself, unseen, into thickets of trees, in one of which there was a
hollow large enough to conceal me entirely; and where I might sit and
observe all their bloody doings, and take my full aim at their heads,
when they were so close together, as that it would be next to impossible
that I should miss my shot, or that I could fail wounding three or four
of them at the first shot.

In this place, then, I resolved to fix my design; and, accordingly, I
prepared two muskets and my ordinary fowling-piece. The two muskets I
loaded with a brace of slugs each, and four or five smaller bullets,
about the size of pistol-bullets; and the fowling-piece I loaded with
near a handful of swan-shot, of the largest size. I also loaded my
pistols with about four bullets each; and in this posture, well provided
with ammunition for a second and third charge, I prepared myself for my
expedition.

After I had thus laid the scheme of my design, and in my imagination put
it in practice, I continually made my tour every morning up to the top
of the hill, which was from my castle, as I called it, about three
miles, or more, to see if I could observe any boats upon the sea coming
near the island, or standing over towards it. But I began to tire of
this hard duty, after I had, for two or three months, constantly kept my
watch, but came always back without any discovery; there having not, in
all that time, been the least appearance, not only on or near the shore,
but not on the whole ocean so far as my eyes or glasses could reach
every way.

As long as I kept up my daily tour to the hill to look out, so long also
I kept up the vigour of my design, and my spirits seemed to be all the
while in a suitable form for so outrageous an execution as the killing
twenty or thirty naked savages for an offence which I had not at all
entered into a discussion of in my thoughts, any farther than my
passions were at first fired by the horror I conceived at the unnatural
custom of that people of the country; who, it seems, had been suffered
by Providence, in His wise disposition of the world, to have no other
guide than that of their own abominable and vitiated passions; and
consequently were left, and perhaps had been so for some ages, to act
such horrid things, and receive such dreadful customs, as nothing but
nature entirely abandoned of Heaven, and acted by some hellish
degeneracy, could have run them into. But now when, as I have said, I
began to be weary of the fruitless excursion which I had made so long
and so far every morning in vain, so my opinion of the action itself
began to alter; and I began, with cooler and calmer thoughts, to
consider what it was I was going to engage in. What authority or call I
had to pretend to be judge and executioner upon these men as criminals,
whom Heaven had thought fit, for so many ages, to suffer, unpunished, to
go on, and to be, as it were, the executioners of His judgments one upon
another. How far these people were offenders against me, and what right
I had to engage in the quarrel of that blood which they shed
promiscuously one upon another. I debated this very often with myself,
thus: How do I know what God Himself judges in this particular case? It
is certain these people either do not commit this as a crime; it is not
against their own consciences' reproving, or their light reproaching
them. They do not know it to be an offence, and then commit it in
defiance of Divine justice, as we do in almost all the sins we commit.
They think it no more a crime to kill a captive taken in war, than we do
to kill an ox; nor to eat human flesh, than we do to eat mutton.

When I had considered this a little, it followed necessarily that I was
certainly in the wrong in it; that these people were not murderers in
the sense that I had before condemned them in my thoughts, any more than
those Christians were murderers who often put to death the prisoners
taken in battle; or more frequently, upon many occasions, put whole
troops of men to the sword, without giving quarter, though they threw
down their arms and submitted.

In the next place it occurred to me, that albeit the usage they thus
gave one another was thus brutish and inhuman, yet it was really nothing
to me; these people had done me no injury. That if they attempted me, or
I saw it necessary for my immediate preservation to fall upon them,
something might be said for it; but that as I was yet out of their
power, and they had really no knowledge of me, and consequently no
design upon me, and therefore it could not be just for me to fall upon
them. That this would justify the conduct of the Spaniards in all their
barbarities practised in America, and where they destroyed millions of
these people; who, however they were idolaters and barbarians, and had
several bloody and barbarous rites in their customs, such as sacrificing
human bodies to their idols, were yet, as to the Spaniards, very
innocent people; and that the rooting them out of the country is spoken
of with the utmost abhorrence and detestation by even the Spaniards
themselves at this time, and by all other Christian nations of Europe,
as a mere butchery, a bloody and unnatural piece of cruelty,
unjustifiable either to God or man; and such, as for which the very name
of a Spaniard is reckoned to be frightful and terrible to all people of
humanity, or of Christian compassion; as if the kingdom of Spain were
particularly eminent for the product of a race of men who were without
principles of tenderness, or the common bowels of pity to the miserable,
which is reckoned to be a mark of generous temper in the mind.

These considerations really put me to a pause, and to a kind of a full
stop; and I began, by little and little, to be off of my design, and to
conclude I had taken wrong measures in my resolutions to attack the
savages; that it was not my business to meddle with them, unless they
first attacked me; and this it was my business, if possible, to prevent;
but that if I were discovered and attacked, then I knew my duty.

On the other hand, I argued with myself that this really was the way not
to deliver myself, but entirely to ruin and destroy myself; for unless I
was sure to kill every one that not only should be on shore at that
time, but that should ever come on shore afterwards, if but one of them
escaped to tell their country people what had happened, they would come
over again by thousands to revenge the death of their fellows, and I
should only bring upon myself a certain destruction, which, at present,
I had no manner of occasion for.

Upon the whole, I concluded that neither in principles nor in policy I
ought, one way or other, to concern myself in this affair. That my
business was, by all possible means, to conceal myself from them, and
not to leave the least signal to them to guess by that there were any
living creatures upon the island; I mean of human shape.

Religion joined in with this prudential, and I was convinced now, many
ways, that I was perfectly out of my duty when I was laying all my
bloody schemes for the destruction of innocent creatures; I mean
innocent as to me. As to the crimes they were guilty of towards one
another, I had nothing to do with them. They were national, and I ought
to leave them to the justice of God, who is the Governor of nations, and
knows how, by national punishments, to make a just retribution for
national offences, and to bring public judgments upon those who offend
in a public manner by such ways as best pleases Him.

This appeared so clear to me now, that nothing was a greater
satisfaction to me than that I had not been suffered to do a thing which
I now saw so much reason to believe would have been no less a sin than
that of wilful murder, if I had committed it. And I gave most humble
thanks on my knees to God, that had thus delivered me from
blood-guiltiness; beseeching Him to grant me the protection of His
providence, that I might not fall into the hands of the barbarians, or
that I might not lay my hands upon them, unless I had a more clear call
from Heaven to do it, in defence of my own life.

In this disposition I continued for near a year after this; and so far
was I from desiring an occasion for falling upon these wretches, that in
all that time I never once went up the hill to see whether there were
any of them in sight, or to know whether any of them had been on shore
there or not, that I might not be tempted to renew any of my
contrivances against them, or be provoked, by any advantage which might
present itself, to fall upon them. Only this I did, I went and removed
my boat, which I had on the other side the island, and carried it down
to the east end of the whole island, where I ran it into a little cove,
which I found under some high rocks, and where I knew, by reason of the
currents, the savages durst not, at least would not come, with their
boats, upon any account whatsoever.

With my boat I carried away everything that I had left there belonging
to her, though not necessary for the bare going thither, viz., a mast
and sail which I had made for her, and a thing like an anchor, but
indeed which could not be called either anchor or grappling; however, it
was the best I could make of its kind. All these I removed, that there
might not be the least shadow of any discovery, or any appearance of any
boat, or of any human habitation, upon the island.

Besides this, I kept myself, as I said, more retired than ever, and
seldom went from my cell, other than upon my constant employment, viz.,
to milk my she-goats, and manage my little flock in the wood, which, as
it was quite on the other part of the island, was quite out of danger;
for certain it is, that these savage people, who sometimes haunted this
island, never came with any thoughts of finding anything here, and
consequently never wandered off from the coast; and I doubt not but they
might have been several times on shore after my apprehensions of them
had made me cautious, as well as before; and indeed, I looked back with
some horror upon the thoughts of what my condition would have been if I
had chopped upon them and been discovered before that, when, naked and
unarmed, except with one gun, and that loaded often only with small
shot, I walked everywhere, peeping and peeping about the island to see
what I could get. What a surprise should I have been in if, when I
discovered the print of a man's foot, I had, instead of that, seen
fifteen or twenty savages, and found them pursuing me, and by the
swiftness of their running, no possibility of my escaping them!

The thoughts of this sometimes sunk my very soul within me, and
distressed my mind so much, that I could not soon recover it, to think
what I should have done, and how I not only should not have been able to
resist them, but even should not have had presence of mind enough to do
what I might have done, much less what now, after so much consideration
and preparation, I might be able to do. Indeed, after serious thinking
of these things, I should be very melancholy, and sometimes it would
last a great while; but I resolved it, at last, all into thankfulness to
that Providence which had delivered me from so many unseen dangers, and
had kept me from those mischiefs which I could no way have been the
agent in delivering myself from, because I had not the least notion of
any such thing depending, or the least supposition of it being possible.

This renewed a contemplation which often had come to my thoughts in
former time, when first I began to see the merciful dispositions of
Heaven, in the dangers we run through in this life. How wonderfully we
are delivered when we know nothing of it. How, when we are in a
quandary, as we call it, a doubt or hesitation, whether to go this way,
or that way, a secret hint shall direct us this way, when we intended to
go that way; nay, when sense, our own inclination, and perhaps business,
has called to go the other way, yet a strange impression upon the mind,
from we know not what springs, and by we know not what power, shall
overrule us to go this way; and it shall afterwards appear, that had we
gone that way which we should have gone, and even to our imagination
ought to have gone, we should have been ruined and lost. Upon these and
many like reflections I afterwards made it a certain rule with me, that
whenever I found those secret hints or pressings of my mind to doing, or
not doing, anything that presented, or to going this way or that way, I
never failed to obey the secret dictate, though I knew no other reason
for it than that such a pressure, or such a hint, hung upon my mind. I
could give many examples of the success of this conduct in the course of
my life, but more especially in the latter part of my inhabiting this
unhappy island; besides many occasions which it is very likely I might
have taken notice of, if I had seen with the same eyes then that I saw
with now. But 'tis never too late to be wise; and I cannot but advise
all considering men, whose lives are attended with such extraordinary
incidents as mine, or even though not so extraordinary, not to slight
such secret intimations of Providence, let them come from what invisible
intelligence they will. That I shall not discuss, and perhaps cannot
account for; but certainly they are a proof of the converse of spirits,
and the secret communication between those embodied and those
unembodied, and such a proof as can never be withstood, of which I shall
have occasion to give some very remarkable instances in the remainder of
my solitary residence in this dismal place.

I believe the reader of this will not think strange if I confess that
these anxieties, these constant dangers I lived in, and the concern that
was now upon me, put an end to all invention, and to all the
contrivances that I had laid for my future accommodations and
conveniences. I had the care of my safety more now upon my hands than
that of my food. I cared not to drive a nail, or chop a stick of wood
now, for fear the noise I should make should be heard; much less would I
fire a gun, for the same reason; and, above all, I was intolerably
uneasy at making any fire, lest the smoke, which is visible at a great
distance in the day, should betray me; and for this reason I removed
that part of my business which required fire, such as burning of pots
and pipes, etc., into my new apartment in the woods; where, after I had
been some time, I found, to my unspeakable consolation, a mere natural
cave in the earth, which went in a vast way, and where, I dare say, no
savage, had he been at the mouth of it, would be so hardy as to venture
in; nor, indeed, would any man else, but one who, like me, wanted
nothing so much as a safe retreat.

The mouth of this hollow was at the bottom of a great rock, where, by
mere accident I would say (if I did not see abundant reason to ascribe
all such things now to Providence), I was cutting down some thick
branches of trees to make charcoal; and before I go on, I must observe
the reason of my making this charcoal, which was thus.

I was afraid of making a smoke about my habitation, as I said before;
and yet I could not live there without baking my bread, cooking my meat,
etc. So I contrived to burn some wood here, as I had seen done in
England under turf, till it became chark, or dry coal; and then putting
the fire out, I preserved the coal to carry home, and perform the other
services which fire was wanting for at home, without danger of smoke.

But this is by the bye. While I was cutting down some wood here, I
perceived that behind a very thick branch of low brushwood, or
underwood, there was a kind of hollow place. I was curious to look into
it; and getting with difficulty into the mouth of it, I found it was
pretty large; that is to say, sufficient for me to stand upright in it,
and perhaps another with me. But I must confess to you I made more haste
out than I did in when, looking farther into the place, and which was
perfectly dark, I saw two broad shining eyes of some creature, whether
devil or man I knew not, which twinkled like two stars, the dim light
from the cave's mouth shining directly in, and making the reflection.

However, after some pause I recovered myself, and began to call myself a
thousand fools, and tell myself that he that was afraid to see the devil
was not fit to live twenty years in an island all alone, and that I
durst to believe there was nothing in this cave that was more frightful
than myself. Upon this, plucking up my courage, I took up a great
firebrand, and in I rushed again, with the stick flaming in my hand. I
had not gone three steps in, but I was almost as much frighted as I was
before; for I heard a very loud sigh, like that of a man in some pain,
and it was followed by a broken noise, as if of words half expressed,
and then a deep sigh again. I stepped back, and was indeed struck with
such a surprise, that it put me into a cold sweat; and if I had had a
hat on my head, I will not answer for it, that my hair might not have
lifted it off. But still plucking up my spirits as well as I could, and
encouraging myself a little with considering that the power and presence
of God was everywhere, and was able to protect me, upon this I stepped
forward again, and by the light of the firebrand, holding it up a little
over my head, I saw lying on the ground a most monstrous, frightful, old
he-goat, just making his will, as we say, and gasping for life; and
dying, indeed, of mere old age.

I stirred him a little to see if I could get him out, and he essayed to
get up, but was not able to raise himself; and I thought with myself he
might even lie there; for if he had frighted me so, he would certainly
fright any of the savages, if any of them should be so hardy as to come
in there while he had any life in him.

I was now recovered from my surprise, and began to look around me, when
I found the cave was but very small; that is to say, it might be about
twelve feet over, but in no manner of shape, either round or square, no
hands having ever been employed in making it but those of mere Nature. I
observed also that there was a place at the farther side of it that went
in farther, but was so low, that it required me to creep upon my hands
and knees to go into it, and whither I went I knew not; so having no
candle, I gave it over for some time, but resolved to come again the
next day, provided with candles and a tinder-box, which I had made of
the lock of one of the muskets, with some wild-fire in the pan.

Accordingly, the next day I came provided with six large candles of my
own making, for I made very good candles now of goat's tallow; and going
into this low place, I was obliged to creep upon all fours, as I have
said, almost ten yards; which, by the way, I thought was a venture bold
enough, considering that I knew not how far it might go, nor what was
beyond it. When I was got through the strait, I found the roof rose
higher up, I believe near twenty feet. But never was such a glorious
sight seen in the island, I dare say, as it was, to look round the sides
and roof of this vault or cave; the walls reflected a hundred thousand
lights to me from my two candles. What it was in the rock, whether
diamonds, or any other precious stones, or gold, which I rather supposed
it to be, I knew not.

The place I was in was a most delightful cavity or grotto of its kind,
as could be expected, though perfectly dark. The floor was dry and
level, and had a sort of small loose gravel upon it, so that there was
no nauseous or venomous creature to be seen; neither was there any damp
or wet on the sides or roof. The only difficulty in it was the entrance,
which, however, as it was a place of security, and such a retreat as I
wanted, I thought that was a convenience; so that I was really rejoiced
at the discovery, and resolved, without any delay, to bring some of
those things which I was most anxious about to this place; particularly,
I resolved to bring hither my magazine of powder, and all my spare arms,
viz., two fowling-pieces, for I had three in all, and three muskets, for
of them I had eight in all. So I kept at my castle only five, which
stood ready-mounted, like pieces of cannon, on my outmost fence; and
were ready also to take out upon any expedition.

Upon this occasion of removing my ammunition, I took occasion to open
the barrel of powder, which I took up out of the sea, and which had been
wet; and I found that the water had penetrated about three or four
inches into the powder on every side, which caking, and growing hard,
had preserved the inside like a kernel in a shell; so that I had near
sixty pounds of very good powder in the centre of the cask. And this was
an agreeable discovery to me at that time; so I carried all away
thither, never keeping above two or three pounds of powder with me in my
castle, for fear of a surprise of any kind. I also carried thither all
the lead I had left for bullets.

I fancied myself now like one of the ancient giants, which were said to
live in caves and holes in the rocks, where none could come at them; for
I persuaded myself, while I was here, if five hundred savages were to
hunt me, they could never find me out; or, if they did, they would not
venture to attack me here.

The old goat, whom I found expiring, died in the mouth of the cave the
next day after I made this discovery; and I found it much easier to dig
a great hole there, and throw him in and cover him with earth, than to
drag him out; so I interred him there, to prevent the offence to my
nose.

I was now in my twenty-third year of residence in this island; and was
so naturalised to the place, and to the manner of living, that could I
have but enjoyed the certainty that no savages would come to the place
to disturb me, I could have been content to have capitulated for
spending the rest of my time there, even to the last moment, till I laid
me down and died, like the old goat in the cave. I had also arrived to
some little diversions and amusements, which made the time pass more
pleasantly with me a great deal than it did before. As, first, I had
taught my Poll, as I noted before, to speak; and he did it so
familiarly, and talked so articulately and plain, that it was very
pleasant to me; and he lived with me no less than six and twenty years.
How long he might live afterwards I know not, though I know they have a
notion in the Brazils that they live a hundred years. Perhaps poor Poll
may be alive there still, calling after poor Robin Crusoe to this day. I
wish no Englishman the ill luck to come there and hear him; but if he
did, he would certainly believe it was the devil. My dog was a very
pleasant and loving companion to me for no less than sixteen years of my
time, and then died of mere old age. As for my cats, they multiplied, as
I have observed, to that degree, that I was obliged to shoot several of
them at first to keep them from devouring me and all I had; but at
length, when the two old ones I brought with me were gone, and after
some time continually driving them from me, and letting them have no
provision with me, they all ran wild into the woods, except two or
three favourites, which I kept tame, and whose young, when they had any,
I always drowned; and these were part of my family. Besides these, I
always kept two or three household kids about me, whom I taught to feed
out of my hand. And I had two more parrots, which talked pretty well,
and would all call "Robin Crusoe," but none like my first; nor, indeed,
did I take the pains with any of them that I had done with him. I had
also several tame sea-fowls, whose names I know not, whom I caught upon
the shore, and cut their wings; and the little stakes which I had
planted before my castle wall being now grown up to a good thick grove,
these fowls all lived among these low trees, and bred there, which was
very agreeable to me; so that, as I said above, I began to be very well
contented with the life I led, if it might but have been secured from
the dread of the savages.

But it was otherwise directed; and it may not be amiss for all people
who shall meet with my story, to make this just observation from it,
viz., how frequently, in the course of our lives, the evil which in
itself we seek most to shun, and which, when we are fallen into it, is
the most dreadful to us, is oftentimes the very means or door of our
deliverance, by which alone we can be raised again from the affliction
we are fallen into. I could give many examples of this in the course of
my unaccountable life; but in nothing was it more particularly
remarkable, than in the circumstances of my last years of solitary
residence in this island.

It was now the month of December, as I said above, in my twenty-third
year; and this, being the southern solstice (for winter I cannot call
it), was the particular time of my harvest, and required my being pretty
much abroad in the fields; when, going out pretty early in the morning,
even before it was thorough daylight, I was surprised with seeing a
light of some fire upon the shore, at a distance from me of about two
miles, towards the end of the island, where I had observed some savages
had been, as before. But not on the other side; but, to my great
affliction, it was on my side of the island.

I was indeed terribly surprised at the sight, and stopped short within
my grove, not daring to go out, lest I might be surprised; and yet I had
no more peace within, from the apprehensions I had that if these
savages, in rambling over the island, should find my corn standing or
cut, or any of my works and improvements, they would immediately
conclude that there were people in the place, and would then never give
over till they had found me out. In this extremity I went back directly
to my castle, pulled up the ladder after me, and made all things without
look as wild and natural as I could.

Then I prepared myself within, putting myself in a posture of defence. I
loaded all my cannon, as I called them, that is to say, my muskets,
which were mounted upon my new fortification, and all my pistols, and
resolved to defend myself to the last gasp; not forgetting seriously to
commend myself to the Divine protection, and earnestly to pray to God to
deliver me out of the hands of the barbarians. And in this posture I
continued about two hours; but began to be mighty impatient for
intelligence abroad, for I had no spies to send out.

After sitting a while longer, and musing what I should do in this case,
I was not able to bear sitting in ignorance any longer; so setting up my
ladder to the side of the hill where there was a flat place, as I
observed before, and then pulling the ladder up after me, I set it up
again, and mounted to the top of the hill; and pulling out my
perspective-glass, which I had taken on purpose, I laid me down flat
on my belly on the ground, and began to look for the place. I presently
found there was no less than nine naked savages sitting round a small
fire they had made, not to warm them, for they had no need of that, the
weather being extreme hot, but, as I supposed, to dress some of their
barbarous diet of human flesh which they had brought with them, whether
alive or dead, I could not know.

[Illustration: "In this government of my temper I remained near a year,
living a very sedate, retired life." (See p. 169.)]

They had two canoes with them, which they had hauled up upon the shore;
and as it was then tide of ebb, they seemed to me to wait for the return
of the flood to go away again. It is not easy to imagine what confusion
this sight put me into, especially seeing them come on my side the
island, and so near me too. But when I observed their coming must be
always with the current of the ebb, I began afterwards to be more sedate
in my mind, being satisfied that I might go abroad with safety all the
time of the tide of flood, if they were not on shore before; and having
made this observation, I went abroad about my harvest-work with the more
composure.

As I expected, so it proved; for as soon as the tide made to the
westward, I saw them all take boat, and row (or paddle, as we call it)
all away. I should have observed, that for an hour and more before they
went off, they went to dancing; and I could easily discern their
postures and gestures by my glasses. I could not perceive, by my nicest
observation, but that they were stark naked, and had not the least
covering upon them; but whether they were men or women, that I could not
distinguish.

As soon as I saw them shipped and gone, I took two guns upon my
shoulders, and two pistols at my girdle, and my great sword by my side,
without a scabbard, and with all the speed I was able to make I went
away to the hill where I had discovered the first appearance of all.
And as soon as I got thither, which was not less than two hours (for I
could not go apace, being so loaden with arms as I was), I perceived
there had been three canoes more of savages on that place; and looking
out farther, I saw they were all at sea together, making over for the
main.

This was a dreadful sight to me, especially when, going down to the
shore, I could see the marks of horror which the dismal work they had
been about had left behind it, viz., the blood, the bones, and part of
the flesh of human bodies, eaten and devoured by those wretches with
merriment and sport. I was so filled with indignation at the sight, that
I began now to premeditate the destruction of the next that I saw there,
let them be who or how many soever.

It seemed evident to me that the visits which they thus made to this
island are not very frequent, for it was above fifteen months before any
more of them came on shore there again; that is to say, I neither saw
them, or any footsteps or signals of them, in all that time; for, as to
the rainy seasons, then they are sure not to come abroad, at least not
so far. Yet all this while I lived uncomfortably, by reason of the
constant apprehensions I was in of their coming upon me by surprise;
from whence I observe, that the expectation of evil is more bitter than
the suffering, especially if there is no room to shake off that
expectation, or those apprehensions.

During all this time I was in a murdering humour, and took up most of my
hours, which should have been better employed, in contriving how to
circumvent and fall upon them the very next time I should see them;
especially if they should be divided, as they were the last time, into
two parties. Nor did I consider at all that if I killed one party,
suppose ten or a dozen, I was still the next day, or week, or month, to
kill another, and so another, even _ad infinitum_, till I should be at
length no less a murderer than they were in being man-eaters, and
perhaps much more so.

I spent my days now in great perplexity and anxiety of mind, expecting
that I should, one day or other, fall into the hands of these merciless
creatures; and if I did at any time venture abroad, it was not without
looking round me with the greatest care and caution imaginable. And now
I found, to my great comfort, how happy it was that I provided for a
tame flock or herd of goats; for I durst not, upon any account, fire my
gun, especially near that side of the island where they usually came,
lest I should alarm the savages. And if they had fled from me now, I was
sure to have them come back again, with perhaps two or three hundred
canoes with them, in a few days, and then I knew what to expect.

However, I wore out a year and three months more before I ever saw any
more of the savages, and then I found them again, as I shall soon
observe. It is true they might have been there once or twice, but either
they made no stay, or at least I did not hear them; but in the month of
May, as near as I could calculate, and in my four and twentieth year, I
had a very strange encounter with them; of which in its place.

The perturbation of my mind, during this fifteen or sixteen months'
interval, was very great. I slept unquiet, dreamed always frightful
dreams, and often started out of my sleep in the night. In the day great
troubles overwhelmed my mind, and in the night I dreamed often of
killing the savages, and of the reasons why I might justify the doing of
it. But, to waive all this for a while, it was in the middle of May, on
the sixteenth day, I think, as well as my poor wooden calendar would
reckon, for I marked all upon the post still: I say, it was the
sixteenth of May that it blew a very great storm of wind all day, with
a great deal of lightning and thunder, and a very foul night it was
after it. I know not what was the particular occasion of it, but as I
was reading in the Bible, and taken up with very serious thoughts about
my present condition, I was surprised with a noise of a gun, as I
thought, fired at sea.

This was, to be sure, a surprise of a quite different nature from any I
had met with before; for the notions this put into my thoughts were
quite of another kind. I started up in the greatest haste imaginable,
and, in a trice, clapped my ladder to the middle place of the rock, and
pulled it after me; and mounting it the second time, got to the top of
the hill the very moment that a flash of fire bid me listen for a second
gun, which accordingly, in about half a minute, I heard; and, by the
sound, knew that it was from that part of the sea where I was driven
down the current in my boat.

I immediately considered that this must be some ship in distress, and
that they had some comrade, or some other ship in company, and fired
these guns for signals of distress, and to obtain help. I had this
presence of mind, at that minute, as to think that though I could not
help them, it may be they might help me; so I brought together all the
dry wood I could get at hand, and, making a good handsome pile, I set it
on fire upon the hill. The wood was dry, and blazed freely; and though
the wind blew very hard, yet it burnt fairly out; so that I was certain,
if there was any such thing as a ship, they must needs see it, and no
doubt they did; for as soon as ever my fire blazed up I heard another
gun, and after that several others, all from the same quarter. I plied
my fire all night long till day broke; and when it was broad day, and
the air cleared up, I saw something at a great distance at sea, full
east of the island, whether a sail or a hull I could not distinguish,
no, not with my glasses, the distance was so great, and the weather
still something hazy also; at least it was so out at sea.

I looked frequently at it all that day, and soon perceived that it did
not move; so I presently concluded that it was a ship at an anchor. And
being eager, you may be sure, to be satisfied, I took my gun in my hand
and ran toward the south side of the island, to the rocks where I had
formerly been carried away with the current; and getting up there, the
weather by this time being perfectly clear, I could plainly see, to my
great sorrow, the wreck of a ship, cast away in the night upon those
concealed rocks which I found when I was out in my boat; and which
rocks, as they checked the violence of the stream, and made a kind of
counter-stream or eddy, were the occasion of my recovering from the most
desperate, hopeless condition that ever I had been in in all my life.

Thus, what is one man's safety is another man's destruction; for it
seems these men, whoever they were, being out of their knowledge, and
the rocks being wholly under water, had been driven upon them in the
night, the wind blowing hard at E. and E.N.E. Had they seen the island,
as I must necessarily suppose they did not, they must, as I thought,
have endeavoured to have saved themselves on shore by the help of their
boat; but their firing of guns for help, especially when they saw, as I
imagined, my fire, filled me with many thoughts. First, I imagined that
upon seeing my light, they might have put themselves into their boat,
and have endeavoured to make the shore; but that the sea going very
high, they might have been cast away. Other times I imagined that they
might have lost their boat before, as might be the case many ways; as,
particularly, by the breaking of the sea upon their ship, which many
times obliges men to stave, or take in pieces their boat, and sometimes
to throw it overboard with their own hands. Other times I imagined they
had some other ship or ships in company, who, upon the signals of
distress they had made, had taken them up and carried them off. Other
whiles I fancied they were all gone off to sea in their boat, and being
hurried away by the current that I had been formerly in, were carried
out into the great ocean, where there was nothing but misery and
perishing; and that, perhaps, they might by this time think of starving,
and of being in a condition to eat one another.

As all these were but conjectures at best, so, in the condition I was
in, I could do no more than look on upon the misery of the poor men, and
pity them; which had still this good effect on my side, that it gave me
more and more cause to give thanks to God, who had so happily and
comfortably provided for me in my desolate condition; and that of two
ships' companies who were now cast away upon this part of the world, not
one life should be spared but mine. I learned here again to observe,
that it is very rare that the providence of God casts us into any
condition of life so low, or any misery so great, but we may see
something or other to be thankful for, and may see others in worse
circumstances than our own.

Such certainly was the case of these men, of whom I could not so much as
see room to suppose any of them were saved. Nothing could make it
rational so much as to wish or expect that they did not all perish
there, except the possibility only of their being taken up by another
ship in company; and this was but mere possibility indeed, for I saw not
the least signal or appearance of any such thing.

I cannot explain, by any possible energy of words, what a strange
longing or hankering of desires I felt in my soul upon this sight,
breaking out sometimes thus: "Oh that there had been but one or two,
nay, or but one soul, saved out of this ship, to have escaped to me,
that I might but have had one companion, one fellow-creature, to have
spoken to me, and to have conversed with!" In all the time of my
solitary life, I never felt so earnest, so strong a desire after the
society of my fellow-creatures, or so deep a regret at the want of it.

There are some secret moving springs in the affections which, when they
are set agoing by some object in view, or be it some object, though not
in view, yet rendered present to the mind by the power of imagination,
that motion carries out the soul by its impetuosity to such violent,
eager embracings of the object, that the absence of it is insupportable.

Such were these earnest wishings that but one man had been saved! "Oh
that it had been but one!" I believe I repeated the words, "Oh that it
had been one!" a thousand times; and the desires were so moved by it,
that when I spoke the words my hands would clinch together, and my
fingers press the palms of my hands, that if I had had any soft thing in
my hand, it would have crushed it involuntarily; and my teeth in my head
would strike together, and set against one another so strong, that for
some time I could not part them again.

Let the naturalists explain these things, and the reason and manner of
them. All I can say to them is to describe the fact, which was even
surprising to me when I found it, though I knew not from what it should
proceed. It was doubtless the effect of ardent wishes, and of strong
ideas formed in my mind, realising the comfort which the conversation of
one of my fellow-Christians would have been to me.

But it was not to be. Either their fate or mine, or both, forbid it;
for, till the last year of my being on this island, I never knew
whether any were saved out of that ship or no; and had only the
affliction, some days after, to see the corpse of a drowned boy come on
shore at the end of the island which was next the shipwreck. He had on
no clothes but a seaman's waistcoat, a pair of open-kneed linen drawers,
and a blue linen shirt; but nothing to direct me so much as to guess
what nation he was of. He had nothing in his pocket but two pieces of
eight and a tobacco-pipe. The last was to me of ten times more value
than the first.

It was now calm, and I had a great mind to venture out in my boat to
this wreck, not doubting but I might find something on board that might
be useful to me. But that did not altogether press me so much as the
possibility that there might be yet some living creature on board, whose
life I might not only save, but might, by saving that life, comfort my
own to the last degree. And this thought clung so to my heart, that I
could not be quiet night nor day, but I must venture out in my boat on
board this wreck; and committing the rest to God's providence, I
thought, the impression was so strong upon my mind that it could not be
resisted, that it must come from some invisible direction, and that I
should be wanting to myself if I did not go.

Under the power of this impression, I hastened back to my castle,
prepared everything for my voyage, took a quantity of bread, a great pot
for fresh water, a compass to steer by, a bottle of rum (for I had still
a great deal of that left), a basket full of raisins. And thus, loading
myself with everything necessary, I went down to my boat, got the water
out of her, and got her afloat, loaded all my cargo in her, and then
went home again for more. My second cargo was a great bag full of rice,
the umbrella to set up over my head for shade, another large pot full
of fresh water, and about two dozen of my small loaves, or
barley-cakes, more than before, with a bottle of goat's milk and a
cheese; all which, with great labour and sweat, I brought to my boat.
And praying to God to direct my voyage, I put out; and rowing, or
paddling, the canoe along the shore, I came at last to the utmost point
of the island on that side, viz., N.E. And now I was to launch out into
the ocean, and either to venture or not to venture. I looked on the
rapid currents which ran constantly on both sides of the island at a
distance, and which were very terrible to me, from the remembrance of
the hazard I had been in before, and my heart began to fail me; for I
foresaw that if I was driven into either of those currents, I should be
carried a vast way out to sea, and perhaps out of my reach, or sight of
the island again; and that then, as my boat was but small, if any little
gale of wind should rise, I should be inevitably lost.

These thoughts so oppressed my mind, that I began to give over my
enterprise; and having hauled my boat into a little creek on the shore,
I stepped out, and sate me down upon a little rising bit of ground, very
pensive and anxious, between fear and desire, about my voyage; when, as
I was musing, I could perceive that the tide was turned, and the flood
come on; upon which my going was for so many hours impracticable. Upon
this, presently it occurred to me that I should go up to the highest
piece of ground I could find and observe, if I could, how the sets of
the tide, or currents, lay when the flood came in, that I might judge
whether, if I was driven one way out, I might not expect to be driven
another way home, with the same rapidness of the currents. This thought
was no sooner in my head but I cast my eye upon a little hill, which
sufficiently overlooked the sea both ways, and from whence I had a clear
view of the currents, or sets of the tide, and which way I was to guide
myself in my return. Here I found, that as the current of the ebb set
out close by the south point of the island, so the current of the flood
set in close by the shore of the north side; and that I had nothing to
do but to keep to the north of the island in my return, and I should do
well enough.

Encouraged with this observation, I resolved the next morning to set out
with the first of the tide, and reposing myself for the night in the
canoe, under the great watch-coat I mentioned, I launched out. I made
first a little out to sea, full north, till I began to feel the benefit
of the current which set eastward, and which carried me at a great rate;
and yet did not so hurry me as the southern side current had done
before, and so as to take from me all government of the boat; but having
a strong steerage with my paddle, I went at a great rate directly for
the wreck, and in less than two hours I came up to it.

It was a dismal sight to look at. The ship, which, by its building, was
Spanish, stuck fast, jammed in between two rocks. All the stern and
quarter of her was beaten to pieces with the sea; and as her forecastle,
which stuck in the rocks, had run on with great violence, her main-mast
and fore-mast were brought by the board; that is to say, broken short
off; but her bowsprit was sound, and the head and bow appeared firm.
When I came close to her a dog appeared upon her, who, seeing me coming,
yelped and cried; and as soon as I called him, jumped into the sea to
come to me, and I took him into the boat, but found him almost dead for
hunger and thirst. I gave him a cake of my bread, and he eat it like a
ravenous wolf that had been starving a fortnight in the snow. I then
gave the poor creature some fresh water, with which, if I would have let
him, he would have burst himself.

After this I went on board; but the first sight I met with was two men
drowned in the cook-room, or forecastle of the ship, with their arms
fast about one another. I concluded, as is indeed probable, that when
the ship struck, it being in a storm, the sea broke so high, and so
continually over her, that the men were not able to bear it, and were
strangled with the constant rushing in of the water, as much as if they
had been under water. Besides the dog, there was nothing left in the
ship that had life; nor any goods that I could see, but what were
spoiled by the water. There were some casks of liquor, whether wine or
brandy I knew not, which lay lower in the hold, and which, the water
being ebbed out, I could see; but they were too big to meddle with. I
saw several chests, which I believed belonged to some of the seamen; and
I got two of them into the boat, without examining what was in them.

Had the stern of the ship been fixed, and the forepart broken off, I am
persuaded I might have made a good voyage; for by what I found in these
two chests, I had room to suppose the ship had a great deal of wealth on
board; and if I may guess by the course she steered, she must have been
bound from the Buenos Ayres, or the Rio de la Plata, in the south part
of America, beyond the Brazils, to the Havana, in the Gulf of Mexico,
and so perhaps to Spain. She had, no doubt, a great treasure in her, but
of no use, at that time, to anybody; and what became of the rest of her
people, I then knew not.

I found, besides these chests, a little cask full of liquor, of about
twenty gallons, which I got into my boat with much difficulty. There
were several muskets in a cabin, and a great powder-horn, with about
four pounds of powder in it. As for the muskets, I had no occasion for
them, so I left them, but took the powder-horn. I took a fire-shovel and
tongs, which I wanted extremely; as also two little brass kettles, a
copper pot to make chocolate, and a gridiron. And with this cargo, and
the dog, I came away, the tide beginning to make home again; and the
same evening, about an hour within night, I reached the island again,
weary and fatigued to the last degree.

I reposed that night in the boat; and in the morning I resolved to
harbour what I had gotten in my new cave, not to carry it home to my
castle. After refreshing myself, I got all my cargo on shore, and began
to examine the particulars. The cask of liquor I found to be a kind of
rum, but not such as we had at the Brazils, and, in a word, not at all
good. But when I came to open the chests, I found several things of
great use to me. For example, I found in one a fine case of bottles, of
an extraordinary kind, and filled with cordial waters, fine, and very
good; the bottles held about three pints each, and were tipped with
silver. I found two pots of very good succades, or sweetmeats, so
fastened also on top, that the salt water had not hurt them; and two
more of the same, which the water had spoiled. I found some very good
shirts, which were very welcome to me; and about a dozen and half of
linen white handkerchiefs and coloured neckcloths. The former were also
very welcome, being exceeding refreshing to wipe my face in a hot day.
Besides this, when I came to the till in the chest, I found there three
great bags of pieces of eight, which held out about eleven hundred
pieces in all; and in one of them, wrapped up in a paper, six doubloons
of gold, and some small bars or wedges of gold. I suppose they might all
weigh near a pound.

[Illustration: "I stood like one thunderstruck." (See p. 181.)]

The other chest I found had some clothes in it, but of little value; but
by the circumstances, it must have belonged to the gunner's mate; though
there was no powder in it, but about two pounds of fine glazed powder,
in three small flasks, kept, I suppose, for charging their
fowling-pieces on occasion. Upon the whole, I got very little by this
voyage that was of any use to me; for as to the money, I had no manner
of occasion for it; 'twas to me as the dirt under my feet; and I would
have given it all for three or four pair of English shoes and stockings,
which were things I greatly wanted, but had not had on my feet now for
many years. I had indeed gotten two pair of shoes now, which I took off
of the feet of the two drowned men whom I saw in the wreck, and I found
two pair more in one of the chests, which were very welcome to me; but
they were not like our English shoes, either for ease or service, being
rather what we call pumps than shoes. I found in this seaman's chest
about fifty pieces of eight in royals, but no gold. I suppose this
belonged to a poorer man than the other, which seemed to belong to some
officer.

Well, however, I lugged this money home to my cave, and laid it up, as I
had done that before which I brought from our own ship; but it was great
pity, as I said, that the other part of this ship had not come to my
share, for I am satisfied I might have loaded my canoe several times
over with money, which, if I had ever escaped to England, would have
lain here safe enough till I might have come again and fetched it.

Having now brought all my things on shore, and secured them, I went back
to my boat, and rowed or paddled her along the shore to her old harbour,
where I laid her up, and made the best of my way to my old habitation,
where I found everything safe and quiet. So I began to repose myself,
live after my old fashion, and take care of my family affairs; and, for
a while, I lived easy enough, only that I was more vigilant than I used
to be, looked out oftener, and did not go abroad so much; and if at any
time I did stir with any freedom, it was always to the east part of the
island, where I was pretty well satisfied the savages never came, and
where I could go without so many precautions, and such a load of arms
and ammunition as I always carried with me if I went the other way.

I lived in this condition near two years more; but my unlucky head, that
was always to let me know it was born to make my body miserable, was all
this two years filled with projects and designs, how, if it were
possible, I might get away from this island; for sometimes I was for
making another voyage to the wreck, though my reason told me that there
was nothing left there worth the hazard of my voyage; sometimes for a
ramble one way, sometimes another; and I believe verily, if I had had
the boat that I went from Sallee in, I should have ventured to sea,
bound anywhere, I knew not whither.

I have been, in all my circumstances, a memento to those who are touched
with the general plague of mankind, whence, for aught I know, one-half
of their miseries flow; I mean, that of not being satisfied with the
station wherein God and Nature has placed them; for not to look back
upon my primitive condition, and the excellent advice of my father, the
opposition to which was, as I may call it, my _original sin_, my
subsequent mistakes of the same kind had been the means of my coming
into this miserable condition; for had that Providence, which so happily
had seated me at the Brazils as a planter, blessed me with confined
desires, and I could have been contented to have gone on gradually, I
might have been, by this time, I mean in the time of my being in this
island, one of the most considerable planters in the Brazils; nay, I am
persuaded that by the improvements I had made in that little time I
lived there, and the increase I should probably have made if I had
stayed, I might have been worth an hundred thousand moidores. And what
business had I to leave a settled fortune, a well-stocked plantation,
improving and increasing, to turn super-cargo to Guinea to fetch
negroes, when patience and time would have so increased our stock at
home, that we could have bought them at our own door from those whose
business it was to fetch them; and though it had cost us something more,
yet the difference of that price was by no means worth saving at so
great a hazard.

But as this is ordinarily the fate of young heads, so reflection upon
the folly of it is as ordinarily the exercise of more years, or of the
dear-bought experience of time; and so it was with me now. And yet, so
deep had the mistake taken root in my temper, that I could not satisfy
myself in my station, but was continually poring upon the means and
possibility of my escape from this place. And that I may, with the
greater pleasure to the reader, bring on the remaining part of my story,
it may not be improper to give some account of my first conceptions on
the subject of this foolish scheme for my escape, and how, and upon what
foundation, I acted.

I am now to be supposed retired into my castle, after my late voyage to
the wreck, my frigate laid up and secured under water, as usual, and my
condition restored to what it was before. I had more wealth, indeed,
than I had before, but was not at all the richer; for I had no more use
for it than the Indians of Peru had before the Spaniards came there.

It was one of the nights in the rainy season in March, the four and
twentieth year of my first setting foot in this island of solitariness.
I was lying in my bed, or hammock, awake, very well in health, had no
pain, no distemper, no uneasiness of body, no, nor any uneasiness of
mind, more than ordinary, but could by no means close my eyes, that is,
so as to sleep; no, not a wink all night long, otherwise than as
follows.

It is as impossible, as needless, to set down the innumerable crowd of
thoughts that whirled through that great thoroughfare of the brain, the
memory, in this night's time. I ran over the whole history of my life in
miniature, or by abridgment, as I may call it, to my coming to this
island, and also of the part of my life since I came to this island. In
my reflections upon the state of my case since I came on shore on this
island, I was comparing the happy posture of my affairs in the first
years of my habitation here compared to the life of anxiety, fear, and
care which I had lived ever since I had seen the print of a foot in the
sand; not that I did not believe the savages had frequented the island
even all the while, and might have been several hundreds of them at
times on shore there; but I had never known it, and was incapable of any
apprehensions about it. My satisfaction was perfect, though my danger
was the same; and I was as happy in not knowing my danger, as if I had
never really been exposed to it. This furnished my thoughts with many
very profitable reflections, and particularly this one: how infinitely
good that Providence is which has provided, in its government of
mankind, such narrow bounds to his sight and knowledge of things; and
though he walks in the midst of so many thousand dangers, the sight of
which, if discovered to him, would distract his mind and sink his
spirits, he is kept serene and calm, by having the events of things hid
from his eyes, and knowing nothing of the dangers which surround him.

After these thoughts had for some time entertained me, I came to reflect
seriously upon the real danger I had been in for so many years in this
very island, and how I had walked about in the greatest security, and
with all possible tranquillity, even when perhaps nothing but a brow of
a hill, a great tree, or the casual approach of night had been between
me and the worst kind of destruction, viz., that of falling into the
hands of cannibals and savages, who would have seized on me with the
same view as I did of a goat or a turtle, and have thought it no more a
crime to kill and devour me, than I did of a pigeon or a curlew. I would
unjustly slander myself if I should say I was not sincerely thankful to
my great Preserver, to whose singular protection I acknowledged, with
great humility, that all these unknown deliverances were due, and
without which I must inevitably have fallen into their merciless hands.

When these thoughts were over, my head was for some time taken up in
considering the nature of these wretched creatures, I mean the savages,
and how it came to pass in the world that the wise Governor of all
things should give up any of His creatures to such inhumanity; nay, to
something so much below even brutality itself, as to devour its own
kind. But as this ended in some (at that time fruitless) speculations,
it occurred to me to inquire what part of the world these wretches lived
in? how far off the coast was from whence they came? what they ventured
over so far from home for? what kind of boats they had? and why I might
not order myself and my business so, that I might be as able to go over
thither, as they were to come to me.

I never so much as troubled myself to consider what I should do with
myself when I came thither; what would become of me, if I fell into the
hands of the savages; or how I should escape from them, if they
attempted me; no, nor so much as how it was possible for me to reach the
coast, and not be attempted by some or other of them, without any
possibility of delivering myself; and if I should not fall into their
hands, what I should do for provision; or whither I should bend my
course. None of these thoughts, I say, so much as came in my way; but my
mind was wholly bent upon the notion of my passing over in my boat to
the mainland. I looked back upon my present condition as the most
miserable that could possibly be; that I was not able to throw myself
into anything, but death, that could be called worse; that if I reached
the shore of the main, I might perhaps meet with relief, or I might
coast along, as I did on the shore of Africa, till I came to some
inhabited country, and where I might find some relief; and after all,
perhaps I might fall in with some Christian ship that might take me in;
and if the worse came to the worst, I could but die, which would put an
end to all these miseries at once. Pray, note, all this was the fruit of
a disturbed mind, an impatient temper, made as it were desperate by the
long continuance of my troubles, and the disappointments I had met in
the wreck I had been on board of, and where I had been so near the
obtaining what I so earnestly longed for, viz., somebody to speak to,
and to learn some knowledge from of the place where I was, and of the
probable means of my deliverance. I say, I was agitated wholly by these
thoughts. All my calm of mind, in my resignation to Providence, and
waiting the issue of the dispositions of Heaven, seemed to be suspended;
and I had, as it were, no power to turn my thoughts to anything but to
the project of a voyage to the main, which came upon me with such force,
and such an impetuosity of desire, that it was not to be resisted.

When this had agitated my thoughts for two hours, or more, with such
violence that it set my very blood into a ferment, and my pulse beat as
high as if I had been in a fever, merely with the extraordinary fervour
of my mind about it, Nature, as if I had been fatigued and exhausted
with the very thought of it, threw me into a sound sleep. One would have
thought I should have dreamed of it, but I did not, nor of anything
relating to it; but I dreamed that as I was going out in the morning, as
usual, from my castle, I saw upon the shore two canoes and eleven
savages coming to land, and that they brought with them another savage,
whom they were going to kill in order to eat him; when, on a sudden, the
savage that they were going to kill jumped away, and ran for his life.
And I thought, in my sleep, that he came running into my little thick
grove before my fortification to hide himself; and that I, seeing him
alone, and not perceiving that the other sought him that way, showed
myself to him, and smiling upon him, encouraged him; that he kneeled
down to me, seeming to pray me to assist him; upon which I showed my
ladder, made him go up, and carried him into my cave, and he became my
servant; and that as soon as I had gotten this man, I said to myself,
"Now I may certainly venture to the mainland; for this fellow will serve
me as a pilot, and will tell me what to do, and whither to go for
provisions, and whither not to go for fear of being devoured; what
places to venture into, and what to escape." I waked with this thought,
and was under such inexpressible impressions of joy at the prospect of
my escape in my dream, that the disappointments which I felt upon coming
to myself and finding it was no more than a dream were equally
extravagant the other way, and threw me into a very great dejection of
spirit.

Upon this, however, I made this conclusion; that my only way to go about
an attempt for an escape was, if possible, to get a savage into my
possession; and, if possible, it should be one of their prisoners whom
they had condemned to be eaten, and should bring thither to kill. But
these thoughts still were attended with this difficulty, that it was
impossible to effect this without attacking a whole caravan of them, and
killing them all; and this was not only a very desperate attempt, and
might miscarry, but, on the other hand, I had greatly scrupled the
lawfulness of it to me; and my heart trembled at the thoughts of
shedding so much blood, though it was for my deliverance. I need not
repeat the arguments which occurred to me against this, they being the
same mentioned before. But though I had other reasons to offer now,
viz., that those men were enemies to my life, and would devour me if
they could; that it was self-preservation, in the highest degree, to
deliver myself from this death of a life, and was acting in my own
defence as much as if they were actually assaulting me, and the like; I
say, though these things argued for it, yet the thoughts of shedding
human blood for my deliverance were very terrible to me, and such as I
could by no means reconcile myself to a great while.

However, at last, after many secret disputes with myself, and after
great perplexities about it, for all these arguments, one way and
another, struggled in my head a long time, the eager prevailing desire
of deliverance at length mastered all the rest, and I resolved, if
possible, to get one of those savages into my hands, cost what it would.
My next thing then was to contrive how to do it, and this indeed was
very difficult to resolve on. But as I could pitch upon no probable
means for it, so I resolved to put myself upon the watch, to see them
when they came on shore, and leave the rest to the event, taking such
measures as the opportunity should present, let be what would be.

With these resolutions in my thoughts, I set myself upon the scout as
often as possible, and indeed so often, till I was heartily tired of
it; for it was above a year and half that I waited; and for great part
of that time went out to the west end, and to the south-west corner of
the island, almost every day, to see for canoes, but none appeared. This
was very discouraging, and began to trouble me much; though I cannot say
that it did in this case, as it had done some time before that, viz.,
wear off the edge of my desire to the thing. But the longer it seemed to
be delayed, the more eager I was for it. In a word, I was not at first
so careful to shun the sight of these savages, and avoid being seen by
them, as I was now eager to be upon them.

Besides, I fancied myself able to manage one, nay, two or three savages,
if I had them, so as to make them entirely slaves to me, to do whatever
I should direct them, and to prevent their being able at any time to do
me any hurt. It was a great while that I pleased myself with this
affair; but nothing still presented. All my fancies and schemes came to
nothing, for no savages came near me for a great while.

About a year and half after I had entertained these notions, and by long
musing had, as it were, resolved them all into nothing, for want of an
occasion to put them in execution, I was surprised, one morning early,
with seeing no less than five canoes all on shore together on my side
the island, and the people who belonged to them all landed, and out of
my sight. The number of them broke all my measures; for seeing so many,
and knowing that they always came four, or six, or sometimes more, in a
boat, I could not tell what to think of it, or how to take my measures
to attack twenty or thirty men single-handed; so I lay still in my
castle, perplexed and discomforted. However, I put myself into all the
same postures for an attack that I had formerly provided, and was just
ready for action if anything had presented. Having waited a good while,
listening to hear if they made any noise, at length, being very
impatient, I set my guns at the foot of my ladder, and clambered up to
the top of the hill, by my two stages, as usual; standing so, however,
that my head did not appear above the hill, so that they could not
perceive me by any means. Here I observed, by the help of my
perspective-glass, that they were no less than thirty in number, that
they had a fire kindled, that they had had meat dressed. How they had
cooked it, that I knew not, or what it was; but they were all dancing,
in I know not how many barbarous gestures and figures, their own way,
round the fire.

While I was thus looking on them, I perceived by my perspective two
miserable wretches dragged from the boats, where, it seems, they were
laid by, and were now brought out for the slaughter. I perceived one of
them immediately fell, being knocked down, I suppose, with a club or
wooden sword, for that was their way, and two or three others were at
work immediately, cutting him open for their cookery, while the other
victim was left standing by himself, till they should be ready for him.
In that very moment this poor wretch seeing himself a little at liberty,
Nature inspired him with hopes of life, and he started away from them,
and ran with incredible swiftness along the sands directly towards me, I
mean towards that part of the coast where my habitation was.

I was dreadfully frighted (that I must acknowledge) when I perceived him
to run my way, and especially when, as I thought, I saw him pursued by
the whole body; and now I expected that part of my dream was coming to
pass, and that he would certainly take shelter in my grove; but I could
not depend, by any means, upon my dream for the rest of it, viz., that
the other savages would not pursue him thither, and find him there.
However, I kept my station, and my spirits began to recover when I found
that there was not above three men that followed him; and still more was
I encouraged when I found that he outstripped them exceedingly in
running, and gained ground of them; so that if he could but hold it for
half an hour, I saw easily he would fairly get away from them all.

There was between them and my castle the creek, which I mentioned often
at the first part of my story, when I landed my cargoes out of the ship;
and this I saw plainly he must necessarily swim over, or the poor wretch
would be taken there. But when the savage escaping came thither he made
nothing of it, though the tide was then up; but plunging in, swam
through in about thirty strokes or thereabouts, landed, and ran on with
exceeding strength and swiftness. When the three persons came to the
creek, I found that two of them could swim, but the third could not, and
that, standing on the other side, he looked at the other, but went no
further, and soon after went softly back, which, as it happened, was
very well for him in the main.

I observed, that the two who swam were yet more than twice as long
swimming over the creek as the fellow was that fled from them. It came
now very warmly upon my thoughts, and indeed irresistibly, that now was
my time to get me a servant, and perhaps a companion or assistant, and
that I was called plainly by Providence to save this poor creature's
life. I immediately run down the ladders with all possible expedition,
fetched my two guns, for they were both but at the foot of the ladders,
as I observed above, and getting up again, with the same haste, to the
top of the hill, I crossed toward the sea, and having a very short cut,
and all down hill, clapped myself in the way between the pursuers and
the pursued, hallooing aloud to him that fled, who, looking back, was at
first perhaps as much frighted at me as at them; and I beckoned with my
hand to him to come back; and, in the meantime, I slowly advanced
towards the two that followed; then rushing at once upon the foremost, I
knocked him down with the stock of my piece. I was loth to fire, because
I would not have the rest hear; though, at that distance, it would not
have been easily heard, and being out of sight of the smoke too, they
would not have easily known what to make of it. Having knocked this
fellow down, the other who pursued with him stopped, as if he had been
frighted, and I advanced apace towards him; but as I came nearer, I
perceived presently he had a bow and arrow, and was fitting it to shoot
at me; so I was then necessitated to shoot at him first, which I did,
and killed him at the first shot.

The poor savage who fled, but had stopped, though he saw both his
enemies fallen and killed, as he thought, yet was so frighted with the
fire and noise of my piece, that he stood stock-still, and neither came
forward nor went backward, though he seemed rather inclined to fly
still, than to come on. I hallooed again to him, and made signs to come
forward, which he easily understood, and came a little way, then stopped
again, and then a little further, and stopped again; and I could then
perceive that he stood trembling, as if he had been taken prisoner, and
had just been to be killed, as his two enemies were. I beckoned him
again to come to me, and gave him all the signs of encouragement that I
could think of; and he came nearer and nearer, kneeling down every ten
or twelve steps, in token of acknowledgment for my saving his life. I
smiled at him, and looked pleasantly, and beckoned to him to come still
nearer. At length he came close to me, and then he kneeled down again,
kissed the ground, and laid his head upon the ground, and taking me by
the foot, set my foot upon his head. This, it seems, was in token of
swearing to be my slave for ever. I took him up, and made much of him,
and encouraged him all I could. But there was more work to do yet; for I
perceived the savage whom I knocked down was not killed, but stunned
with the blow, and began to come to himself; so I pointed to him, and
showing him the savage, that he was not dead, upon this he spoke some
words to me; and though I could not understand them, yet I thought they
were pleasant to hear; for they were the first sound of a man's voice
that I had heard, my own excepted, for above twenty-five years. But
there was no time for such reflections now. The savage who was knocked
down recovered himself so far as to sit up upon the ground, and I
perceived that my savage began to be afraid; but when I saw that, I
presented my other piece at the man, as if I would shoot him. Upon this
my savage, for so I call him now, made a motion to me to lend him my
sword, which hung naked in a belt by my side; so I did. He no sooner had
it but he runs to his enemy, and, at one blow, cut off his head as
cleverly, no executioner in Germany could have done it sooner or better;
which I thought very strange for one who, I had reason to believe, never
saw a sword in his life before, except their own wooden swords. However,
it seems, as I learned afterwards, they make their wooden swords so
sharp, so heavy, and the wood is so hard, that they will cut off heads
even with them, ay, and arms, and that at one blow too. When he had done
this, he comes laughing to me in sign of triumph, and brought me the
sword again, and with abundance of gestures, which I did not
understand, laid it down, with the head of the savage that he had
killed, just before me.

But that which astonished him most, was to know how I had killed the
other Indian so far off; so pointing to him, he made signs to me to let
him go to him; so I bade him go, as well as I could. When he came to
him, he stood like one amazed, looking at him, turned him first on one
side, then on t'other, looked at the wound the bullet had made, which,
it seems, was just in his breast, where it had made a hole, and no great
quantity of blood had followed; but he had bled inwardly, for he was
quite dead. He took up his bow and arrows, and came back; so I turned to
go away, and beckoned to him to follow me, making signs to him that more
might come after them.

Upon this he signed to me that he should bury them with sand, that they
might not be seen by the rest if they followed; and so I made signs
again to him to do so. He fell to work, and in an instant he had scraped
a hole in the sand with his hands big enough to bury the first in, and
then dragged him into it, and covered him, and did so also by the other.
I believe he had buried them both in a quarter of an hour. Then calling
him away, I carried him, not to my castle, but quite away to my cave, on
the farther part of the island; so I did not let my dream come to pass
in that part, viz., that he came into my grove for shelter.

Here I gave him bread and a bunch of raisins to eat, and a draught of
water, which I found he was indeed in great distress for, by his
running; and having refreshed him, I made signs for him to go lie down
and sleep, pointing to a place where I had laid a great parcel of
rice-straw, and a blanket upon it, which I used to sleep upon myself
sometimes; so the poor creature laid down, and went to sleep.

He was a comely, handsome fellow, perfectly well made, with straight
strong limbs, not too large, tall, and well-shaped, and, as I reckon,
about twenty-six years of age. He had a very good countenance, not a
fierce and surly aspect, but seemed to have something very manly in his
face; and yet he had all the sweetness and softness of an European in
his countenance too, especially when he smiled. His hair was long and
black, not curled like wool; his forehead very high and large; and a
great vivacity and sparkling sharpness in his eyes. The colour of his
skin was not quite black, but very tawny; and yet not of an ugly,
yellow, nauseous tawny, as the Brazilians and Virginians, and other
natives of America are, but of a bright kind of a dun olive colour, that
had in it something very agreeable, though not very easy to describe.
His face was round and plump; his nose small, not flat like the negroes;
a very good mouth, thin lips, and his fine teeth well set, and white as
ivory.

After he had slumbered, rather than slept, about half an hour, he waked
again, and comes out of the cave to me, for I had been milking my goats,
which I had in the enclosure just by. When he espied me, he came running
to me, laying himself down again upon the ground, with all the possible
signs of an humble, thankful disposition, making many antic gestures to
show it. At last he lays his head flat upon the ground, close to my
foot, and sets my other foot upon his head, as he had done before, and
after this made all the signs to me of subjection, servitude, and
submission imaginable, to let me know how he would serve me as long as
he lived. I understood him in many things, and let him know I was very
well pleased with him. In a little time I began to speak to him, and
teach him to speak to me; and, first, I made him know his name should be
Friday, which was the day I saved his life. I called him so for the
memory of the time. I likewise taught him to say master, and then let
him know that was to be my name. I likewise taught him to say Yes and
No, and to know the meaning of them. I gave him some milk in an earthen
pot, and let him see me drink it before him, and sop my bread in it; and
I gave him a cake of bread to do the like, which he quickly complied
with, and made signs that it was very good for him.

I kept there with him all that night; but as soon as it was day, I
beckoned to him to come with me, and let him know I would give him some
clothes; at which he seemed very glad, for he was stark naked. As we
went by the place where he had buried the two men, he pointed exactly to
the place, and showed me the marks that he had made to find them again,
making signs to me that we should dig them up again, and eat them. At
this I appeared very angry, expressed my abhorrence of it, made as if I
would vomit at the thoughts of it, and beckoned with my hand to him to
come away; which he did immediately, with great submission. I then led
him up to the top of the hill, to see if his enemies were gone; and
pulling out my glass, I looked, and saw plainly the place where they had
been, but no appearance of them or of their canoes; so that it was plain
that they were gone, and had left their two comrades behind them,
without any search after them.

But I was not content with this discovery; but having now more courage,
and consequently more curiosity, I takes my man Friday with me, giving
him the sword in his hand, with the bow and arrows at his back, which I
found he could use very dexterously, making him carry one gun for me,
and I two for myself, and away we marched to the place where these
creatures had been; for I had a mind now to get some fuller intelligence
of them. When I came to the place, my very blood ran chill in my veins,
and my heart sunk within me, at the horror of the spectacle. Indeed, it
was a dreadful sight, at least it was so to me, though Friday made
nothing of it. The place was covered with human bones, the ground dyed
with their blood, great pieces of flesh left here and there, half-eaten,
mangled, and scorched; and, in short, all the tokens of the triumphant
feast they had been making there, after a victory over their enemies. I
saw three skulls, five hands, and the bones of three or four legs and
feet, and abundance of other parts of the bodies; and Friday, by his
signs, made me understand that they brought over four prisoners to feast
upon; that three of them were eaten up, and that he, pointing to
himself, was the fourth; that there had been a great battle between them
and their next king, whose subjects it seems he had been one of, and
that they had taken a great number of prisoners; all which were carried
to several places by those that had taken them in the fight, in order to
feast upon them, as was done here by these wretches upon those they
brought hither.

I caused Friday to gather all the skulls, bones, flesh, and whatever
remained, and lay them together on a heap, and make a great fire upon
it, and burn them all to ashes. I found Friday had still a hankering
stomach after some of the flesh, and was still a cannibal in his nature;
but I discovered so much abhorrence at the very thoughts of it, and at
the least appearance of it, that he durst not discover it; for I had, by
some means, let him know that I would kill him if he offered it.

When we had done this we came back to our castle, and there I fell to
work for my man Friday; and, first of all, I gave him a pair of linen
drawers, which I had out of the poor gunner's chest I mentioned, and
which I found in the wreck; and which, with a little alteration, fitted
him very well. Then I made him a jerkin of goat's skin, as well as my
skill would allow, and I was now grown a tolerable good tailor; and I
gave him a cap, which I had made of a hare-skin, very convenient and
fashionable enough; and thus he was clothed for the present tolerably
well, and was mighty well pleased to see himself almost as well clothed
as his master. It is true he went awkwardly in these things at first;
wearing the drawers was very awkward to him, and the sleeves of the
waistcoat galled his shoulders, and the inside of his arms; but a little
easing them where he complained they hurt him, and using himself to
them, at length he took to them very well.

The next day after I came home to my hutch with him, I began to consider
where I should lodge him. And that I might do well for him, and yet be
perfectly easy myself, I made a little tent for him in the vacant place
between my two fortifications, in the inside of the last and in the
outside of the first; and as there was a door or entrance there into my
cave, I made a formal framed door-case, and a door to it of boards, and
set it up in the passage, a little within the entrance; and causing the
door to open on the inside, I barred it up in the night, taking in my
ladders too; so that Friday could in no way come at me in the inside of
my innermost wall without making so much noise in getting over, that it
must needs waken me; for my first wall had now a complete roof over it
of long poles, covering all my tent, and leaning up to the side of the
hill, which was again laid cross with smaller sticks instead of laths,
and then thatched over a great thickness with the rice-straw, which was
strong, like reeds; and at the hole or place which was left to go in or
out by the ladder, I had placed a kind of trap-door, which, if it had
been attempted on the outside, would not have opened at all, but would
have fallen down, and made a great noise; and as to weapons, I took them
all into my side every night.

[Illustration: "To see if I could observe any boats upon the sea coming
near the island." (See p. 199.)]

But I needed none of all this precaution; for never man had a more
faithful, loving, sincere servant than Friday was to me; without
passions, sullenness, or designs, perfectly obliged and engaged; his
very affections were tied to me, like those of a child to a father; and
I dare say he would have sacrificed his life for the saving mine, upon
any occasion whatsoever. The many testimonies he gave me of this put it
out of doubt, and soon convinced me that I needed to use no precautions
as to my safety on his account.

This frequently gave me occasion to observe, and that with wonder, that
however it had pleased God, in His providence, and in the government of
the works of His hands, to take from so great a part of the world of His
creatures the best uses to which their faculties and the powers of their
souls are adapted, yet that He has bestowed upon them the same powers,
the same reason, the same affections, the same sentiments of kindness
and obligation, the same passions and resentments of wrongs, the same
sense of gratitude, sincerity, fidelity, and all the capacities of doing
good, and receiving good, that He has given to us; and that when He
pleases to offer to them occasions of exerting these, they are as ready,
nay, more ready, to apply them to the right uses for which they were
bestowed than we are. And this made me very melancholy sometimes, in
reflecting, as the several occasions presented, how mean a use we make
of all these, even though we have these powers enlightened by the great
lamp of instruction, the Spirit of God, and by the knowledge of His Word
added to our understanding; and why it has pleased God to hide the like
saving knowledge from so many millions of souls, who, if I might judge
by this poor savage, would make a much better use of it than we did.

From hence, I sometimes was led too far to invade the sovereignty of
Providence, and as it were arraign the justice of so arbitrary a
disposition of things, that should hide that light from some, and reveal
it to others, and yet expect a like duty from both. But I shut it up,
and checked my thoughts with this conclusion: first, that we did not
know by what light and law these should be condemned; but that as God
was necessarily, and, by the nature of His being, infinitely holy and
just, so it could not be but that if these creatures were all sentenced
to absence from Himself, it was on account of sinning against that
light, which, as the Scripture says, was a law to themselves, and by
such rules as their consciences would acknowledge to be just, though the
foundation was not discovered to us; and, second, that still, as we are
all the clay in the hand of the potter, no vessel could say to Him, "Why
hast Thou formed me thus?"

But to return to my new companion. I was greatly delighted with him, and
made it my business to teach him everything that was proper to make him
useful, handy, and helpful; but especially to make him speak, and
understand me when I spoke. And he was the aptest scholar that ever was;
and particularly was so merry, so constantly diligent, and so pleased
when he could but understand me, or make me understand him, that it was
very pleasant to me to talk to him. And now my life began to be so easy,
that I began to say to myself, that could I but have been safe from more
savages, I cared not if I was never to remove from the place while I
lived.

After I had been two or three days returned to my castle, I thought
that, in order to bring Friday off from his horrid way of feeding, and
from the relish of a cannibal's stomach, I ought to let him taste other
flesh; so I took him out with me one morning to the woods. I went,
indeed, intending to kill a kid out of my own flock, and bring him home
and dress it; but as I was going, I saw a she-goat lying down in the
shade, and two young kids sitting by her. I catched hold of Friday.
"Hold," says I, "stand still," and made signs to him not to stir.
Immediately I presented my piece, shot and killed one of the kids. The
poor creature, who had, at a distance indeed, seen me kill the savage,
his enemy, but did not know, or could imagine, how it was done, was
sensibly surprised, trembled and shook, and looked so amazed, that I
thought he would have sunk down. He did not see the kid I had shot at,
or perceive I had killed it, but ripped up his waistcoat to feel if he
was not wounded; and, as I found presently, thought I was resolved to
kill him; for he came and kneeled down to me, and embracing my knees,
said a great many things I did not understand; but I could easily see
that the meaning was to pray me not to kill him.

I soon found a way to convince him that I would do him no harm; and
taking him up by the hand, laughed at him, and pointing to the kid which
I had killed, beckoned to him to run and fetch it, which he did; and
while he was wondering, and looking to see how the creature was killed,
I loaded my gun again; and by and by I saw a great fowl, like a hawk,
sit upon a tree, within shot; so, to let Friday understand a little what
I would do, I called him to me again, pointing at the fowl, which was
indeed a parrot, though I thought it had been a hawk; I say, pointing to
the parrot, and to my gun, and to the ground under the parrot, to let
him see I would make it fall, I made him understand that I would shoot
and kill that bird. Accordingly I fired, and bade him look, and
immediately he saw the parrot fall. He stood like one frighted again,
notwithstanding all I had said to him; and I found he was the more
amazed, because he did not see me put anything into the gun, but
thought that there must be some wonderful fund of death and destruction
in that thing, able to kill man, beast, bird, or anything near or far
off; and the astonishment this created in him was such as could not wear
off for a long time; and I believe, if I would have let him, he would
have worshipped me and my gun. As for the gun itself, he would not so
much as touch it for several days after; but would speak to it, and talk
to it, as if it had answered him, when he was by himself; which, as I
afterwards learned of him, was to desire it not to kill him.

Well, after his astonishment was a little over at this, I pointed to him
to run and fetch the bird I had shot, which he did, but stayed some
time; for the parrot, not being quite dead, was fluttered a good way off
from the place where she fell. However, he found her, took her up, and
brought her to me; and as I had perceived his ignorance about the gun
before, I took this advantage to charge the gun again, and not let him
see me do it, that I might be ready for any other mark that might
present. But nothing more offered at that time; so I brought home the
kid, and the same evening I took the skin off, and cut it out as well as
I could; and having a pot for that purpose, I boiled or stewed some of
the flesh, and made some very good broth; and after I had begun to eat
some, I gave some to my man, who seemed very glad of it, and liked it
very well; but that which was strangest to him, was to see me eat salt
with it. He made a sign to me that the salt was not good to eat, and
putting a little into his own mouth, he seemed to nauseate it, and would
spit and sputter at it, washing his mouth with fresh water after it. On
the other hand, I took some meat in my mouth without salt, and I
pretended to spit and sputter for want of salt, as fast as he had done
at the salt. But it would not do; he would never care for salt with his
meat or in his broth; at least, not a great while, and then but a very
little.

Having thus fed him with boiled meat and broth, I was resolved to feast
him the next day with roasting a piece of the kid. This I did by hanging
it before the fire in a string, as I had seen many people do in England,
setting two poles up, one on each side of the fire, and one cross on the
top, and tying the string to the cross stick, letting the meat turn
continually. This Friday admired very much. But when he came to taste
the flesh, he took so many ways to tell me how well he liked it, that I
could not but understand him; and at last he told me he would never eat
man's flesh any more, which I was very glad to hear.

The next day I set him to work to beating some corn out, and sifting it
in the manner I used to do, as I observed before; and he soon understood
how to do it as well as I, especially after he had seen what the meaning
of it was, and that it was to make bread of; for after that I let him
see me make my bread, and bake it too; and in a little time Friday was
able to do all the work for me, as well as I could do it myself.

I began now to consider that, having two mouths to feed instead of one,
I must provide more ground for my harvest, and plant a larger quantity
of corn than I used to do; so I marked out a larger piece of land, and
began the fence in the same manner as before, in which Friday not only
worked very willingly and very hard, but did it very cheerfully; and I
told him what it was for; that it was for corn to make more bread,
because he was now with me, and that I might have enough for him and
myself too. He appeared very sensible of that part, and let me know that
he thought I had much more labour upon me on his account, than I had
for myself; and that he would work the harder for me, if I would tell
him what to do.

This was the pleasantest year of all the life I led in this place.
Friday began to talk pretty well, and understand the names of almost
everything I had occasion to call for, and of every place I had to send
him to, and talk a great deal to me; so that, in short, I began now to
have some use for my tongue again, which, indeed, I had very little
occasion for before, that is to say, about speech. Besides the pleasure
of talking to him, I had a singular satisfaction in the fellow himself.
His simple, unfeigned honesty appeared to me more and more every day,
and I began really to love the creature; and, on his side, I believe he
loved me more than it was possible for him ever to love anything before.

I had a mind once to try if he had any hankering inclination to his own
country again; and having learned him English so well that he could
answer me almost any questions, I asked him whether the nation that he
belonged to never conquered in battle? At which he smiled, and said,
"Yes, yes, we always fight the better"; that is, he meant, always get
the better in fight; and so we began the following discourse: "You
always fight the better," said I. "How came you to be taken prisoner
then, Friday?"

_Friday._ My nation beat much for all that.

_Master._ How beat? If your nation beat them, how came you to be taken?

_Friday._ They more many than my nation in the place where me was; they
take one, two, three, and me. My nation overheat them in the yonder
place, where me no was: there my nation take one, two, great thousand.

_Master._ But why did not your side recover you from the hands of your
enemies then?

_Friday._ They run one, two, three and me, and make go in the canoe; my
nation have no canoe that time.

_Master._ Well, Friday, and what does your nation do with the men they
take? Do they carry them away and eat them, as these did?

_Friday._ Yes, my nation eat mans too; eat all up.

_Master._ Where do they carry them?

_Friday._ Go to other place, where they think.

_Master._ Do they come hither?

_Friday._ Yes, yes, they come hither; come other else place.

_Master._ Have you been here with them?

_Friday._ Yes, I been here. (_Points to the N.W. side of the island,
which, it seems, was their side._)

By this I understood that my man Friday had formerly been among the
savages who used to come on shore on the farther part of the island, on
the same man-eating occasions that he was now brought for; and, some
time after, when I took the courage to carry him to that side, being the
same I formerly mentioned, he presently knew the place, and told me he
was there once when they eat up twenty men, two women, and one child. He
could not tell twenty in English, but he numbered them by laying so many
stones on a row, and pointing to me to tell them over.

I have told this passage, because it introduces what follows; that after
I had had this discourse with him, I asked him how far it was from our
island to the shore, and whether the canoes were not often lost. He told
me there was no danger, no canoes ever lost; but that, after a little
way out to the sea, there was a current and a wind, always one way in
the morning, the other in the afternoon.

This I understood to be no more than the sets of the tide, as going out
or coming in; but I afterwards understood it was occasioned by the great
draught and reflux of the mighty river Oroonoko, in the mouth or the
gulf of which river, as I found afterwards, our island lay; and this
land which I perceived to the W. and N.W. was the great island Trinidad,
on the north point of the mouth of the river. I asked Friday a thousand
questions about the country, the inhabitants, the sea, the coast, and
what nation were near. He told me all he knew, with the greatest
openness imaginable. I asked him the names of the several nations of his
sort of people, but could get no other name than Caribs; from whence I
easily understood that these were the Caribbees, which our maps place on
the part of America which reaches from the mouth of the river Oroonoko
to Guiana, and onwards to St. Martha. He told me that up a great way
beyond the moon, that was, beyond the setting of the moon, which must be
W. from their country, there dwelt white-bearded men, like me, and
pointed to my great whiskers, which I mentioned before; and that they
had killed much mans, that was his word; by all which I understood he
meant the Spaniards, whose cruelties in America had been spread over the
whole countries, and was remembered by all the nations from father to
son.

I inquired if he could tell me how I might come from this island and get
among those white men. He told me, "Yes, yes, I might go in two canoe."
I could not understand what he meant, or make him describe to me what he
meant by two canoe; till at last, with great difficulty, I found he
meant it must be in a large great boat, as big as two canoes.

This part of Friday's discourse began to relish with me very well; and
from this time I entertained some hopes that, one time or other, I might
find an opportunity to make my escape from this place, and that this
poor savage might be a means to help me to do it.

During the long time that Friday had now been with me, and that he began
to speak to me, and understand me, I was not wanting to lay a foundation
of religious knowledge in his mind; particularly I asked him one time,
Who made him? The poor creature did not understand me at all, but
thought I had asked who was his father. But I took it by another handle,
and asked him who made the sea, the ground we walked on, and the hills
and woods? He told me it was one old Benamuckee, that lived beyond all.
He could describe nothing of this great person, but that he was very
old, much older, he said, than the sea or the land, than the moon or the
stars. I asked him then, if this old person had made all things, why did
not all things worship him? He looked very grave, and with a perfect
look of innocence said, "All things do say O to him." I asked him if the
people who die in his country went away anywhere? He said, "Yes, they
all went to Benamuckee." Then I asked him whether these they eat up went
thither too? He said "Yes."

From these things I began to instruct him in the knowledge of the true
God. I told him that the great Maker of all things lived up there,
pointing up towards heaven; that He governs the world by the same power
and providence by which He had made it; that He was omnipotent, could do
everything for us, give everything to us, take everything from us; and
thus, by degrees, I opened his eyes. He listened with great attention,
and received with pleasure the notion of Jesus Christ being sent to
redeem us, and of the manner of making our prayers to God, and His
being able to hear us, even into heaven. He told me one day that if our
God could hear us up beyond the sun, He must needs be a greater God than
their Benamuckee, who lived but a little way off, and yet could not hear
till they went up to the great mountains where he dwelt to speak to him.
I asked him if he ever went thither to speak to him? He said, No; they
never went that were young men; none went thither but the old men, whom
he called their Oowokakee, that is, as I made him explain it to me,
their religious, or clergy; and that they went to say O (so he called
saying prayers), and then came back, and told them what Benamuckee said.
By this I observed that there is priestcraft even amongst the most
blinded, ignorant pagans in the world; and the policy of making a secret
religion in order to preserve the veneration of the people to the clergy
is not only to be found in the Roman, but perhaps among all religions in
the world, even among the most brutish and barbarous savages.

I endeavoured to clear up this fraud to my man Friday, and told him that
the pretence of their old men going up to the mountains to say O to
their god Benamuckee was a cheat, and their bringing word from thence
what he said was much more so; that if they met with any answer, or
spoke with any one there, it must be with an evil spirit; and then I
entered into a long discourse with him about the devil, the original of
him, his rebellion against God, his enmity to man, the reason of it, his
setting himself up in the dark parts of the world to be worshipped
instead of God, and as God, and the many stratagems he made use of to
delude mankind to their ruin; how he had a secret access to our passions
and to our affections, to adapt his snares so to our inclinations, as to
cause us even to be our own tempters, and to run upon our destruction by
our own choice.

I found it was not so easy to imprint right notions in his mind about
the devil, as it was about the being of a God. Nature assisted all my
arguments to evidence to him even the necessity of a great First Cause
and overruling, governing Power, a secret directing Providence, and of
the equity and justice of paying homage to Him that made us, and the
like. But there appeared nothing of all this in the notion of an evil
spirit; of his original, his being, his nature, and above all, of his
inclination to do evil, and to draw us in to do so too; and the poor
creature puzzled me once in such a manner by a question merely natural
and innocent, that I scarce knew what to say to him. I had been talking
a great deal to him of the power of God, His omnipotence, His dreadful
aversion to sin, His being a consuming fire to the workers of iniquity;
how, as He had made us all, He could destroy us and all the world in a
moment; and he listened with great seriousness to me all the while.

After this I had been telling him how the devil was God's enemy in the
hearts of men, and used all his malice and skill to defeat the good
designs of Providence, and to ruin the kingdom of Christ in the world,
and the like. "Well," says Friday, "but you say God is so strong, so
great; is He not much strong, much might as the devil?" "Yes, yes," says
I, "Friday, God is stronger than the devil; God is above the devil, and
therefore we pray to God to tread him down under our feet, and enable us
to resist his temptation, and quench his fiery darts." "But," says he
again, "if God much strong, much might as the devil, why God no kill the
devil, so make him no more do wicked?"

I was strangely surprised at his question; and after all, though I was
now an old man, yet I was but a young doctor, and ill enough qualified
for a casuist, or a solver of difficulties; and at first I could not
tell what to say; so I pretended not to hear him, and asked him what he
said? But he was too earnest for an answer to forget his question, so
that he repeated it in the very same broken words as above. By this time
I had recovered myself a little, and I said, "God will at last punish
him severely; he is reserved for the judgment, and is to be cast into
the bottomless pit, to dwell with everlasting fire." This did not
satisfy Friday; but he returns upon me, repeating my words "Reserve at
last! me no understand; but why not kill the devil now? not kill great
ago?" "You may as well ask me," said I, "why God does not kill you and
I, when we do wicked things here that offend Him; we are preserved to
repent and be pardoned." He muses awhile at this. "Well, well," says he,
mighty affectionately, "that well; so you, I, devil, all wicked, all
preserve, repent, God pardon all." Here I was run down again by him to
the last degree, and it was a testimony to me how the mere notions of
nature, though they will guide reasonable creatures to the knowledge of
a God, and of a worship or homage due to the supreme being of God, as
the consequence of our nature, yet nothing but Divine revelation can
form the knowledge of Jesus Christ, and of a redemption purchased for
us, of a Mediator of the new covenant, and of an Intercessor at the
footstool of God's throne; I say, nothing but a revelation from heaven
can form these in the soul, and that therefore the Gospel of our Lord
and Saviour Jesus Christ, I mean the Word of God, and the Spirit of God,
promised for the guide and sanctifier of His people, are the absolutely
necessary instructors of the souls of men in the saving knowledge of
God, and the means of salvation.

I therefore diverted the present discourse between me and my man, rising
up hastily, as upon some sudden occasion of going out; then sending him
for something a good way off, I seriously prayed to God that He would
enable me to instruct savingly this poor savage, assisting, by His
Spirit, the heart of the poor ignorant creature to receive the light of
the knowledge of God in Christ, reconciling him to Himself, and would
guide me to speak so to him from the Word of God as his conscience might
be convinced, his eyes opened, and his soul saved. When he came again to
me, I entered into a long discourse with him upon the subject of the
redemption of man by the Saviour of the world, and of the doctrine of
the Gospel preached from heaven, viz., of repentance towards God, and
faith in our blessed Lord Jesus. I then explained to him as well as I
could why our blessed Redeemer took not on Him the nature of angels, but
the seed of Abraham; and how, for that reason, the fallen angels had no
share in the redemption; that He came only to the lost sheep of the
house of Israel, and the like.

I had, God knows, more sincerity than knowledge in all the methods I
took for this poor creature's instruction, and must acknowledge, what I
believe all that act upon the same principle will find, that in laying
things open to him, I really informed and instructed myself in many
things that either I did not know, or had not fully considered before,
but which occurred naturally to my mind upon my searching into them for
the information of this poor savage. And I had more affection in my
inquiry after things upon this occasion than ever I felt before; so that
whether this poor wild wretch was the better for me or no, I had great
reason to be thankful that ever he came to me. My grief set lighter upon
me, my habitation grew comfortable to me beyond measure; and when I
reflected, that in this solitary life which I had been confined to, I
had not only been moved myself to look up to heaven, and to seek to the
Hand that had brought me there, but was now to be made an instrument,
under Providence, to save the life, and, for aught I know, the soul of
a poor savage, and bring him to the true knowledge of religion, and of
the Christian doctrine, that he might know Christ Jesus, to know whom is
life eternal;--I say, when I reflected upon all these things, a secret
joy ran through every part of my soul, and I frequently rejoiced that
ever I was brought to this place, which I had so often thought the most
dreadful of all afflictions that could possibly have befallen me.

In this thankful frame I continued all the remainder of my time, and the
conversation which employed the hours between Friday and I was such, as
made the three years which we lived there together perfectly and
completely happy, if any such thing as complete happiness can be formed
in a sublunary state. The savage was now a good Christian, a much better
than I; though I have reason to hope, and bless God for it, that we were
equally penitent, and comforted, restored penitents. We had here the
Word of God to read, and no farther off from His Spirit to instruct than
if we had been in England.

I always applied myself to reading the Scripture, to let him know, as
well as I could, the meaning of what I read; and he again, by his
serious inquiries and questions, made me, as I said before, a much
better scholar in the Scripture-knowledge than I should ever have been
by my own private mere reading. Another thing I cannot refrain from
observing here also, from experience in this retired part of my life,
viz., how infinite and inexpressible a blessing it is that the knowledge
of God, and of the doctrine of salvation by Christ Jesus, is so plainly
laid down in the Word of God, so easy to be received and understood;
that as the bare reading the Scripture made me capable of understanding
enough of my duty to carry me directly on to the great work of
repentance for my sins, and laying hold of a Saviour for life and
salvation, to a stated reformation in practice, and obedience to all
God's commands, and this without any teacher or instructor (I mean
human); so the same plain instruction sufficiently served to the
enlightening this savage creature, and bringing him to be such a
Christian, as I have known few equal to him in my life.

[Illustration: "Looking farther into the place . . . I saw two broad,
shining eyes." (See p. 207.)]

As to all the disputes, wranglings, strife, and contention which has
happened in the world about religion, whether niceties in doctrines, or
schemes of Church government, they were all perfectly useless to us; as,
for aught I can yet see, they have been to all the rest in the world. We
had the sure guide to heaven, viz., the Word of God; and we had, blessed
be God, comfortable views of the Spirit of God teaching and instructing
us by His Word, leading us into all truth, and making us both willing
and obedient to the instruction of His Word; and I cannot see the least
use that the greatest knowledge of the disputed points in religion,
which have made such confusions in the world, would have been to us if
we could have obtained it. But I must go on with the historical part of
things, and take every part in its order.

After Friday and I became more intimately acquainted, and that he could
understand almost all I said to him, and speak fluently, though in
broken English, to me, I acquainted him with my own story, or at least
so much of it as related to my coming into the place; how I had lived
there, and how long. I let him into the mystery, for such it was to him,
of gunpowder and bullet, and taught him how to shoot; I gave him a
knife, which he was wonderfully delighted with, and I made him a belt,
with a frog hanging to it, such as in England we wear hangers in; and in
the frog, instead of a hanger, I gave him a hatchet, which was not only
as good a weapon, in some cases, but much more useful upon other
occasions.

I described to him the country of Europe, and particularly England,
which I came from; how we lived, how we worshipped God, how we behaved
to one another, and how we traded in ships to all parts of the world. I
gave him an account of the wreck which I had been on board of, and
showed him, as near as I could, the place where she lay; but she was all
beaten in pieces before, and gone.

I showed him the ruins of our boat, which we lost when we escaped, and
which I could not stir with my whole strength then, but was now fallen
almost all to pieces. Upon seeing this boat, Friday stood musing a great
while, and said nothing. I asked him what it was he studied upon. At
last says he, "Me see such boat like come to place at my nation."

I did not understand him a good while; but at last, when I had examined
further into it, I understood by him that a boat such as that had been,
came on shore upon the country where he lived; that is, as he explained
it, was driven thither by stress of weather. I presently imagined that
some European ship must have been cast away upon their coast, and the
boat might get loose and drive ashore; but was so dull, that I never
once thought of men making escape from a wreck thither, much less whence
they might come; so I only inquired after a description of the boat.

Friday described the boat to me well enough; but brought me better to
understand him when he added with some warmth, "We save the white mans
from drown." Then I presently asked him if there was any white mans, as
he called them, in the boat. "Yes," he said, "the boat full of white
mans." I asked him how many. He told upon his fingers seventeen. I asked
him then what became of them. He told me, "They live, they dwell at my
nation."

This put new thoughts into my head; for I presently imagined that these
might be the men belonging to the ship that was cast away in sight of my
island, as I now call it; and who, after the ship was struck on the
rock, and they saw her inevitably lost, had saved themselves in their
boat, and were landed upon that wild shore among the savages.

Upon this I inquired of him more critically what was become of them. He
assured me they lived still there; that they had been there about four
years; that the savages let them alone, and gave them victuals to live.
I asked him how it came to pass they did not kill them, and eat them. He
said, "No, they make brother with them;" that is, as I understood him, a
truce; and then he added, "They no eat mans but when make the war
fight;" that is to say, they never eat any men but such as come to fight
with them and are taken in battle.

It was after this some considerable time, that being on the top of the
hill, at the east side of the island (from whence, as I have said, I had
in a clear day discovered the main or continent of America), Friday, the
weather being very serene, looks very earnestly towards the mainland,
and, in a kind of surprise, falls a-jumping and dancing, and calls out
to me, for I was at some distance from him. I asked him what was the
matter? "O joy!" says he, "O glad! there see my country, there my
nation!"

I observed an extraordinary sense of pleasure appeared in his face, and
his eyes sparkled, and his countenance discovered a strange eagerness,
as if he had a mind to be in his own country again; and this observation
of mine put a great many thoughts into me, which made me at first not so
easy about my new man Friday as I was before; and I made no doubt but
that if Friday could get back to his own nation again, he would not only
forget all his religion, but all his obligation to me; and would be
forward enough to give his countrymen an account of me, and come back
perhaps with a hundred or two of them, and make a feast upon me, at
which he might be as merry as he used to be with those of his enemies,
when they were taken in war.

But I wronged the poor honest creature very much, for which I was very
sorry afterwards. However, as my jealousy increased, and held me some
weeks, I was a little more circumspect, and not so familiar and kind to
him as before; in which I was certainly in the wrong too, the honest,
grateful creature having no thought about it but what consisted with the
best principles, both as a religious Christian and as a grateful friend,
as appeared afterwards to my full satisfaction.

While my jealousy of him lasted, you may be sure I was every day pumping
him, to see if he would discover any of the new thoughts which I
suspected were in him; but I found everything he said was so honest and
so innocent, that I could find nothing to nourish my suspicion; and, in
spite of all my uneasiness, he made me at last entirely his own again,
nor did he in the least perceive that I was uneasy, and therefore I
could not suspect him of deceit.

One day, walking up the same hill, but the weather being hazy at sea, so
that we could not see the continent, I called to him, and said, "Friday,
do not you wish yourself in your own country, your own nation?" "Yes,"
he said, "I be much O glad to be at my own nation." "What would you do
there?" said I. "Would you turn wild again, eat men's flesh again, and
be a savage as you were before?" He looked full of concern, and shaking
his head said, "No, no; Friday tell them to live good; tell them to
pray God; tell them to eat corn-bread, cattle-flesh, milk, no eat man
again." "Why then," said I to him, "they will kill you." He looked grave
at that, and then said, "No, they no kill me, they willing love learn."
He meant by this they would be willing to learn. He added, they learned
much of the bearded mans that come in the boat. Then I asked him if he
would go back to them? He smiled at that, and told me he could not swim
so far. I told him I would make a canoe for him. He told me he would go,
if I would go with him. "I go?" says I; "why, they will eat me if I come
there." "No, no," says he, "me make they no eat you; me make they much
love you." He meant, he would tell them how I had killed his enemies,
and saved his life, and so he would make them love me. Then he told me,
as well as he could, how kind they were to seventeen white men, or
bearded men, as he called them, who came on shore there in distress.

From this time I confess I had a mind to venture over, and see if I
could possibly join with these bearded men, who, I made no doubt, were
Spaniards or Portuguese; not doubting but, if I could, we might find
some method to escape from thence, being upon the continent, and a good
company together, better than I could from an island forty miles off the
shore, and alone, without help. So, after some days, I took Friday to
work again, by way of discourse, and told him I would give him a boat to
go back to his own nation; and accordingly I carried him to my frigate,
which lay on the other side of the island, and having cleared it of
water, for I always kept it sunk in the water, I brought it out, showed
it him, and we both went into it.

I found he was a most dexterous fellow at managing it, and would make it
go almost as swift and fast again as I could. So when he was in I said
to him, "Well now, Friday, shall we go to your nation?" He looked very
dull at my saying so, which, it seems, was because he thought the boat
too small to go so far. I told him then I had a bigger; so the next day
I went to the place where the first boat lay which I had made, but which
I could not get into the water. He said that was big enough; but then,
as I had taken no care of it, and it had lain two or three and twenty
years there, the sun had split and dried it, that it was in a manner
rotten. Friday told me such a boat would do very well, and would carry
"much enough victual, drink, bread;" that was his way of talking.

Upon the whole, I was by this time so fixed upon my design of going over
with him to the continent, that I told him we would go and make one as
big as that, and he should go home in it. He answered not one word, but
looked very grave and sad. I asked him what was the matter with him? He
asked me again thus, "Why you angry mad with Friday? what me done?" I
asked him what he meant. I told him I was not angry with him at all. "No
angry! no angry!" says he, repeating the words several times. "Why send
Friday home away to my nation?" "Why," says I, "Friday, did you not say
you wished you were there?" "Yes, yes," says he, "wish be both there, no
wish Friday there, no master there." In a word, he would not think of
going there without me. "I go there, Friday!" says I; "what shall I do
there?" He turned very quick upon me at this: "You do great deal much
good," says he; "you teach wild mans to be good, sober, tame mans; you
tell them know God, pray God, and live new life." "Alas! Friday," says
I, "thou knowest not what thou sayest. I am but an ignorant man myself."
"Yes, yes," says he, "you teachee me good, you teachee them good." "No,
no, Friday," says I, "you shall go without me; leave me here to live by
myself, as I did before." He looked confused again at that word, and
running to one of the hatchets which he used to wear, he takes it up
hastily, comes and gives it me. "What must I do with this?" says I to
him. "You take kill Friday," says he. "What must I kill you for?" said I
again. He returns very quick, "What you send Friday away for? Take kill
Friday, no send Friday away." This he spoke so earnestly, that I saw
tears stand in his eyes. In a word, I so plainly discovered the utmost
affection in him to me, and a firm resolution in him, that I told him
then, and often after, that I would never send him away from me if he
was willing to stay with me.

Upon the whole, as I found by all his discourse a settled affection to
me, and that nothing should part him from me, so I found all the
foundation of his desire to go to his own country was laid in his ardent
affection to the people, and his hopes of my doing them good; a thing
which, as I had no notion of myself, so I had not the least thought or
intention or desire of undertaking it. But still I found a strong
inclination to my attempting an escape, as above, founded on the
supposition gathered from the discourse, viz., that there were seventeen
bearded men there; and, therefore, without any more delay I went to work
with Friday to find out a great tree proper to fell, and make a large
_periagua_, or canoe, to undertake the voyage. There were trees enough
in the island to have built a little fleet, not of _periaguas_ and
canoes, but even of good large vessels. But the main thing I looked at
was, to get one so near the water that we might launch it when it was
made, to avoid the mistake I committed at first.

At last Friday pitched upon a tree, for I found he knew much better than
I what kind of wood was fittest for it; nor can I tell, to this day,
what wood to call the tree we cut down, except that it was very like
the tree we call fustic, or between that and the Nicaragua wood, for it
was much of the same colour and smell. Friday was for burning the hollow
or cavity of this tree out, to make it for a boat, but I showed him how
rather to cut it out with tools; which, after I had showed him how to
use, he did very handily; and in about a month's hard labour we finished
it, and made it very handsome; especially when, with our axes, which I
showed him how to handle, we cut and hewed the outside into the true
shape of a boat. After this, however, it cost us near a fortnight's time
to get her along, as it were inch by inch, upon great rollers into the
water; but when she was in, she would have carried twenty men with great
ease.

When she was in the water, and though she was so big, it amazed me to
see with what dexterity, and how swift my man Friday would manage her,
turn her, and paddle her along. So I asked him if he would, and if we
might venture over in her. "Yes," he said, "he venture over in her very
well, though great blow wind." However, I had a farther design that he
knew nothing of, and that was to make a mast and sail, and to fit her
with an anchor and cable. As to a mast, that was easy enough to get; so
I pitched upon a straight young cedar tree, which I found near the
place, and which there was great plenty of in the island; and I set
Friday to work to cut it down, and gave him directions how to shape and
order it. But as to the sail, that was my particular care. I knew I had
old sails, or rather pieces of old sails enough; but as I had had them
now twenty-six years by me, and had not been very careful to preserve
them, not imagining that I should ever have this kind of use for them, I
did not doubt but they were all rotten, and, indeed, most of them were
so. However, I found two pieces which appeared pretty good, and with
these I went to work, and with a great deal of pains, and awkward
tedious stitching (you may be sure) for want of needles, I, at length,
made a three-cornered ugly thing, like what we call in England a
shoulder-of-mutton sail, to go with a boom at bottom, and a little short
sprit at the top, such as usually our ships' long-boats sail with, and
such as I best knew how to manage; because it was such a one as I had to
the boat in which I made my escape from Barbary, as related in the first
part of my story.

I was near two months performing this last work, viz., rigging and
fitting my mast and sails; for I finished them very complete, making a
small stay, and a sail, or foresail, to it, to assist, if we should turn
to windward; and, which was more than all, I fixed a rudder to the stern
of her to steer with; and though I was but a bungling shipwright, yet as
I knew the usefulness, and even necessity, of such a thing, I applied
myself with so much pains to do it, that at last I brought it to pass;
though, considering the many dull contrivances I had for it that failed,
I think it cost me almost as much labour as making the boat.

After all this was done too, I had my man Friday to teach as to what
belonged to the navigation of my boat; for though he knew very well how
to paddle a canoe, he knew nothing what belonged to a sail and a rudder;
and was the most amazed when he saw me work the boat to and again in the
sea by the rudder, and how the sail jibbed, and filled this way, or that
way, as the course we sailed changed; I say, when he saw this, he stood
like one astonished and amazed. However, with a little use I made all
these things familiar to him, and he became an expert sailor, except
that as to the compass I could make him understand very little of that.
On the other hand, as there was very little cloudy weather, and seldom
or never any fogs in those parts, there was the less occasion for a
compass, seeing the stars were always to be seen by night, and the shore
by day, except in the rainy seasons, and then nobody cared to stir
abroad, either by land or sea.

I was now entered on the seven and twentieth year of my captivity in
this place; though the three last years that I had this creature with me
ought rather to be left out of the account, my habitation being quite of
another kind than in all the rest of the time. I kept the anniversary of
my landing here with the same thankfulness to God for His mercies as at
first; and if I had such cause of acknowledgment at first, I had much
more so now, having such additional testimonies of the care of
Providence over me, and the great hopes I had of being effectually and
speedily delivered; for I had an invincible impression upon my thoughts
that my deliverance was at hand, and that I should not be another year
in this place. However, I went on with my husbandry, digging, planting,
fencing, as usual. I gathered and cured my grapes, and did every
necessary thing as before.

The rainy season was, in the meantime, upon me, when I kept more within
doors than at other times; so I had stowed our new vessel as secure as
we could, bringing her up into the creek, where, as I said in the
beginning, I landed my rafts from the ship; and hauling her up to the
shore at high-water mark, I made my man Friday dig a little dock, just
big enough to hold her, and just deep enough to give her water enough to
float in; and then, when the tide was out, we made a strong dam cross
the end of it, to keep the water out; and so she lay dry, as to the
tide, from the sea; and to keep the rain off, we laid a great many
boughs of trees, so thick, that she was as well thatched as a house; and
thus we waited for the month of November and December, in which I
designed to make my adventure.

When the settled season began to come in, as the thought of my design
returned with the fair weather, I was preparing daily for the voyage;
and the first thing I did was to lay by a certain quantity of
provisions, being the stores for our voyage; and intended, in a week or
a fortnight's time, to open the dock, and launch out our boat. I was
busy one morning upon something of this kind, when I called to Friday,
and bid him go to the sea-shore and see if he could find a turtle, or
tortoise, a thing which we generally got once a week, for the sake of
the eggs as well as the flesh. Friday had not been long gone when he
came running back, and flew over my outer wall, or fence, like one that
felt not the ground, or the steps he set his feet on; and before I had
time to speak to him, he cries out to me, "O master! O master! O sorrow!
O bad!" "What's the matter, Friday?" says I. "O yonder, there," says he,
"one, two, three canoe! one, two, three!" By his way of speaking, I
concluded there were six; but, on inquiry, I found it was but three.
"Well, Friday," says I, "do not be frighted." So I heartened him up as
well as I could. However, I saw the poor fellow was most terribly
scared; for nothing ran in his head but that they were come to look for
him, and would cut him in pieces, and eat him; and the poor fellow
trembled so, that I scarce knew what to do with him. I comforted him as
well as I could, and told him I was in as much danger as he, and that
they would eat me as well as him. "But," says I, "Friday, we must
resolve to fight them. Can you fight, Friday?" "Me shoot," says he; "but
there come many great number." "No matter for that," said I again; "our
guns will fright them that we do not kill." So I asked him whether, if I
resolved to defend him, he would defend me, and stand by me, and do
just as I bid him. He said, "Me die when you bid die, master." So I went
and fetched a good dram of rum, and gave him; for I had been so good a
husband of my rum, that I had a great deal left. When he had drank it, I
made him take the two fowling-pieces, which we always carried, and load
them with large swan-shot, as big as small pistol-bullets. Then I took
four muskets, and loaded them with two slugs and five small bullets
each; and my two pistols I loaded with a brace of bullets each. I hung
my great sword, as usual, naked by my side, and gave Friday his hatchet.

When I had thus prepared myself, I took my perspective-glass, and went
up to the side of the hill to see what I could discover; and I found
quickly, by my glass, that there were one and twenty savages, three
prisoners, and three canoes, and that their whole business seemed to be
the triumphant banquet upon these three human bodies; a barbarous feast
indeed, but nothing more than, as I had observed, was usual with them.

I observed also that they were landed, not where they had done when
Friday made his escape, but nearer to my creek, where the shore was low,
and where the thick wood came close almost down to the sea. This, with
the abhorrence of the inhuman errand these wretches came about, filled
me with such indignation, that I came down again to Friday, and told him
I was resolved to go down to them, and kill them all, and asked him if
he would stand by me. He was now gotten over his fright, and his spirits
being a little raised with the dram I had given him, he was very
cheerful, and told me, as before, he would die when I bid die.

In this fit of fury, I took first and divided the arms which I had
charged, as before, between us. I gave Friday one pistol to stick in his
girdle, and three guns upon his shoulder; and I took one pistol, and
the other three myself, and in this posture we marched out. I took a
small bottle of rum in my pocket, and gave Friday a large bag with more
powder and bullet; and as to orders, I charged him to keep close behind
me, and not to stir, or shoot, or do anything, till I bid him, and in
the meantime not to speak a word. In this posture I fetched a compass to
my right hand of near a mile, as well to get over the creek as to get
into the wood, so that I might come within shot of them before I should
be discovered, which I had seen, by my glass, it was easy to do.

While I was making this march, my former thoughts returning, I began to
abate my resolution. I do not mean that I entertained any fear of their
number; for as they were naked, unarmed wretches, 'tis certain I was
superior to them; nay, though I had been alone. But it occurred to my
thoughts what call, what occasion, much less what necessity, I was in to
go and dip my hands in blood, to attack people who had neither done or
intended me any wrong; who, as to me, were innocent, and whose barbarous
customs were their own disaster; being in them a token indeed of God's
having left them, with the other nations of that part of the world, to
such stupidity, and to such inhuman courses; but did not call me to take
upon me to be a judge of their actions, much less an executioner of His
justice; that whenever he thought fit, He would take the cause into His
own hands, and by national vengeance, punish them, as a people, for
national crimes; but that, in the meantime, it was none of my business;
that, it was true, Friday might justify it, because he was a declared
enemy, and in state of war with those very particular people, and it was
lawful for him to attack them; but I could not say the same with respect
to me. These things were so warmly pressed upon my thoughts all the way
as I went, that I resolved I would only go and place myself near them,
that I might observe their barbarous feast, and that I would act then as
God should direct; but that, unless something offered that was more a
call to me than yet I knew of, I would not meddle with them.

With this resolution I entered the wood, and with all possible wariness
and silence, Friday following close at my heels, I marched till I came
to the skirt of the wood, on the side which was next to them; only that
one corner of the wood lay between me and them. Here I called softly to
Friday, and showing him a great tree, which was just at the corner of
the wood, I bade him go to the tree and bring me word if he could see
there plainly what they were doing. He did so, and came immediately back
to me, and told me they might be plainly viewed there; that they were
all about their fire, eating the flesh of one of their prisoners, and
that another lay bound upon the sand, a little from them, which, he
said, they would kill next; and, which fired all the very soul within
me, he told me it was not one of their nation, but one of the bearded
men, whom he had told me of, that came to their country in the boat. I
was filled with horror at the very naming the white, bearded man; and
going to the tree, I saw plainly, by my glass, a white man, who lay upon
the beach of the sea, with his hands and his feet tied with flags, or
things like rushes, and that he was an European, and had clothes on.

There was another tree, and a little thicket beyond it, about fifty
yards nearer to them than the place where I was, which, by going a
little way about, I saw I might come at undiscovered, and that then I
should be within half shot of them; so I withheld my passion, though I
was indeed enraged to the highest degree; and going back about twenty
paces, I got behind some bushes, which held all the way till I came
to the other tree; and then I came to a little rising ground, which gave
me a full view of them, at the distance of about eighty yards.

[Illustration: "I was surprised with seeing a light of some fire upon
the shore." (See p. 212.)]

I had now not a moment to lose, for nineteen of the dreadful wretches
sat upon the ground, all close huddled together, and had just sent the
other two to butcher the poor Christian, and bring him, perhaps limb by
limb, to their fire; and they were stooped down to untie the bands at
his feet. I turned to Friday: "Now, Friday," said I, "do as I bid thee."
Friday said he would. "Then, Friday," says I, "do exactly as you see me
do; fail in nothing." So I set down one of the muskets and the
fowling-piece upon the ground, and Friday did the like by his; and with
the other musket I took my aim at the savages, bidding him do the like.
Then asking him if he was ready, he said, "Yes." "Then fire at them,"
said I; and the same moment I fired also.

Friday took his aim so much better than I, that on the side that he shot
he killed two of them, and wounded three more; and on my side I killed
one, and wounded two. They were, you may be sure, in a dreadful
consternation; and all of them who were not hurt jumped up upon their
feet, but did not immediately know which way to run, or which way to
look, for they knew not from whence their destruction came. Friday kept
his eyes close upon me, that, as I had bid him, he might observe what I
did; so as soon as the first shot was made I threw down the piece, and
took up the fowling-piece; and Friday did the like. He sees me cock and
present; he did the same again. "Are you ready, Friday?" said I. "Yes,"
says he. "Let fly, then," says I, "in the name of God!" and with that I
fired again among the amazed wretches, and so did Friday; and as our
pieces were now loaded with what I called swan-shot, or small
pistol-bullets, we found only two drop, but so many were wounded, that
they ran about yelling and screaming like mad creatures, all bloody, and
miserably wounded most of them; whereof three more fell quickly after,
though not quite dead.

"Now, Friday," says I, laying down the discharged pieces, and taking up
the musket which was yet loaded, "follow me," says I, which he did with
a great deal of courage; upon which I rushed out of the wood, and showed
myself, and Friday close at my foot. As soon as I perceived they saw me,
I shouted as loud as I could, and bade Friday do so too; and running as
fast as I could, which, by the way, was not very fast, being loaden with
arms as I was, I made directly towards the poor victim, who was, as I
said, lying upon the beach, or shore, between the place where they sat
and the sea. The two butchers, who were just going to work with him, had
left him at the surprise of our first fire, and fled in a terrible
fright to the seaside, and had jumped into a canoe, and three more of
the rest made the same way. I turned to Friday, and bid him step
forwards and fire at them. He understood me immediately, and running
about forty yards, to be near them, he shot at them, and I thought he
had killed them all, for I saw them all fall of a heap into the boat;
though I saw two of them up again quickly. However, he killed two of
them, and wounded the third, so that he lay down in the bottom of the
boat as if he had been dead.

While my man Friday fired at them, I pulled out my knife and cut the
flags that bound the poor victim; and loosing his hands and feet, I
lifted him up, and asked him in the Portuguese tongue what he was. He
answered in Latin, Christianus; but was so weak and faint, that he could
scarce stand or speak. I took my bottle out of my pocket and gave it
him, making signs that he should drink, which he did; and I gave him a
piece of bread, which he eat. Then I asked him what countryman he was;
and he said, Espagniole; and being a little recovered, let me know, by
all the signs he could possibly make, how much he was in my debt for his
deliverance. "Seignior," said I, with as much Spanish as I could make
up, "we will talk afterwards, but we must fight now. If you have any
strength left, take this pistol and sword, and lay about you." He took
them very thankfully, and no sooner had he the arms in his hands but, as
if they had put new vigour into him, he flew upon his murderers like a
fury, and had cut two of them in pieces in an instant; for the truth is,
as the whole was a surprise to them, so the poor creatures were so much
frighted with the noise of our pieces, that they fell down for mere
amazement and fear, and had no more power to attempt their own escape,
than their flesh had to resist our shot; and that was the case of those
five that Friday shot at in the boat; for as three of them fell with the
hurt they received, so the other two fell with the fright.

I kept my piece in my hand still without firing, being willing to keep
my charge ready, because I had given the Spaniard my pistol and sword.
So I called to Friday, and bade him run up to the tree from whence we
first fired, and fetch the arms which lay there that had been
discharged, which he did with great swiftness; and then giving him my
musket, I sat down myself to load all the rest again, and bade them come
to me when they wanted. While I was loading these pieces, there happened
a fierce engagement between the Spaniard and one of the savages, who
made at him with one of their great wooden swords, the same weapon that
was to have killed him before if I had not prevented it. The Spaniard,
who was as bold and as brave as could be imagined, though weak, had
fought this Indian a good while, and had cut him two great wounds on his
head; but the savage being a stout lusty fellow, closing in with him,
had thrown him down, being faint, and was wringing my sword out of his
hand, when the Spaniard, though undermost, wisely quitting the sword,
drew the pistol from his girdle, shot the savage through the body, and
killed him upon the spot, before I, who was running to help him, could
come near him.

Friday being now left to his liberty, pursued the flying wretches with
no weapon in his hand but his hatchet; and with that he despatched those
three who, as I said before, were wounded at first, and fallen, and all
the rest he could come up with; and the Spaniard coming to me for a gun,
I gave him one of the fowling-pieces, with which he pursued two of the
savages, and wounded them both; but as he was not able to run, they both
got from him into the wood, where Friday pursued them, and killed one of
them; but the other was too nimble for him, and though he was wounded,
yet had plunged himself into the sea, and swam with all his might off to
those two who were left in the canoe; which three in the canoe, with one
wounded, who we know not whether he died or no, were all that escaped
our hands of one and twenty. The account of the rest is as follows:--

3 killed at our first shot from the tree.
2 killed at the next shot.
2 killed by Friday in the boat.
2 killed by ditto, of those at first wounded.
1 killed by ditto in the wood.
3 killed by the Spaniard.
4 killed, being found dropped here and there of their
  wounds, or killed by Friday in his chase of them.
4 escaped in the boat, whereof one wounded, if not dead.
--
21 in all.

Those that were in the canoe worked hard to get out of gun-shot; and
though Friday made two or three shots at them, I did not find that he
hit any of them. Friday would fain have had me take one of their canoes,
and pursue them; and, indeed, I was very anxious about their escape,
lest carrying the news home to their people they should come back
perhaps with two or three hundred of their canoes, and devour us by mere
multitude. So I consented to pursue them by sea, and running to one of
their canoes, I jumped in, and bade Friday follow me. But when I was in
the canoe, I was surprised to find another poor creature lie there
alive, bound hand and foot, as the Spaniard was, for the slaughter, and
almost dead with fear, not knowing what the matter was; for he had not
been able to look up over the side of the boat, he was tied so hard,
neck and heels, and had been tied so long, that he had really but little
life in him.

I immediately cut the twisted flags or rushes, which they had bound him
with, and would have helped him up; but he could not stand or speak, but
groaned most piteously, believing, it seems, still that he was only
unbound in order to be killed.

When Friday came to him, I bade him speak to him, and tell him of his
deliverance; and pulling out my bottle made him give the poor wretch a
dram; which, with the news of his being delivered, revived him, and he
sat up in the boat. But when Friday came to hear him speak, and look in
his face, it would have moved any one to tears to have seen how Friday
kissed him, embraced him, hugged him, cried, laughed, halloed, jumped
about, danced, sung; then cried again, wrung his hands, beat his own
face and head, and then sung and jumped about again, like a distracted
creature. It was a good while before I could make him speak to me, or
tell me what was the matter; but when he came a little to himself, he
told me that it was his father.

It is not easy for me to express how it moved me to see what ecstasy and
filial affection had worked in this poor savage at the sight of his
father, and of his being delivered from death; nor, indeed, can I
describe half the extravagances of his affection after this; for he went
into the boat, and out of the boat, a great many times. When he went in
to him, he would sit down by him, open his breast, and hold his father's
head close to his bosom, half an hour together to nourish it; then he
took his arms and ankles, which were numbed and stiff with the binding,
and chafed and rubbed them with his hands; and I, perceiving what the
case was, gave him some rum out of my bottle to rub them with, which did
them a great deal of good.

This action put an end to our pursuit of the canoe with the other
savages, who were now gotten almost out of sight; and it was happy for
us that we did not, for it blew so hard within two hours after, and
before they could be gotten a quarter of their way, and continued
blowing so hard all night, and that from the north-west, which was
against them, that I could not suppose their boat could live, or that
they ever reached to their own coast.

But to return to Friday. He was so busy about his father, that I could
not find in my heart to take him off for some time; but after I thought
he could leave him a little, I called him to me, and he came jumping and
laughing, and pleased to the highest extreme. Then I asked him if he had
given his father any bread. He shook his head, and said, "None; ugly dog
eat all up self." So I gave him a cake of bread out of a little pouch I
carried on purpose. I also gave him a dram for himself, but he would not
taste it, but carried it to his father. I had in my pocket also two or
three bunches of my raisins, so I gave him a handful of them for his
father. He had no sooner given his father these raisins, but I saw him
come out of the boat and run away, as if he had been bewitched, he ran
at such a rate; for he was the swiftest fellow of his foot that ever I
saw. I say, he run at such a rate, that he was out of sight, as it were,
in an instant; and though I called, and hallooed too, after him, it was
all one, away he went; and in a quarter of an hour I saw him come back
again, though not so fast as he went; and as he came nearer I found his
pace was slacker, because he had something in his hand.

When he came up to me, I found he had been quite home for an earthen
jug, or pot, to bring his father some fresh water, and that he had got
two more cakes or loaves of bread. The bread he gave me, but the water
he carried to his father. However, as I was very thirsty too, I took a
little sup of it. This water revived his father more than all the rum or
spirits I had given him, for he was just fainting with thirst.

When his father had drank, I called to him to know if there was any
water left. He said "Yes"; and I bade him give it to the poor Spaniard,
who was in as much want of it as his father; and I sent one of the
cakes, that Friday brought, to the Spaniard too, who was indeed very
weak, and was reposing himself upon a green place under the shade of a
tree; and whose limbs were also very stiff, and very much swelled with
the rude bandage he had been tied with. When I saw that upon Friday's
coming to him with the water he sat up and drank, and took the bread,
and began to eat, I went to him, and gave him a handful of raisins. He
looked up in my face with all the tokens of gratitude and thankfulness
that could appear in any countenance; but was so weak, notwithstanding
he had so exerted himself in the fight, that he could not stand up upon
his feet. He tried to do it two or three times, but was really not able,
his ankles were so swelled and so painful to him; so I bade him sit
still, and caused Friday to rub his ankles, and bathe them with rum, as
he had done his father's.

I observed the poor affectionate creature, every two minutes, or perhaps
less, all the while he was here, turned his head about to see if his
father was in the same place and posture as he left him sitting; and at
last he found he was not to be seen; at which he started up, and without
speaking a word, flew with that swiftness to him, that one could scarce
perceive his feet to touch the ground as he went. But when he came, he
only found he had laid himself down to ease his limbs; so Friday came
back to me presently, and I then spoke to the Spaniard to let Friday
help him up, if he could, and lead him to the boat, and then he should
carry him to our dwelling, where I would take care of him. But Friday, a
lusty strong fellow, took the Spaniard quite up upon his back, and
carried him away to the boat, and set him down softly upon the side or
gunnel of the canoe, with his feet in the inside of it, and then lifted
him quite in, and set him close to his father; and presently stepping
out again, launched the boat off, and paddled it along the shore faster
than I could walk, though the wind blew pretty hard too. So he brought
them both safe into our creek, and leaving them in the boat, runs away
to fetch the other canoe. As he passed me, I spoke to him, and asked him
whither he went. He told me, "Go fetch more boat." So away he went like
the wind, for sure never man or horse ran like him; and he had the other
canoe in the creek almost as soon as I got to it by land; so he wafted
me over, and then went to help our new guests out of the boat, which he
did; but they were neither of them able to walk, so that poor Friday
knew not what to do.

To remedy this I went to work in my thought, and calling to Friday to
bid them sit down on the bank while he came to me, I soon made a kind of
hand-barrow to lay them on, and Friday and I carried them up both
together upon it between us. But when we got them to the outside of our
wall, or fortification, we were at a worse loss than before, for it was
impossible to get them over, and I was resolved not to break it down. So
I set to work again; and Friday and I, in about two hours' time, made a
very handsome tent, covered with old sails, and above that with boughs
of trees, being in the space without our outward fence, and between that
and the grove of young wood which I had planted; and here we made them
two beds of such things as I had, viz., of good rice-straw, with
blankets laid upon it to lie on, and another to cover them, on each bed.

My island was now peopled, and I thought myself very rich in subjects;
and it was a merry reflection, which I frequently made, how like a king
I looked. First of all, the whole country was my own mere property, so
that I had an undoubted right of dominion. Secondly, my people were
perfectly subjected. I was absolute lord and lawgiver; they all owed
their lives to me, and were ready to lay down their lives, if there had
been occasion of it, for me. It was remarkable, too, we had but three
subjects, and they were of three different religions. My man Friday was
a Protestant, his father was a Pagan and a cannibal, and the Spaniard
was a Papist. However, I allowed liberty of conscience throughout my
dominions. But this is by the way.

As soon as I had secured my two weak rescued prisoners, and given them
shelter and a place to rest them upon, I began to think of making some
provision for them; and the first thing I did, I ordered Friday to take
a yearling goat, betwixt a kid and a goat, out of my particular flock,
to be killed; when I cut off the hinder-quarter, and chopping it into
small pieces, I set Friday to work to boiling and stewing, and made them
a very good dish, I assure you, of flesh and broth, having put some
barley and rice also into the broth; and as I cooked it without doors,
for I made no fire within my inner wall, so I carried it all into the
new tent, and having set a table there for them, I sat down and eat my
own dinner also with them, and as well as I could cheered them, and
encouraged them; Friday being my interpreter, especially to his father,
and indeed, to the Spaniard too; for the Spaniard spoke the language of
the savages pretty well.

After we had dined, or rather supped, I ordered Friday to take one of
the canoes and go and fetch our muskets and other firearms, which, for
want of time, we had left upon the place of battle; and the next day I
ordered him to go and bury the dead bodies of the savages, which lay
open to the sun, and would presently be offensive; and I also ordered
him to bury the horrid remains of their barbarous feast, which I knew
were pretty much, and which I could not think of doing myself; nay, I
could not bear to see them, if I went that way. All which he punctually
performed, and defaced the very appearance of the savages being there;
so that when I went again I could scarce know where it was, otherwise
than by the corner of the wood pointing to the place.

I then began to enter into a little conversation with my two new
subjects; and first, I set Friday to inquire of his father what he
thought of the escape of the savages in that canoe, and whether we might
expect a return of them, with a power too great for us to resist. His
first opinion was, that the savages in the boat never could live out
the storm which blew that night they went off, but must, of necessity,
be drowned, or driven south to those other shores, where they were as
sure to be devoured as they were to be drowned if they were cast away.
But as to what they would do if they came safe on shore, he said he knew
not; but it was his opinion that they were so dreadfully frighted with
the manner of their being attacked, the noise, and the fire, that he
believed they would tell their people they were all killed by thunder
and lightning, not by the hand of man; and that the two which appeared,
viz., Friday and me, were two heavenly spirits, or furies, come down to
destroy them, and not men with weapons. This, he said, he knew, because
he heard them all cry out so in their language to one another; for it
was impossible to them to conceive that a man could dart fire, and speak
thunder, and kill at a distance without lifting up the hand, as was done
now. And this old savage was in the right; for, as I understood since by
other hands, the savages never attempted to go over to the island
afterwards. They were so terrified with the accounts given by those four
men (for, it seems, they did escape the sea), that they believed whoever
went to that enchanted island would be destroyed with fire from the
gods.

This, however, I knew not, and therefore was under continual
apprehensions for a good while, and kept always upon my guard, me and
all my army; for as we were now four of us, I would have ventured upon a
hundred of them, fairly in the open field, at any time.

In a little time, however, no more canoes appearing, the fear of their
coming wore off, and I began to take my former thoughts of a voyage to
the main into consideration; being likewise assured, by Friday's father,
that I might depend upon good usage from their nation, on his account,
if I would go.

But my thoughts were a little suspended when I had a serious discourse
with the Spaniard, and when I understood that there were sixteen more of
his countrymen and Portuguese, who, having been cast away, and made
their escape to that side, lived there at peace, indeed, with the
savages, but were very sore put to it for necessaries, and indeed for
life. I asked him all the particulars of their voyage, and found they
were a Spanish ship bound from the Rio de la Plata to the Havana, being
directed to leave their loading there, which was chiefly hides and
silver, and to bring back what European goods they could meet with
there; that they had five Portuguese seamen on board, whom they took out
of another wreck; that five of their own men were drowned when the first
ship was lost, and that these escaped, through infinite dangers and
hazards, and arrived, almost starved, on the cannibal coast, where they
expected to have been devoured every moment.

He told me they had some arms with them, but they were perfectly
useless, for that they had neither powder nor ball, the washing of the
sea having spoiled all their powder but a little, which they used, at
their first landing, to provide themselves some food.

I asked him what he thought would become of them there, and if they had
formed no design of making any escape? He said they had many
consultations about it; but that having neither vessel, or tools to
build one, or provisions of any kind, their councils always ended in
tears and despair.

I asked him how he thought they would receive a proposal from me, which
might tend towards an escape; and whether, if they were all here, it
might not be done? I told him with freedom, I feared mostly their
treachery and ill usage of me if I put my life in their hands; for that
gratitude was no inherent virtue in the nature of man, nor did men
always square their dealings by the obligations they had received, so
much as they did by the advantages they expected. I told him it would be
very hard that I should be the instrument of their deliverance, and that
they should afterwards make me their prisoner, in New Spain, where an
Englishman was certain to be made a sacrifice, what necessity or what
accident soever brought him thither; and that I had rather be delivered
up to the savages, and be devoured alive, than fall into the merciless
claws of the priests, and be carried into the Inquisition. I added, that
otherwise I was persuaded, if they were all here, we might, with so many
hands, build a bark large enough to carry us all away, either to the
Brazils, southward, or to the islands, or Spanish coast, northward; but
that if, in requital, they should, when I had put weapons into their
hands, carry me by force among their own people, I might be ill used for
my kindness to them, and make my case worse than it was before.

He answered, with a great deal of candour and ingenuity, that their
condition was so miserable, and they were so sensible of it, that he
believed they would abhor the thought of using any man unkindly that
should contribute to their deliverance; and that, if I pleased, he would
go to them with the old man, and discourse with them about it, and
return again, and bring me their answer; that he would make conditions
with them upon their solemn oath that they should be absolutely under my
leading, as their commander and captain; and that they should swear upon
the holy sacraments and the gospel to be true to me, and to go to such
Christian country as that I should agree to, and no other, and to be
wholly and absolutely by my orders till they were landed safely in such
country as I intended; and that he would bring a contract from them,
under their hands, for that purpose.

Then he told me he would first swear to me himself, that he would never
stir from me as long as he lived till I gave him orders; and that he
would take my side to the last drop of his blood, if there should happen
the least breach of faith among his countrymen.

He told me they were all of them very civil, honest men, and they were
under the greatest distress imaginable, having neither weapons nor
clothes, nor any food, but at the mercy and discretion of the savages;
out of all hopes of ever returning to their own country; and that he was
sure, if I would undertake their relief, they would live and die by me.

Upon these assurances, I resolved to venture to relieve them, if
possible, and to send the old savage and this Spaniard over to them to
treat. But when we had gotten all things in a readiness to go, the
Spaniard himself started an objection, which had so much prudence in it
on one hand, and so much sincerity on the other hand, that I could not
but be very well satisfied in it, and by his advice put off the
deliverance of his comrades for at least half a year. The case was thus.

He had been with us now about a month, during which time I had let him
see in what manner I had provided, with the assistance of Providence,
for my support; and he saw evidently what stock of corn and rice I had
laid up; which, as it was more than sufficient for myself, so it was not
sufficient, at least without good husbandry, for my family, now it was
increased to number four; but much less would it be sufficient if his
countrymen, who were, as he said, fourteen, still alive, should come
over; and least of all would it be sufficient to victual our vessel, if
we should build one, for a voyage to any of the Christian colonies of
America. So he told me he thought it would be more advisable to let him
and the two others dig and cultivate some more land, as much as I could
spare seed to sow; and that we should wait another harvest, that we
might have a supply of corn for his countrymen when they should come;
for want might be a temptation to them to disagree, or not to think
themselves delivered, otherwise than out of one difficulty into another.
"You know," says he, "the children of Israel, though they rejoiced at
first for their being delivered out of Egypt, yet rebelled even against
God Himself, that delivered them, when they came to want bread in the
wilderness."

His caution was so seasonable, and his advice so good, that I could not
but be very well pleased with his proposal, as well as I was satisfied
with his fidelity. So we fell to digging all four of us, as well as the
wooden tools we were furnished with permitted; and in about a month's
time, by the end of which it was seed-time, we had gotten as much land
cured and trimmed up as we sowed twenty-two bushels of barley on, and
sixteen jars of rice; which was, in short, all the seed we had to spare;
nor, indeed, did we leave ourselves barley sufficient for our own food
for the six months that we had to expect our crop; that is to say,
reckoning from the time we set our seed aside for sowing; for it is not
to be supposed it is six months in the ground in that country.

Having now society enough, and our number being sufficient to put us out
of fear of the savages, if they had come, unless their number had been
very great, we went freely all over the island, wherever we found
occasion; and as here we had our escape or deliverance upon our
thoughts, it was impossible, at least for me, to have the means of it
out of mine. To this purpose I marked out several trees which I thought
fit for our work, and I set Friday and his father to cutting them down;
and then I caused the Spaniard, to whom I imparted my thought on that
affair, to oversee and direct their work. I showed them with what
indefatigable pains I had hewed a large tree into single planks, and I
caused them to do the like, till they had made about a dozen large
planks of good oak, near two feet broad, thirty-five feet long, and from
two inches to four inches thick. What prodigious labour it took up, any
one may imagine.

At the same time, I contrived to increase my little flock of tame goats
as much as I could; and to this purpose I made Friday and the Spaniard
go out one day, and myself with Friday the next day, for we took our
turns, and by this means we got above twenty young kids to breed up with
the rest; for whenever we shot the dam, we saved the kids, and added
them to our flock. But above all, the season for curing the grapes
coming on, I caused such a prodigious quantity to be hung up in the sun,
that I believe, had we been at Alicant, where the raisins of the sun are
cured, we could have filled sixty or eighty barrels; and these, with our
bread, was a great part of our food, and very good living too, I assure
you; for it is an exceeding nourishing food.

It was now harvest, and our crop in good order. It was not the most
plentiful increase I had seen in the island, but, however, it was enough
to answer our end; for from our twenty-two bushels we brought in and
thrashed out above two hundred and twenty bushels, and the like in
proportion of the rice; which was store enough for our food to the next
harvest, though all the sixteen Spaniards had been on shore with me; or
if we had been ready for a voyage, it would very plentifully have
victualled our ship to have carried us to any part of the world, that is
to say, of America.

[Illustration: "Had only the affliction, some days after, to see the
corpse of a drowned boy come on shore." (See p. 220.)]

When we had thus housed and secured our magazine of corn, we fell to
work to make more wicker-work, viz., great baskets, in which we kept it;
and the Spaniard was very handy and dexterous at this part, and often
blamed me that I did not make some things for defence of this kind of
work; but I saw no need of it.

And now having a full supply of food for all the guests I expected, I
gave the Spaniard leave to go over to the main, to see what he could do
with those he had left behind him there. I gave him a strict charge in
writing not to bring any man with him who would not first swear, in the
presence of himself and of the old savage, that he would no way injure,
fight with, or attack the person he should find in the island, who was
so kind to send for them in order to their deliverance; but that they
would stand by and defend him against all such attempts, and wherever
they went would be entirely under and subjected to his commands; and
that this should be put in writing, and signed with their hands. How we
were to have this done, when I knew they had neither pen nor ink, that
indeed was a question which we never asked.

Under these instructions, the Spaniard and the old savage, the father of
Friday, went away in one of the canoes which they might be said to come
in, or rather were brought in, when they came as prisoners to be
devoured by the savages.

I gave each of them a musket, with a firelock on it, and about eight
charges of powder and ball, charging them to be very good husbands of
both, and not to use either of them but upon urgent occasion.

This was a cheerful work, being the first measures used by me, in view
of my deliverance, for now twenty-seven years and some days. I gave them
provisions of bread and of dried grapes sufficient for themselves for
many days, and sufficient for all their countrymen for about eight
days' time; and wishing them a good voyage, I see them go, agreeing with
them about a signal they should hang out at their return, by which I
should know them again, when they came back, at a distance, before they
came on shore.

They went away with a fair gale on the day that the moon was at full, by
my account in the month of October; but as for an exact reckoning of
days, after I had once lost it, I could never recover it again; nor had
I kept even the number of years so punctually as to be sure that I was
right, though as it proved, when I afterwards examined my account, I
found I had kept a true reckoning of years.

It was no less than eight days I had waited for them, when a strange and
unforeseen accident intervened, of which the like has not perhaps been
heard of in history. I was fast asleep in my hutch one morning, when my
man Friday came running in to me, and called aloud, "Master, master,
they are come, they are come!"

I jumped up, and, regardless of danger, I went out as soon as I could
get my clothes on, through my little grove, which, by the way, was by
this time grown to be a very thick wood; I say, regardless of danger, I
went without my arms, which was not my custom to do; but I was surprised
when, turning my eyes to the sea, I presently saw a boat at about a
league and a half's distance standing in for the shore, with a
shoulder-of-mutton sail, as they call it, and the wind blowing pretty
fair to bring them in; also I observed presently that they did not come
from that side which the shore lay on, but from the southernmost end of
the island. Upon this I called Friday in, and bid him lie close, for
these were not the people we looked for, and that we might not know yet
whether they were friends or enemies.

In the next place, I went in to fetch my perspective-glass, to see what
I could make of them; and having taken the ladder out, I climbed up to
the top of the hill, as I used to do when I was apprehensive of
anything, and to take my view the plainer, without being discovered.

I had scarce set my foot on the hill, when my eye plainly discovered a
ship lying at an anchor at about two leagues and a half's distance from
me, south-south-east, but not above a league and a half from the shore.
By my observation, it appeared plainly to be an English ship, and the
boat appeared to be an English long-boat.

I cannot express the confusion I was in; though the joy of seeing a
ship, and one who I had reason to believe was manned by my own
countrymen, and consequently friends, was such as I cannot describe. But
yet I had some secret doubts hung about me, I cannot tell from whence
they came, bidding me keep upon my guard. In the first place, it
occurred to me to consider what business an English ship could have in
that part of the world, since it was not the way to or from any part of
the world where the English had any traffic; and I knew there had been
no storms to drive them in there as in distress; and that if they were
English really, it was most probable that they were here upon no good
design; and that I had better continue as I was, than fall into the
hands of thieves and murderers.

Let no man despise the secret hints and notices of danger which
sometimes are given him when he may think there is no possibility of its
being real. That such hints and notices are given us, I believe few that
have made any observation of things can deny; that they are certain
discoveries of an invisible world, and a converse of spirits, we cannot
doubt; and if the tendency of them seems to be to warn us of danger, why
should we not suppose they are from some friendly agent, whether
supreme, or inferior and subordinate, is not the question, and that they
are given for our good?

The present question abundantly confirms me in the justice of this
reasoning; for had I not been made cautious by this secret admonition,
come it from whence it will, I had been undone inevitably, and in a far
worse condition than before, as you will see presently.

I had not kept myself long in this posture, but I saw the boat draw near
the shore, as if they looked for a creek to thrust in at, for the
convenience of landing. However, as they did not come quite far enough,
they did not see the little inlet where I formerly landed my rafts; but
run their boat on shore upon the beach, at about half a mile from me,
which was very happy for me; for otherwise they would have landed just,
as I may say, at my door, and would soon have beaten me out of my
castle, and perhaps have plundered me of all I had.

When they were on shore, I was fully satisfied that they were
Englishmen, at least most of them; one or two I thought were Dutch, but
it did not prove so. There were in all eleven men, whereof three of them
I found were unarmed, and, as I thought, bound; and when the first four
or five of them were jumped on shore, they took those three out of the
boat, as prisoners. One of the three I could perceive using the most
passionate gestures of entreaty, affliction, and despair, even to a kind
of extravagance; the other two, I could perceive, lifted up their hands
sometimes, and appeared concerned indeed, but not to such a degree as
the first.

I was perfectly confounded at the sight, and knew not what the meaning
of it should be. Friday called out to me in English as well as he could,
"O master! you see English mans eat prisoner as well as savage mans."
"Why," says I, "Friday, do you think they are agoing to eat them then?"
"Yes," says Friday, "they will eat them." "No, no," says I, "Friday, I
am afraid they will murder them, indeed, but you may be sure they will
not eat them."

All this while I had no thought of what the matter really was, but stood
trembling with the horror of the sight, expecting every moment when the
three prisoners should be killed; nay, once I saw one of the villains
lift up his arm with a great cutlass, as the seamen call it, or sword,
to strike one of the poor men; and I expected to see him fall every
moment, at which all the blood in my body seemed to run chill in my
veins.

I wished heartily now for my Spaniard, and the savage that was gone with
him; or that I had any way to have come undiscovered within shot of
them, that I might have rescued the three men, for I saw no firearms
they had among them; but it fell out to my mind another way.

After I had observed the outrageous usage of the three men by the
insolent seamen, I observed the fellows run scattering about the land,
as if they wanted to see the country. I observed that the three other
men had liberty to go also where they pleased; but they sat down all
three upon the ground, very pensive, and looked like men in despair.

This put me in mind of the first time when I came on shore, and began to
look about me; how I gave myself over for lost; how wildly I looked
round me; what dreadful apprehensions I had; and how I lodged in the
tree all night, for fear of being devoured by wild beasts.

As I knew nothing that night of the supply I was to receive by the
providential driving of the ship nearer the land by the storms and tide,
by which I have since been so long nourished and supported; so these
three poor desolate men knew nothing how certain of deliverance and
supply they were, how near it was to them, and how effectually and
really they were in a condition of safety, at the same time that they
thought themselves lost, and their case desperate.

So little do we see before us in the world, and so much reason have we
to depend cheerfully upon the great Maker of the world, that He does not
leave His creatures so absolutely destitute, but that, in the worst
circumstances, they have always something to be thankful for, and
sometimes are nearer their deliverance than they imagine; nay, are even
brought to their deliverance by the means by which they seem to be
brought to their destruction.

It was just at the top of high-water when these people came on shore;
and while partly they stood parleying with the prisoners they brought,
and partly while they rambled about to see what kind of a place they
were in, they had carelessly stayed till the tide was spent, and the
water was ebbed considerably away, leaving their boat aground.

They had left two men in the boat, who, as I found afterwards, having
drank a little too much brandy, fell asleep. However, one of them waking
sooner than the other, and finding the boat too fast aground for him to
stir it, hallooed for the rest, who were straggling about, upon which
they all soon came to the boat; but it was past all their strength to
launch her, the boat being very heavy, and the shore on that side being
a soft oozy sand, almost like a quicksand.

In this condition, like true seamen, who are perhaps the least of all
mankind given to forethought, they gave it over, and away they strolled
about the country again; and I heard one of them say aloud to another,
calling them off from the boat, "Why, let her alone, Jack, can't ye? she
will float next tide;" by which I was fully confirmed in the main
inquiry of what countrymen they were.

All this while I kept myself very close, not once daring to stir out of
my castle, any farther than to my place of observation near the top of
the hill; and very glad I was to think how well it was fortified. I knew
it was no less than ten hours before the boat could be on float again,
and by that time it would be dark, and I might be at more liberty to see
their motions, and to hear their discourse, if they had any.

In the meantime, I fitted myself up for a battle, as before, though with
more caution, knowing I had to do with another kind of enemy than I had
at first. I ordered Friday also, whom I had made an excellent marksman
with his gun, to load himself with arms. I took myself two
fowling-pieces, and I gave him three muskets. My figure, indeed, was
very fierce. I had my formidable goat-skin coat on, with the great cap I
have mentioned, a naked sword by my side, two pistols in my belt, and a
gun upon each shoulder.

It was my design, as I said above, not to have made any attempt till it
was dark; but about two o'clock, being the heat of the day, I found
that, in short, they were all gone straggling into the woods, and, as I
thought, were laid down to sleep. The three poor distressed men, too
anxious for their condition to get any sleep, were, however, set down
under the shelter of a great tree, at about a quarter of a mile from me,
and, as I thought, out of sight of any of the rest.

Upon this I resolved to discover myself to them, and learn something of
their condition. Immediately I marched in the figure as above, my man
Friday at a good distance behind me, as formidable for his arms as I,
but not making quite so staring a spectre-like figure as I did.

I came as near them undiscovered as I could, and then, before any of
them saw me, I called aloud to them in Spanish, "What are ye,
gentlemen?"

They started up at the noise, but were ten times more confounded when
they saw me, and the uncouth figure that I made. They made no answer at
all, but I thought I perceived them just going to fly from me, when I
spoke to them in English. "Gentlemen," said I, "do not be surprised at
me; perhaps you may have a friend near you, when you did not expect it."
"He must be sent directly from heaven then," said one of them very
gravely to me, and pulling off his hat at the same time to me, "for our
condition is past the help of man." "All help is from heaven, sir," said
I. "But can you put a stranger in the way how to help you, for you seem
to me to be in some great distress? I saw you when you landed; and when
you seemed to make applications to the brutes that came with you, I saw
one of them lift up his sword to kill you."

The poor man, with tears running down his face, and trembling, looking
like one astonished, returned, "Am I talking to God, or man? Is it a
real man, or an angel?" "Be in no fear about that, sir," said I. "If God
had sent an angel to relieve you, he would have come better clothed, and
armed after another manner than you see me in. Pray lay aside your
fears; I am a man, an Englishman, and disposed to assist you, you see. I
have one servant only; we have arms and ammunition; tell us freely, can
we serve you? What is your case?"

"Our case," said he, "sir, is too long to tell you while our murderers
are so near; but in short, sir, I was commander of that ship; my men
have mutinied against me, they have been hardly prevailed on not to
murder me; and at last have set me on shore in this desolate place, with
these two men with me, one my mate, the other a passenger, where we
expected to perish, believing the place to be uninhabited, and know not
yet what to think of it."

"Where are those brutes, your enemies?" said I. "Do you know where they
are gone?" "There they lie, sir," said he, pointing to a thicket of
trees. "My heart trembles for fear they have seen us, and heard you
speak. If they have, they will certainly murder us all."

"Have they any firearms?" said I. He answered, "they have only two
pieces, and one which they left in the boat." "Well then," said I,
"leave the rest to me, I see they are all asleep; it is an easy thing to
kill them all; but shall we rather take them prisoners?" He told me
there were two desperate villains among them that it was scarce safe to
show any mercy to; but if they were secured, he believed all the rest
would return to their duty. I asked him which they were? He told me he
could not at that distance describe them, but he would obey my orders in
anything I would direct. "Well," says I, "let us retreat out of their
view or hearing, lest they awake, and we will resolve further." So they
willingly went back with me, till the woods covered us from them.

"Look you, sir," said I, "if I venture upon your deliverance, are you
willing to make two conditions with me?" He anticipated my proposals, by
telling me that both he and the ship, if recovered, should be wholly
directed and commanded by me in everything; and if the ship was not
recovered, he would live and die with me in what part of the world
soever I would send him; and the two other men said the same.

"Well," says I, "my conditions are but two. 1. That while you stay on
this island with me, you will not pretend to any authority here; and if
I put arms into your hands, you will, upon all occasions, give them up
to me, and do no prejudice to me or mine upon this island; and in the
meantime, be governed by my orders. 2. That if the ship is, or may be,
recovered, you will carry me and my man to England, passage free."

He gave me all the assurances that the invention and faith of man could
devise that he would comply with these most reasonable demands; and,
besides, would owe his life to me, and acknowledge it upon all
occasions, as long as he lived.

"Well then," said I, "here are three muskets for you, with powder and
ball; tell me next what you think is proper to be done." He showed all
the testimony of his gratitude that he was able, but offered to be
wholly guided by me. I told him I thought it was hard venturing
anything; but the best method I could think of was to fire upon them at
once, as they lay; and if any was not killed at the first volley, and
offered to submit, we might save them, and so put it wholly upon God's
providence to direct the shot.

He said very modestly that he was loth to kill them, if he could help
it; but that those two were incorrigible villains, and had been the
authors of all the mutiny in the ship, and if they escaped, we should be
undone still; for they would go on board and bring the whole ship's
company, and destroy us all. "Well then," says I, "necessity legitimates
my advice, for it is the only way to save our lives." However, seeing
him still cautious of shedding blood, I told him they should go
themselves, and manage as they found convenient.

In the middle of this discourse we heard some of them awake, and soon
after we saw two of them on their feet. I asked him if either of them
were of the men who he had said were the heads of the mutiny? He said,
"No." "Well then," said I, "you may let them escape; and Providence
seems to have wakened them on purpose to save themselves. Now," says I,
"if the rest escape you, it is your fault."

Animated by this, he took the musket I had given him in his hand, and a
pistol in his belt, and his two comrades with him, with each man a piece
in his hand. The two men who were with him going first made some noise,
at which one of the seamen who was awake turned about, and seeing them
coming cried out to the rest; but it was too late then, for the moment
he cried out they fired; I mean the two men, the captain wisely
reserving his own piece. They had so well aimed their shot at the men
they knew, that one of them was killed on the spot, and the other very
much wounded; but not being dead, he started up upon his feet, and
called eagerly for help to the other. But the captain stepping to him,
told him 'twas too late to cry for help, he should call upon God to
forgive his villainy; and with that word knocked him down with the stock
of his musket, so that he never spoke more. There were three more in the
company, and one of them was also slightly wounded. By this time I was
come; and when they saw their danger, and that it was in vain to resist,
they begged for mercy. The captain told them he would spare their lives
if they would give him any assurance of their abhorrence of the
treachery they had been guilty of, and would swear to be faithful to him
in recovering the ship, and afterwards in carrying her back to Jamaica,
from whence they came. They gave him all the protestations of their
sincerity that could be desired, and he was willing to believe them, and
spare their lives, which I was not against, only I obliged him to keep
them bound hand and foot while they were upon the island.

While this was doing, I sent Friday with the captain's mate to the boat,
with orders to secure her, and bring away the oars and sail, which they
did; and by and by three straggling men, that were (happily for them)
parted from the rest, came back upon hearing the guns fired; and seeing
their captain, who before was their prisoner, now their conqueror, they
submitted to be bound also, and so our victory was complete.

It now remained that the captain and I should inquire into one another's
circumstances. I began first, and told him my whole history, which he
heard with an attention even to amazement; and particularly at the
wonderful manner of my being furnished with provisions and ammunition;
and, indeed, as my story is a whole collection of wonders, it affected
him deeply. But when he reflected from thence upon himself, and how I
seemed to have been preserved there on purpose to save his life, the
tears ran down his face, and he could not speak a word more.

After this communication was at an end, I carried him and his two men
into my apartment, leading them in just where I came out, viz., at the
top of the house, where I refreshed them with such provisions as I had,
and showed them all the contrivances I had made during my long, long
inhabiting that place.

All I showed them, all I said to them, was perfectly amazing; but above
all, the captain admired my fortification, and how perfectly I had
concealed my retreat with a grove of trees, which, having been now
planted near twenty years, and the trees growing much faster than in
England, was become a little wood, and so thick, that it was unpassable
in any part of it but at that one side where I had reserved my little
winding passage into it. I told him this was my castle and my
residence, but that I had a seat in the country, as most princes have,
whither I could retreat upon occasion, and I would show him that too
another time; but at present, our business was to consider how to
recover the ship. He agreed with me as to that, but told me he was
perfectly at a loss what measures to take, for that there were still six
and twenty hands on board, who having entered into a cursed conspiracy,
by which they had all forfeited their lives to the law, would be
hardened in it now by desperation, and would carry it on, knowing that
if they were reduced, they should be brought to the gallows as soon as
they came to England, or to any of the English colonies; and that
therefore there would be no attacking them with so small a number as we
were.

I mused for some time upon what he said, and found it was a very
rational conclusion, and that therefore something was to be resolved on
very speedily, as well to draw the men on board into some snare for
their surprise, as to prevent their landing upon us, and destroying us.
Upon this it presently occurred to me that in a little while the ship's
crew, wondering what was become of their comrades, and of the boat,
would certainly come on shore in their other boat to see for them; and
that then, perhaps, they might come armed, and be too strong for us.
This he allowed was rational.

Upon this, I told him the first thing we had to do was to stave the
boat, which lay upon the beach, so that they might not carry her off;
and taking everything out of her, leave her so far useless as not to be
fit to swim. Accordingly we went on board, took the arms which were left
on board out of her, and what else we found there, which was a bottle of
brandy, and another of rum, a few biscuit-cakes, a horn of powder, and a
great lump of sugar in a piece of canvas--the sugar was five or six
pounds; all of which was very welcome to me, especially the brandy and
sugar, of which I had had none left for many years.

When we had carried all these things on shore (the oars, mast, sail, and
rudder of the boat were carried away before, as above), we knocked a
great hole in her bottom that if they had come strong enough to master
us, yet they could not carry off the boat.

Indeed, it was not much in my thoughts that we could be able to recover
the ship; but my view was, that if they went away without the boat, I
did not much question to make her fit again to carry us away to the
Leeward Islands, and call upon our friends the Spaniards in my way; for
I had them still in my thoughts.

While we were thus preparing our designs, and had first, by main
strength, heaved the boat up upon the beach so high that the tide would
not fleet her off at high-water mark; and besides, had broke a hole in
her bottom too big to be quickly stopped, and were sat down musing what
we should do, we heard the ship fire a gun, and saw her make a waft with
her ancient as a signal for the boat to come on board. But no boat
stirred; and they fired several times, making other signals for the
boat.

At last, when all their signals and firings proved fruitless, and they
found the boat did not stir, we saw them, by the help of my glasses,
hoist another boat out, and row towards the shore; and we found, as they
approached, that there was no less than ten men in her, and that they
had firearms with them.

As the ship lay almost two leagues from the shore we had a full view of
them as they came, and a plain sight of the men, even of their faces;
because the tide having set them a little to the east of the other boat,
they rowed up under shore, to come to the same place where the other had
landed, and where the boat lay.

By this means, I say, we had a full view of them, and the captain knew
the persons and characters of all the men in the boat, of whom he said
that there were three very honest fellows, who, he was sure, were led
into this conspiracy by the rest, being overpowered and frighted; but
that as for the boatswain, who, it seems, was the chief officer among
them, and all the rest, they were as outrageous as any of the ship's
crew, and were no doubt made desperate in their new enterprise; and
terribly apprehensive he was that they would be too powerful for us.

I smiled at him, and told him that men in our circumstances were past
the operation of fear; that seeing almost every condition that could be
was better than that which we were supposed to be in, we ought to expect
that the consequence, whether death or life, would be sure to be a
deliverance. I asked him what he thought of the circumstances of my
life, and whether a deliverance were not worth venturing for? "And
where, sir," said I, "is your belief of my being preserved here on
purpose to save your life, which elevated you a little while ago? For my
part," said I, "there seems to be but one thing amiss in all the
prospect of it." "What's that?" says he. "Why," said I, "'tis that, as
you say, there are three or four honest fellows among them, which should
be spared; had they been all of the wicked part of the crew I should
have thought God's providence had singled them out to deliver them into
your hands; for depend upon it, every man of them that comes ashore are
our own, and shall die or live as they behave to us."

As I spoke this with a raised voice and cheerful countenance, I found it
greatly encouraged him; so we set vigorously to our business. We had,
upon the first appearance of the boat's coming from the ship, considered
of separating our prisoners, and had, indeed, secured them effectually.

Two of them, of whom the captain was less assured than ordinary, I sent
with Friday and one of the three delivered men to my cave, where they
were remote enough, and out of danger of being heard or discovered, or
of finding their way out of the woods if they could have delivered
themselves. Here they left them bound, but gave them provisions, and
promised them, if they continued there quietly, to give them their
liberty in a day or two; but that if they attempted their escape, they
should be put to death without mercy. They promised faithfully to bear
their confinement with patience, and were very thankful that they had
such good usage as to have provisions and a light left them; for Friday
gave them candles (such as we made ourselves) for their comfort; and
they did not know but that he stood sentinel over them at the entrance.

The other prisoners had better usage. Two of them were kept pinioned,
indeed, because the captain was not free to trust them; but the other
two were taken into my service, upon their captain's recommendation, and
upon their solemnly engaging to live and die with us; so with them and
the three honest men we were seven men well armed; and I made no doubt
we should be able to deal well enough with the ten that were a-coming,
considering that the captain had said there were three or four honest
men among them also.

As soon as they got to the place where their other boat lay, they ran
their boat into the beach, and came all on shore, hauling the boat up
after them, which I was glad to see; for I was afraid they would rather
have left the boat at an anchor some distance from the shore, with some
hands in her to guard her, and so we should not be able to seize the
boat.

[Illustration: "I got all my cargo on shore, and began to examine the
particulars." (See p. 224.)]

Being on shore, the first thing they did they ran all to their other
boat; and it was easy to see that they were under a great surprise to
find her stripped, as above, of all that was in her, and a great hole in
her bottom.

After they had mused a while upon this, they set up two or three great
shouts, hallooing with all their might, to try if they could make their
companions hear; but all was to no purpose. Then they came all close in
a ring, and fired a volley of their small arms, which, indeed, we heard,
and the echoes made the woods ring. But it was all one; those in the
cave we were sure could not hear, and those in our keeping, though they
heard it well enough, yet durst give no answer to them.

They were so astonished at the surprise of this, that, as they told us
afterwards, they resolved to go all on board again, to their ship, and
let them know there that the men were all murdered, and the long-boat
staved. Accordingly, they immediately launched their boat again, and got
all of them on board.

The captain was terribly amazed, and even confounded at this, believing
they would go on board the ship again, and set sail, giving their
comrades for lost, and so he should still lose the ship, which he was in
hopes we should have recovered; but he was quickly as much frighted the
other way.

They had not been long put off with the boat but we perceived them all
coming on shore again; but with this new measure in their conduct, which
it seems they consulted together upon, viz., to leave three men in the
boat, and the rest to go on shore, and go up into the country to look
for their fellows.

This was a great disappointment to us, for now we were at a loss what to
do; for our seizing those seven men on shore would be no advantage to us
if we let the boat escape, because they would then row away to the
ship, and then the rest of them would be sure to weigh and set sail, and
so our recovering the ship would be lost. However, we had no remedy but
to wait and see what the issue of things might present. The seven men
came on shore, and the three who remained in the boat put her off to a
good distance from the shore, and came to an anchor to wait for them; so
that it was impossible for us to come at them in the boat.

Those that came on shore kept close together, marching towards the top
of the little hill under which my habitation lay; and we could see them
plainly, though they could not perceive us. We could have been very glad
they would have come nearer to us, so that we might have fired at them,
or that they would have gone farther off, that we might have come
abroad.

But when they were come to the brow of the hill, where they could see a
great way into the valleys and woods which lay towards the north-east
part, and where the island lay lowest, they shouted and hallooed till
they were weary; and not caring, it seems, to venture far from the
shore, nor far from one another, they sat down together under a tree, to
consider of it. Had they thought fit to have gone to sleep there, as the
other party of them had done, they had done the job for us; but they
were too full of apprehensions of danger to venture to go to sleep,
though they could not tell what the danger was they had to fear neither.

The captain made a very just proposal to me upon this consultation of
theirs, viz., that perhaps they would all fire a volley again, to
endeavour to make their fellows hear, and that we should all sally upon
them, just at the juncture when their pieces were all discharged, and
they would certainly yield, and we should have them without bloodshed. I
liked the proposal, provided it was done while we were near enough to
come up to them before they could load their pieces again.

But this event did not happen, and we lay still a long time, very
irresolute what course to take. At length I told them there would be
nothing to be done, in my opinion, till night; and then, if they did not
return to the boat, perhaps we might find a way to get between them and
the shore, and so might use some strategem with them in the boat to get
them on shore.

We waited a great while, though very impatient for their removing; and
were very uneasy when, after long consultations, we saw them start all
up, and march down toward the sea. It seems they had such dreadful
apprehensions upon them of the danger of the place, that they resolved
to go on board the ship again, give their companions over for lost, and
so go on with their intended voyage with the ship.

As soon as I perceived them go towards the shore, I imagined it to be,
as it really was, that they had given over their search, and were for
going back again; and the captain, as soon as I told him my thoughts,
was ready to sink at the apprehensions of it; but I presently thought of
a strategem to fetch them back again, and which answered my end to a
tittle.

I ordered Friday and the captain's mate to go over the little creek
westward, towards the place where the savages came on shore when Friday
was rescued, and as soon as they came to a little rising ground, at
about half a mile distance, I bade them halloo as loud as they could,
and wait till they found the seamen heard them; that as soon as ever
they heard the seamen answer them, they should return it again; and then
keeping out of sight, take a round, always answering when the other
hallooed, to draw them as far into the island, and among the woods, as
possible, and then wheel about again to me by such ways as I directed
them.

They were just going into the boat when Friday and the mate hallooed;
and they presently heard them, and answering, ran along the shore
westward, towards the voice they heard, when they were presently stopped
by the creek, where the water being up, they could not get over, and
called for the boat to come up and set them over, as, indeed, I
expected.

When they had set themselves over, I observed that the boat being gone
up a good way into the creek, and, as it were, in a harbour within the
land, they took one of the three men out of her to go along with them,
and left only two in the boat, having fastened her to the stump of a
little tree on the shore.

That was what I wished for; and immediately, leaving Friday and the
captain's mate to their business, I took the rest with me, and crossing
the creek out of their sight, we surprised the two men before they were
aware; one of them lying on shore, and the other being in the boat. The
fellow on shore was between sleeping and waking, and going to start up.
The captain, who was foremost, ran in upon him, and knocked him down,
and then called out to him in the boat to yield, or he was a dead man.

There needed very few arguments to persuade a single man to yield when
he saw five men upon him, and his comrade knocked down; besides, this
was, it seems, one of the three who were not so hearty in the mutiny as
the rest of the crew, and therefore was easily persuaded not only to
yield, but afterwards to join very sincerely with us.

In the meantime, Friday and the captain's mate so well managed their
business with the rest, that they drew them, by hallooing and
answering, from one hill to another, and from one wood to another, till
they not only heartily tired them, but left them where they were very
sure they could not reach back to the boat before it was dark; and,
indeed, they were heartily tired themselves also by the time they came
back to us.

We had nothing now to do but to watch for them in the dark, and to fall
upon them, so as to make sure work with them.

It was several hours after Friday came back to me before they came back
to their boat; and we could hear the foremost of them, long before they
came quite up, calling to those behind to come along, and could also
hear them answer and complain how lame and tired they were, and not able
to come any faster; which was very welcome news to us.

At length they came up to the boat; but 'tis impossible to express their
confusion when they found the boat fast aground in the creek, the tide
ebbed out, and their two men gone. We could hear them call to one
another in a most lamentable manner, telling one another they were
gotten into an enchanted island; that either there were inhabitants in
it, and they should all be murdered, or else there were devils and
spirits in it, and they should be all carried away and devoured.

They hallooed again, and called their two comrades by their names a
great many times; but no answer. After some time we could see them, by
the little light there was, run about, wringing their hands like men in
despair, and that sometimes they would go and sit down in the boat to
rest themselves; then come ashore again, and walk about again, and so
the same thing over again.

My men would fain have me give them leave to fall upon them at once in
the dark; but I was willing to take them at some advantage, so to spare
them, and kill as few of them as I could; and especially I was unwilling
to hazard the killing any of our own men, knowing the other were very
well armed. I resolved to wait, to see if they did not separate; and,
therefore, to make sure of them, I drew my ambuscade nearer, and ordered
Friday and the captain to creep upon their hands and feet, as close to
the ground as they could, that they might not be discovered, and get as
near them as they could possibly, before they offered to fire.

They had not been long in that posture but that the boatswain, who was
the principal ringleader of the mutiny, and had now shown himself the
most dejected and dispirited of all the rest, came walking towards them,
with two more of their crew. The captain was so eager, as having this
principal rogue so much in his power, that he could hardly have patience
to let him come so near as to be sure of him, for they only heard his
tongue before; but when they came nearer, the captain and Friday,
starting up on their feet, let fly at them.

The boatswain was killed upon the spot; the next man was shot into the
body, and fell just by him, though he did not die till an hour or two
after; and the third ran for it.

At the noise of the fire I immediately advanced with my whole army,
which was now eight men, viz., myself, generalissimo; Friday, my
lieutenant-general; the captain and his two men, and the three prisoners
of war, whom we had trusted with arms.

We came upon them, indeed, in the dark, so that they could not see our
number; and I made the man we had left in the boat, who was now one of
us, call to them by name, to try if I could bring them to a parley, and
so might perhaps reduce them to terms, which fell out just as we
desired; for indeed it was easy to think, as their condition then was,
they would be very willing to capitulate. So he calls out as loud as he
could to one of them, "Tom Smith! Tom Smith!" Tom Smith answered
immediately, "Who's that? Robinson?" For it seems he knew his voice. The
other answered, "Ay, ay; for God's sake, Tom Smith, throw down your arms
and yield, or you are all dead men this moment."

"Who must we yield to? Where are they?" says Smith again. "Here they
are," says he; "here's our captain, and fifty men with him, have been
hunting you this two hours; the boatswain is killed, Will Frye is
wounded, and I am a prisoner; and if you do not yield, you are all
lost."

"Will they give us quarter then," says Tom Smith, "and we will yield?"
"I'll go and ask, if you promise to yield," says Robinson. So he asked
the captain, and the captain then calls himself out, "You, Smith, you
know my voice, if you lay down your arms immediately, and submit, you
shall have your lives, all but Will Atkins."

Upon this Will Atkins cried out, "For God's sake, captain, give me
quarter; what have I done? They have been all as bad as I"; which, by
the way, was not true neither; for, it seems, this Will Atkins was the
first man that laid hold of the captain when they first mutinied, and
used him barbarously, in tying his hands, and giving him injurious
language. However, the captain told him he must lay down his arms at
discretion, and trust to the governor's mercy; by which he meant me, for
they all called me governor.

In a word, they all laid down their arms, and begged their lives; and I
sent the man that had parleyed with them and two more, who bound them
all; and then my great army of fifty men, which, particularly with
those three, were all but eight, came up and seized upon them all, and
upon their boat; only that I kept myself and one more out of sight for
reasons of state.

Our next work was to repair the boat, and think of seizing the ship; and
as for the captain, now he had leisure to parley with them, he
expostulated with them upon the villainy of their practices with him,
and at length upon the farther wickedness of their design, and how
certainly it must bring them to misery and distress in the end, and
perhaps to the gallows.

They all appeared very penitent, and begged hard for their lives. As for
that, he told them they were none of his prisoners, but the commander of
the island; that they thought they had set him on shore in a barren,
uninhabited island; but it had pleased God so to direct them that the
island was inhabited, and that the governor was an Englishman; that he
might hang them all there, if he pleased; but as he had given them all
quarter, he supposed he would send them to England, to be dealt with
there as justice required, except Atkins, whom he was commanded by the
governor to advise to prepare for death, for that he would be hanged in
the morning.

Though this was all a fiction of his own, yet it had its desired effect.
Atkins fell upon his knees, to beg the captain to intercede with the
governor for his life; and all the rest begged of him, for God's sake,
that they might not be sent to England.

It now occurred to me that the time of our deliverance was come, and
that it would be a most easy thing to bring these fellows in to be
hearty in getting possession of the ship; so I retired in the dark from
them, that they might not see what kind of a governor they had, and
called the captain to me. When I called, as at a good distance, one of
the men was ordered to speak again, and say to the captain, "Captain,
the commander calls for you." And presently the captain replied, "Tell
his excellency I am just a-coming." This more perfectly amused them, and
they all believed that the commander was just by with his fifty men.

Upon the captain's coming to me, I told him my project for seizing the
ship, which he liked wonderfully well, and resolved to put it in
execution the next morning. But in order to execute it with more art,
and secure of success, I told him we must divide the prisoners, and that
he should go and take Atkins and two more of the worst of them, and send
them pinioned to the cave where the others lay. This was committed to
Friday and the two men who came on shore with the captain.

They conveyed them to the cave, as to a prison. And it was, indeed, a
dismal place, especially to men in their condition. The others I ordered
to my bower, as I called it, of which I have given a full description;
and as it was fenced in, and they pinioned, the place was secure enough,
considering they were upon their behaviour.

To these in the morning I sent the captain, who was to enter into a
parley with them; in a word, to try them, and tell me whether he thought
they might be trusted or no to go on board and surprise the ship. He
talked to them of the injury done him, of the condition they were
brought to; and that though the governor had given them quarter for
their lives as to the present action, yet that if they were sent to
England they would all be hanged in chains, to be sure; but that if they
would join in so just an attempt as to recover the ship, he would have
the governor's engagement for their pardon.

Any one may guess how readily such a proposal would be accepted by men
in their condition. They fell down on their knees to the captain, and
promised, with the deepest imprecations, that they would be faithful to
him to the last drop, and that they should owe their lives to him, and
would go with him all over the world; that they would own him for a
father to them as long as they lived.

"Well," says the captain, "I must go and tell the governor what you say,
and see what I can do to bring him to consent to it." So he brought me
an account of the temper he found them in, and that he verily believed
they would be faithful.

However, that we might be very secure, I told him he should go back
again and choose out five of them, and tell them they might see that he
did not want men, that he; would take out those five to be his
assistants, and that the governor would keep the other two and the three
that were sent prisoners to the castle, my cave, as hostages for the
fidelity of those five; and that if they proved unfaithful in the
execution, the five hostages should be hanged in chains alive upon the
shore.

This looked severe, and convinced them that the governor was in earnest.
However, they had no way left them but to accept it; and it was now the
business of the prisoners, as much as of the captain, to persuade the
other five to do their duty.

Our strength was now thus ordered for the expedition. 1. The captain,
his mate, and passenger. 2. Then the two prisoners of the first gang, to
whom, having their characters from the captain, I had given their
liberty, and trusted them with arms. 3. The other two whom I had kept
till now in my bower, pinioned, but upon the captain's motion had now
released. 4. These five released at last; so that they were twelve in
all, besides five we kept prisoners in the cave for hostages.

I asked the captain if he was willing to venture with these hands on
board the ship; for as for me and my man Friday, I did not think it was
proper for us to stir, having seven men left behind, and it was
employment enough for us to keep them asunder and supply them with
victuals. As to the five in the cave, I resolved to keep them fast; but
Friday went in twice a day to them, to supply them with necessaries, and
I made the other two carry provisions to a certain distance, where
Friday was to take it.

When I showed myself to the two hostages it was with the captain, who
told them I was the person the governor had ordered to look after them,
and that it was the governor's pleasure they should not stir anywhere
but by my direction; that if they did, they should be fetched into the
castle, and be laid in irons; so that as we never suffered them to see
me as governor, so I now appeared as another person, and spoke of the
governor, the garrison, the castle, and the like, upon all occasions.

The captain now had no difficulty before him but to furnish his two
boats, stop the breach of one, and man them. He made his passenger
captain of one, with four other men; and himself, and his mate, and five
more went in the other; and they contrived their business very well, for
they came up to the ship about midnight. As soon as they came within
call of the ship, he made Robinson hail them, and tell them they had
brought off the men and the boat, but that it was a long time before
they had found them, and the like, holding them in a chat till they came
to the ship's side; when the captain and the mate entering first, with
their arms, immediately knocked down the second mate and carpenter with
the butt-end of their muskets, being very faithfully seconded by their
men. They secured all the rest that were upon the main and
quarter-decks, and began to fasten the hatches to keep them down who
were below; when the other boat and their men entering at the
fore-chains, secured the forecastle of the ship, and the scuttle which
went down into the cook-room, making three men they found there
prisoners.

When this was done, and all safe upon deck, the captain ordered the
mate, with three men, to break into the round-house, where the new rebel
captain lay, and having taken the alarm was gotten up, and with two men
and a boy had gotten firearms in their hands; and when the mate with a
crow split open the door, the new captain and his men fired boldly among
them, and wounded the mate with a musket-ball, which broke his arm, and
wounded two more of the men, but killed nobody.

The mate calling for help, rushed however into the round-house, wounded
as he was, and with his pistol shot the new captain through the head,
the bullet entering at his mouth and came out again behind one of his
ears, so that he never spoke a word; upon which the rest yielded, and
the ship was taken effectually, without any more lives lost.

As soon as the ship was thus secured, the captain ordered seven guns to
be fired, which was the signal agreed upon with me to give me notice of
his success, which you may be sure I was very glad to hear, having sat
watching upon the shore for it till near two of the clock in the
morning.

Having thus heard the signal plainly, I laid me down; and it having been
a day of great fatigue to me, I slept very sound, till I was something
surprised with the noise of a gun; and presently starting up, I heard a
man call me by the name of "Governor, Governor," and presently I knew
the captain's voice; when climbing up to the top of the hill, there he
stood, and pointing to the ship, he embraced me in his arms. "My dear
friend and deliverer," says he, "there's your ship, for she is all
yours, and so are we, and all that belong to her." I cast my eyes to
the ship, and there she rode within little more than half a mile of the
shore; for they had weighed her anchor as soon as they were masters of
her, and the weather being fair, had brought her to an anchor just
against the mouth of the little creek, and the tide being up, the
captain had brought the pinnace in near the place where I at first
landed my rafts, and so landed just at my door.

I was at first ready to sink down with the surprise; for I saw my
deliverance, indeed, visibly put into my hands, all things easy, and a
large ship just ready to carry me away whither I pleased to go. At
first, for some time I was not able to answer him one word; but as he
had taken me in his arms, I held fast by him, or I should have fallen to
the ground.

He perceived the surprise, and immediately pulls a bottle out of his
pocket, and gave me a dram of cordial, which he had brought on purpose
for me. After I had drank it, I sat down upon the ground; and though it
brought me to myself, yet it was a good while before I could speak a
word to him.

All this while the poor man was in as great an ecstasy as I, only not
under any surprise, as I was; and he said a thousand kind tender things
to me, to compose me and bring me to myself. But such was the flood of
joy in my breast, that it put all my spirits into confusion. At last it
broke out into tears, and in a little while after I recovered my speech.

Then I took my turn, and embraced him as my deliverer, and we rejoiced
together. I told him I looked upon him as a man sent from heaven to
deliver me, and that the whole transaction seemed to be a chain of
wonders; that such things as these were the testimonies we had of a
secret hand of Providence governing the world, and an evidence that the
eyes of an infinite Power could search into the remotest corner of the
world, and send help to the miserable whenever He pleased.

I forgot not to lift up my heart in thankfulness to heaven; and what
heart could forbear to bless Him, who had not only in a miraculous
manner provided for one in such a wilderness, and in such a desolate
condition, but from whom every deliverance must always be acknowledged
to proceed?

When we had talked a while, the captain told me he had brought me some
little refreshment, such as the ship afforded, and such as the wretches
that had been so long his masters had not plundered him of. Upon this he
called aloud to the boat, and bid his men bring the things ashore that
were for the governor; and, indeed, it was a present as if I had been
one, not that was to be carried away along with them, but as if I had
been to dwell upon the island still, and they were to go without me.

First, he had brought me a case of bottles full of excellent cordial
waters, six large bottles of Madeira wine (the bottles held two quarts
apiece), two pounds of excellent good tobacco, twelve good pieces of the
ship's beef, and six pieces of pork, with a bag of peas, and about a
hundredweight of biscuit.

He brought me also a box of sugar, a box of flour, a bag full of lemons,
and two bottles of lime-juice, and abundance of other things; but
besides these, and what was a thousand times more useful to me, he
brought me six clean new shirts, six very good neckcloths, two pair of
gloves, one pair of shoes, a hat, and one pair of stockings, and a very
good suit of clothes of his own, which had been worn but very little; in
a word, he clothed me from head to foot.

[Illustration: "They were all dancing, in I know not how many barbarous
gestures and figures." (See p. 234.)]

It was a very kind and agreeable present, as any one may imagine, to
one in my circumstances; but never was anything in the world of that
kind so unpleasant, awkward, and uneasy, as it was to me to wear such
clothes at their first putting on.

After these ceremonies passed, and after all his good things were
brought into my little apartment, we began to consult what was to be
done with the prisoners we had; for it was worth considering whether we
might venture to take them away with us or no, especially two of them,
whom we knew to be incorrigible and refractory to the last degree; and
the captain said he knew they were such rogues, that there was no
obliging them; and if he did carry them away, it must be in irons, as
malefactors, to be delivered over to justice at the first English colony
he could come at; and I found that the captain himself was very anxious
about it.

Upon this I told him that, if he desired it, I durst undertake to bring
the two men he spoke of to make it their own request that he should
leave them upon the island. "I should be very glad of that," says the
captain, "with all my heart."

"Well," says I, "I will send for them up, and talk with them for you."
So I caused Friday and the two hostages, for they were now discharged,
their comrades having performed their promise; I say, I caused them to
go to the cave and bring up the five men, pinioned as they were, to the
bower, and keep them there till I came.

After some time I came thither, dressed in my new habit; and now I was
called governor again. Being all met, and the captain with me, I caused
the men to be brought before me, and I told them I had had a full
account of their villainous behaviour to the captain, and how they had
run away with the ship, and were preparing to commit farther robberies,
but that Providence had ensnared them in their own ways, and that they
were fallen into the pit which they had digged for others.

I let them know that by my direction the ship had been seized, that she
lay now in the road, and they might see, by and by, that their new
captain had received the reward of his villainy, for that they might see
him hanging at the yard-arm; that as to them, I wanted to know what they
had to say why I should not execute them as pirates, taken in the fact,
as by my commission they could not doubt I had authority to do.

One of them answered in the name of the rest that they had nothing to
say but this, that when they were taken the captain promised them their
lives, and they humbly implored my mercy. But I told them I knew not
what mercy to show them; for as for myself, I had resolved to quit the
island with all my men, and had taken passage with the captain to go for
England. And as for the captain, he could not carry them to England
other than as prisoners in irons, to be tried for mutiny, and running
away with the ship; the consequence of which, they must needs know,
would be the gallows; so that I could not tell which was best for them,
unless they had a mind to take their fate in the island. If they desired
that, I did not care, as I had liberty to leave it. I had some
inclination to give them their lives, if they thought they could shift
on shore.

They seemed very thankful for it, said they would much rather venture to
stay there than to be carried to England to be hanged; so I left it on
that issue.

However, the captain seemed to make some difficulty of it, as if he
durst not leave them there. Upon this I seemed a little angry with the
captain, and told him that they were my prisoners, not his; and that
seeing I had offered them so much favour, I would be as good as my
word; and that if he did not think fit to consent to it, I would set
them at liberty, as I found them; and if he did not like it, he might
take them again if he could catch them.

Upon this they appeared very thankful, and I accordingly set them at
liberty, and bade them retire into the woods to the place whence they
came, and I would leave them some firearms, some ammunition, and some
directions how they should live very well, if they thought fit.

Upon this I prepared to go on board the ship, but told the captain that
I would stay that night to prepare my things, and desired him to go on
board in the meantime, and keep all right in the ship, and send the boat
on shore the next day for me; ordering him, in the meantime, to cause
the new captain, who was killed, to be hanged at the yard-arm, that
these men might see him.

When the captain was gone, I sent for the men up to me to my apartment,
and entered seriously into discourse with them of their circumstances. I
told them I thought they had made a right choice; that if the captain
carried them away, they would certainly be hanged. I showed them the new
captain hanging at the yard-arm of the ship, and told them they had
nothing less to expect.

When they had all declared their willingness to stay, I then told them I
would let them into the story of my living there, and put them into the
way of making it easy to them. Accordingly I gave them the whole history
of the place, and of my coming to it, showed them my fortifications, the
way I made my bread, planted my corn, cured my grapes; and in a word,
all that was necessary to make them easy. I told them the story also of
the sixteen Spaniards that were to be expected, for whom I left a
letter, and made them promise to treat them in common with themselves.

I left them my firearms, viz., five muskets, three fowling-pieces, and
three swords. I had above a barrel and half of powder left; for after
the first year or two I used but little, and wasted none. I gave them a
description of the way I managed the goats, and directions to milk and
fatten them, and to make both butter and cheese.

In a word, I gave them every part of my own story, and I told them I
would prevail with the captain to leave them two barrels of gunpowder
more, and some garden seeds, which I told them I would have been very
glad of. Also I gave them the bag of peas which the captain had brought
me to eat, and bade them be sure to sow and increase them.

Having done all this, I left them the next day, and went on board the
ship. We prepared immediately to sail, but did not weigh that night. The
next morning early two of the five men came swimming to the ship's side,
and making a most lamentable complaint of the other three, begged to be
taken into the ship for God's sake, for they should be murdered, and
begged the captain to take them on board, though he hanged them
immediately.

Upon this the captain pretended to have no power without me; but after
some difficulty, and after their solemn promises of amendment, they were
taken on board, and were some time after soundly whipped and pickled,
after which they proved very honest and quiet fellows.

Some time after this the boat was ordered on shore, the tide being up,
with the things promised to the men, to which the captain, at my
intercession, caused their chests and clothes to be added, which they
took, and were very thankful for. I also encouraged them by telling them
that if it lay in my way to send any vessel to take them in, I would not
forget them.

When I took leave of this island, I carried on board, for relics, the
great goat-skin cap I had made, my umbrella, and my parrot; also I
forgot not to take the money I formerly mentioned, which had lain by me
so long useless that it was grown rusty or tarnished, and could hardly
pass for silver till it had been a little rubbed and handled; as also
the money I found in the wreck of the Spanish ship.

And thus I left the island, the 19th of December, as I found by the
ship's account, in the year 1686, after I had been upon it eight and
twenty years, two months, and nineteen days, being delivered from this
second captivity the same day of the month that I first made my escape
in the _barco-longo_, from among the Moors of Sallee.

In this vessel, after a long voyage, I arrived in England, the 11th of
June, in the year 1687, having been thirty and five years absent.

When I came to England, I was as perfect a stranger to all the world as
if I had never been known there. My benefactor and faithful steward,
whom I had left in trust with my money, was alive, but had had great
misfortunes in the world, was become a widow the second time, and very
low in the world. I made her easy as to what she owed me, assuring her I
would give her no trouble; but on the contrary, in gratitude to her
former care and faithfulness to me, I relieved her as my little stock
would afford; which, at that time, would indeed allow me to do but
little for her; but I assured her I would never forget her former
kindness to me, nor did I forget her when I had sufficient to help her,
as shall be observed in its place.

I went down afterwards into Yorkshire; but my father was dead, and my
mother and all the family extinct, except that I found two sisters, and
two of the children of one of my brothers; and as I had been long ago
given over for dead, there had been no provision made for me; so that,
in a word, I found nothing to relieve or assist me; and that little
money I had would not do much for me as to settling in the world.

I met with one piece of gratitude, indeed, which I did not expect; and
this was, that the master of the ship whom I had so happily delivered,
and by the same means saved the ship and cargo, having given a very
handsome account to the owners of the manner how I had saved the lives
of the men, and the ship, they invited me to meet them, and some other
merchants concerned, and all together made me a very handsome compliment
upon the subject, and a present of almost £200 sterling.

But after making several reflections upon the circumstances of my life,
and how little way this would go towards settling me in the world, I
resolved to go to Lisbon, and see if I might not come by some
information of the state of my plantation in the Brazils, and of what
was become of my partner, who I had reason to suppose had some years now
given me over for dead.

With this view I took shipping for Lisbon, where I arrived in April
following; my man Friday accompanying me very honestly in all these
ramblings, and proving a most faithful servant upon all occasions.

When I came to Lisbon, I found out, by inquiry, and to my particular
satisfaction, my old friend the captain of the ship who first took me up
at sea off of the shore of Africa. He was now grown old, and had left
off the sea, having put his son, who was far from a young man, into his
ship, and who still used the Brazil trade. The old man did not know me;
and, indeed, I hardly knew him; but I soon brought him to my
remembrance, and as soon brought myself to his remembrance when I told
him who I was.

After some passionate expressions of the old acquaintance, I inquired,
you may be sure, after my plantation and my partner. The old man told me
he had not been in the Brazils for about nine years; but that he could
assure me that, when he came away, my partner was living; but the
trustees, whom I had joined with him to take cognisance of my part, were
both dead. That, however, he believed that I would have a very good
account of the improvement of the plantation; for that upon the general
belief of my being cast away and drowned, my trustees had given in the
account of the produce of my part of the plantation to the
procurator-fiscal, who had appropriated it, in case I never came to
claim it, one-third to the king, and two-thirds to the monastery of St.
Augustine, to be expended for the benefit of the poor, and for the
conversion of the Indians to the Catholic faith; but that if I appeared,
or any one for me, to claim the inheritance, it should be restored; only
that the improvement, or annual production, being distributed to
charitable uses, could not be restored. But he assured me that the
steward of the king's revenue from lands, and the _provedidore_, or
steward of the monastery, had taken great care all along that the
incumbent, that is to say, my partner, gave every year a faithful
account of the produce, of which they received duly my moiety.

I asked him if he knew to what height of improvement he had brought the
plantation, and whether he thought it might be worth looking after; or
whether, on my going thither, I should meet no obstruction to my
possessing my just right in the moiety.

He told me he could not tell exactly to what degree the plantation was
improved; but this he knew, that my partner was growing exceeding rich
upon the enjoying but one-half of it; and that, to the best of his
remembrance, he had heard that the king's third of my part, which was,
it seems, granted away to some other monastery or religious house,
amounted to above two hundred moidores a year. That as to my being
restored to a quiet possession of it, there was no question to be made
of that, my partner being alive to witness my title, and my name being
also enrolled in the register of the country. Also he told me that the
survivors of my two trustees were very fair, honest people, and very
wealthy; and he believed I would not only have their assistance for
putting me in possession, but would find a very considerable sum of
money in their hands for my account, being the produce of the farm while
their fathers held the trust, and before it was given up, as above;
which, as he remembered, was for about twelve years.

I showed myself a little concerned and uneasy at this account, and
inquired of the old captain how it came to pass that the trustees should
thus dispose my effects, when he knew that I had made my will and had
made him, the Portuguese captain, my universal heir, etc.

He told me that was true; but that as there was no proof of my being
dead, he could not act as executor until some certain account should
come of my death; and that besides, he was not willing to intermeddle
with a thing so remote; that it was true he had registered my will, and
put in his claim; and could he have given any account of my being dead
or alive, he would have acted by procuration, and taken possession of
the _ingenio_, so they called the sugar-house, and had given his son,
who was now at the Brazils, order to do it.

"But," says the old man, "I have one piece of news to tell you, which
perhaps may not be so acceptable to you as the rest; and that is, that
believing you were lost, and all the world believing so also, your
partner and trustees did offer to account to me, in your name, for six
or eight of the first years of profits, which I received; but there
being at that time," says he, "great disbursements for increasing the
works, building an _ingenio_, and buying slaves, it did not amount to
near so much as afterwards it produced. However," says the old man, "I
shall give you a true account of what I have received in all, and how I
have disposed of it."

After a few days' farther conference with this ancient friend, he
brought me an account of the six first years' income of my plantation,
signed by my partner and the merchant-trustees, being always delivered
in goods, viz., tobacco in roll, and sugar in chests, besides rum,
molasses, etc., which is the consequence of a sugar-work; and I found,
by this account, that every year the income considerably increased; but,
as above, the disbursement being large, the sum at first was small.
However, the old man let me see that he was debtor to me 470 moidores of
gold, besides 60 chests of sugar, and 15 double rolls of tobacco, which
were lost in his ship, he having been shipwrecked coming home to Lisbon,
about eleven years after my leaving the place.

The good man then began to complain of his misfortunes, and how he had
been obliged to make use of my money to recover his losses, and buy him
a share in a new ship. "However, my old friend," says he, "you shall not
want a supply in your necessity; and as soon as my son returns, you
shall be fully satisfied."

Upon this he pulls out an old pouch, and gives me 160 Portugal moidores
in gold; and giving me the writing of his title to the ship, which his
son was gone to the Brazils in, of which he was a quarter-part owner,
and his son another, he puts them both into my hands for security of the
rest.

I was too much moved with the honesty and kindness of the poor man to be
able to bear this; and remembering what he had done for me, how he had
taken me up at sea, and how generously he had used me on all occasions,
and particularly how sincere a friend he was now to me, I could hardly
refrain weeping at what he said to me; therefore first I asked him if
his circumstances admitted him to spare so much money at that time, and
if it would not straiten him? He told me he could not say but it might
straiten him a little; but, however, it was my money, and I might want
it more than he.

Everything the good man said was full of affection, and I could hardly
refrain from tears while he spoke; in short, I took 100 of the moidores,
and called for a pen and ink to give him a receipt for them. Then I
returned him the rest, and told him if ever I had possession of the
plantation, I would return the other to him also, as, indeed, I
afterwards did; and that as to the bill of sale of his part in his son's
ship, I would not take it by any means; but that if I wanted the money,
I found he was honest enough to pay me; and if I did not, but came to
receive what he gave me reason to expect, I would never have a penny
more from him.

When this was passed, the old man began to ask me if he should put me
into a method to make my claim to my plantation? I told him I thought to
go over to it myself. He said I might do so if I pleased; but that if I
did not, there were ways enough to secure my right, and immediately to
appropriate the profits to my use; and as there were ships in the river
of Lisbon just ready to go away to Brazil, he made me enter my name in a
public register, with his affidavit, affirming, upon oath, that I was
alive, and that I was the same person who took up the land for the
planting the said plantation at first.

This being regularly attested by a notary, and a procuration affixed, he
directed me to send it, with a letter of his writing, to a merchant of
his acquaintance at the place, and then proposed my staying with him
till an account came of the return.

Never anything was more honourable than the proceedings upon this
procuration; for in less than seven months I received a large packet
from the survivors of my trustees, the merchants, for whose account I
went to sea, in which were the following particular letters and papers
enclosed.

First, there was the account-current of the produce of my farm or
plantation from the year when their fathers had balanced with my old
Portugal captain, being for six years; the balance appeared to be 1174
moidores in my favour.

Secondly, there was the account of four years more, while they kept the
effects in their hands, before the government claimed the
administration, as being the effects of a person not to be found, which
they called civil death; and the balance of this, the value of the
plantation increasing, amounting to 38,892 crusadoes, which made 3241
moidores.

Thirdly, there was the prior of the Augustines' account, who had
received the profits for above fourteen years; but not being to account
for what was disposed to the hospital, very honestly declared he had 872
moidores not distributed, which he acknowledged to my account; as to the
king's part, that refunded nothing.

There was a letter of my partner's, congratulating me very
affectionately upon my being alive, giving me an account how the estate
was improved, and what it produced a year, with a particular of the
number of squares or acres that it contained; how planted, how many
slaves there were upon it, and making two and twenty crosses for
blessings, told me he had said so many _Ave Marias_ to thank the blessed
Virgin that I was alive; inviting me very passionately to come over and
take possession of my own; and in the meantime, to give him orders to
whom he should deliver my effects, if I did not come myself; concluding
with a hearty tender of his friendship, and that of his family; and sent
me as a present seven fine leopards' skins, which he had, it seems,
received from Africa by some other ship which he had sent thither, and
who, it seems, had made a better voyage than I. He sent me also five
chests of excellent sweetmeats, and a hundred pieces of gold uncoined,
not quite so large as moidores. By the same fleet, my two merchant
trustees shipped me 1200 chests of sugar, 800 rolls of tobacco, and the
rest of the whole account in gold.

I might well say now, indeed, that the latter end of Job was better than
the beginning. It is impossible to express the flutterings of my very
heart when I looked over these letters, and especially when I found all
my wealth about me; for as the Brazil ships come all in fleets, the same
ships which brought my letters brought my goods, and the effects were
safe in the river before the letters came to my hand. In a word, I
turned pale, and grew sick; and had not the old man run and fetched me a
cordial, I believe the sudden surprise of joy had overset Nature, and I
had died upon the spot.

Nay, after that I continued very ill, and was so some hours, till a
physician being sent for, and something of the real cause of my illness
being known, he ordered me to be let blood, after which I had relief,
and grew well; but I verily believe, if it had not been eased by a vent
given in that manner to the spirits, I should have died.

I was now master, all on a sudden, of above £5000 sterling in money,
and had an estate, as I might well call it, in the Brazils of above a
thousand pounds a year, as sure as an estate of lands in England; and in
a word, I was in a condition which I scarce knew how to understand, or
how to compose myself for the enjoyment of it.

The first thing I did was to recompense my original benefactor, my good
old captain, who had been first charitable to me in my distress, kind to
me in my beginning, and honest to me at the end. I showed him all that
was sent me. I told him that, next to the providence of Heaven, which
disposes all things, it was owing to him; and that it now lay on me to
reward him, which I would do a hundredfold. So I first returned to him
the hundred moidores I had received of him; then I sent for a notary,
and caused him to draw up a general release or discharge for the 470
moidores which he had acknowledged he owed me in the fullest and firmest
manner possible; after which I caused a procuration to be drawn,
empowering him to be my receiver of the annual profits of my plantation,
and appointing my partner to account to him, and make the returns by the
usual fleets to him in my name; and a clause in the end, being a grant
of 100 moidores a year to him, during his life, out of the effects, and
50 moidores a year to his son after him, for his life; and thus I
requited my old man.

I was now to consider which way to steer my course next, and what to do
with the estate that Providence had thus put into my hands; and, indeed,
I had more care upon my head now than I had in my silent state of life
in the island, where I wanted nothing but what I had, and had nothing
but what I wanted; whereas I had now a great charge upon me, and my
business was how to secure it. I had ne'er a cave now to hide my money
in, or a place where it might lie without lock or key till it grew
mouldy and tarnished before anybody would meddle with it. On the
contrary, I knew not where to put it, or whom to trust with it. My old
patron, the captain, indeed, was honest, and that was the only refuge I
had.

In the next place, my interest in the Brazils seemed to summon me
thither; but now I could not tell how to think of going thither till I
had settled my affairs, and left my effects in some safe hands behind
me. At first I thought of my old friend the widow, who I knew was
honest, and would be just to me; but then she was in years, and but
poor, and for aught I knew might be in debt; so that, in a word, I had
no way but to go back to England myself, and take my effects with me.

It was some months, however, before I resolved upon this; and therefore,
as I had rewarded the old captain fully, and to his satisfaction, who
had been my former benefactor, so I began to think of my poor widow,
whose husband had been my first benefactor, and she, while it was in her
power, my faithful steward and instructor. So the first thing I did, I
got a merchant in Lisbon to write to his correspondent in London, not
only to pay a bill, but to go find her out, and carry her in money an
hundred pounds from me, and to talk with her, and comfort her in her
poverty, by telling her she should, if I lived, have a further supply.
At the same time I sent my two sisters in the country each of them an
hundred pounds, they being, though not in want, yet not in very good
circumstances; one having been married, and left a widow; and the other
having a husband not so kind to her as he should be.

But among all my relations or acquaintances, I could not yet pitch upon
one to whom I durst commit the gross of my stock, that I might go away
to the Brazils, and leave things safe behind me; and this greatly
perplexed me.

[Illustration: "I entered the wood . . . Friday following close at my
heels." (See p. 270.)]

I had once a mind to have gone to the Brazils and have settled myself
there, for I was, as it were, naturalised to the place. But I had some
little scruple in my mind about religion, which insensibly drew me back,
of which I shall say more presently. However, it was not religion that
kept me from going there for the present; and as I had made no scruple
of being openly of the religion of the country all the while I was among
them, so neither did I yet; only that, now and then, having of late
thought more of it than formerly, when I began to think of living and
dying among them, I began to regret my having professed myself a papist,
and thought it might not be the best religion to die with.

But, as I have said, this was not the main thing that kept me from going
to the Brazils, but that really I did not know with whom to leave my
effects behind me; so I resolved, at last, to go to England with it,
where, if I arrived, I concluded I should make some acquaintance, or
find some relations, that would be faithful to me; and accordingly I
prepared to go for England with all my wealth.

In order to prepare things for my going home, I first, the Brazil fleet
being just going away, resolved to give answers suitable to the just and
faithful account of things I had from thence. And first, to the prior of
St. Augustine I wrote a letter full of thanks for their just dealings,
and the offer of the 872 moidores which was undisposed of, which I
desired might be given, 500 to the monastery, and 372 to the poor, as
the prior should direct, desiring the good padre's prayers for me, and
the like.

I wrote next a letter of thanks to my two trustees, with all the
acknowledgment that so much justice and honesty called for. As for
sending them any present, they were far above having any occasion of it.

Lastly, I wrote to my partner, acknowledging his industry in the
improving the plantation, and his integrity in increasing the stock of
the works, giving him instructions for his future government of my part,
according to the powers I had left with my old patron, to whom I desired
him to send whatever became due to me till he should hear from me more
particularly; assuring him that it was my intention not only to come to
him, but to settle myself there for the remainder of my life. To this I
added a very handsome present of some Italian silks for his wife and two
daughters, for such the captain's son informed me he had, with two
pieces of fine English broadcloth, the best I could get in Lisbon, five
pieces of black baize, and some Flanders lace of a good value.

Having thus settled my affairs, sold my cargo, and turned all my effects
into good bills of exchange, my next difficulty was which way to go to
England. I had been accustomed enough to the sea, and yet I had a
strange aversion to going to England by sea at that time; and though I
could give no reason for it, yet the difficulty increased upon me so
much, that though I had once shipped my baggage in order to go, yet I
altered my mind, and that not once, but two or three times.

It is true I had been very unfortunate by sea, and this might be some of
the reason; but let no man slight the strong impulses of his own
thoughts in cases of such moment. Two of the ships which I had singled
out to go in, I mean more particularly singled out than any other, that
is to say, so as in one of them to put my things on board, and in the
other to have agreed with the captain; I say, two of these ships
miscarried, viz., one was taken by the Algerines, and the other was cast
away on the Start, near Torbay, and all the people drowned except three;
so that in either of those vessels I had been made miserable; and in
which most, it was hard to say.

Having been thus harassed in my thoughts, my old pilot, to whom I
communicated everything, pressed me earnestly not to go by sea, but
either to go by land to the Groyne, and cross over the Bay of Biscay to
Rochelle, from whence it was but an easy and safe journey by land to
Paris, and so to Calais and Dover; or to go up to Madrid, and so all the
way by land through France.

In a word, I was so prepossessed against my going by sea at all, except
from Calais to Dover, that I resolved to travel all the way by land;
which, as I was not in haste, and did not value the charge, was by much
the pleasanter way. And to make it more so, my old captain brought an
English gentleman, the son of a merchant in Lisbon, who was willing to
travel with me; after which we picked up two more English merchants
also, and two young Portuguese gentlemen, the last going to Paris only;
so that we were in all six of us, and five servants; the two merchants
and the two Portuguese contenting themselves with one servant between
two, to save the charge; and as for me, I got an English sailor to
travel with me as a servant, besides my man Friday, who was too much a
stranger to be capable of supplying the place of a servant on the road.

In this manner I set out from Lisbon; and our company being all very
well mounted and armed, we made a little troop, whereof they did me the
honour to call me captain, as well because I was the oldest man, as
because I had two servants, and indeed was the original of the whole
journey.

As I have troubled you with none of my sea journals, so I shall trouble
you now with none of my land journal; but some adventures that happened
to us in this tedious and difficult journey I must not omit.

When we came to Madrid, we being all of us strangers to Spain, were
willing to stay some time to see the court of Spain, and to see what
was worth observing; but it being the latter part of the summer we
hastened away, and set out from Madrid about the middle of October; but
when we came to the edge of Navarre, we were alarmed at several towns on
the way with an account that so much snow was fallen on the French side
of the mountains, that several travellers were obliged to come back to
Pampeluna after having attempted, at an extreme hazard, to pass on.

When we came to Pampeluna itself, we found it so indeed; and to me, that
had been always used to a hot climate, and indeed to countries where we
could scarce bear any clothes on, the cold was insufferable; nor indeed
was it more painful than it was surprising to come but ten days before
out of the Old Castile, where the weather was not only warm, but very
hot, and immediately to feel a wind from the Pyrenean mountains so very
keen, so severely cold, as to be intolerable, and to endanger benumbing
and perishing of our fingers and toes.

Poor Friday was really frighted when he saw the mountains all covered
with snow, and felt cold weather, which he had never seen or felt before
in his life.

To mend the matter, when we came to Pampeluna it continued snowing with
so much violence, and so long, that the people said winter was come
before its time; and the roads, which were difficult before, were now
quite impassable; for, in a word, the snow lay in some places too thick
for us to travel, and being not hard frozen, as is the case in northern
countries, there was no going without being in danger of being buried
alive every step. We stayed no less than twenty days at Pampeluna; when
seeing the winter coming on, and no likelihood of its being better, for
it was the severest winter all over Europe that had been known in the
memory of man, I proposed that we should all go away to Fontarabia, and
there take shipping for Bordeaux, which was a very little voyage.

But while we were considering this, there came in four French gentlemen,
who having been stopped on the French side of the passes, as we were on
the Spanish, had found out a guide, who, traversing the country near the
head of Languedoc, had brought them over the mountains by such ways,
that they were not much incommoded with the snow; and where they met
with snow in any quantity, they said it was frozen hard enough to bear
them and their horses.

We sent for this guide, who told us he would undertake to carry us the
same way with no hazard from the snow, provided we were armed
sufficiently to protect us from wild beasts; for he said, upon these
great snows it was frequent for some wolves to show themselves at the
foot of the mountains, being made ravenous for want of food, the ground
being covered with snow. We told him we were well enough prepared for
such creatures as they were, if he would ensure us from a kind of
two-legged wolves, which, we were told, we were in most danger from,
especially on the French side of the mountains.

He satisfied us there was no danger of that kind in the way that we were
to go; so we readily agreed to follow him, as did also twelve other
gentlemen, with their servants, some French, some Spanish, who, as I
said, had attempted to go, and were obliged to come back again.

Accordingly we all set out from Pampeluna, with our guide, on the 15th
of November; and, indeed, I was surprised when, instead of going
forward, he came directly back with us on the same road that we came
from Madrid, about twenty miles; when being passed two rivers, and come
into the plain country, we found ourselves in a warm climate again,
where the country was pleasant, and no snow to be seen; but on a sudden,
turning to his left, he approached the mountains another way; and
though it is true the hills and precipices looked dreadful, yet he made
so many tours, such meanders, and led us by such winding ways, that we
were insensibly passed the height of the mountains without being much
encumbered with the snow; and all on a sudden he showed us the pleasant
fruitful provinces of Languedoc and Gascoign, all green and flourishing,
though, indeed, it was at a great distance, and we had some rough way to
pass yet.

We were a little uneasy, however, when we found it snowed one whole day
and a night so fast, that we could not travel; but he bid us be easy, we
should soon be past it all. We found, indeed, that we began to descend
every day, and to come more north than before; and so, depending upon
our guide, we went on.

It was about two hours before night when, our guide being something
before us, and not just in sight, out rushed three monstrous wolves, and
after them a bear, out of a hollow way adjoining to a thick wood. Two of
the wolves flew upon the guide, and had he been half a mile before us he
had been devoured indeed before we could have helped him. One of them
fastened upon his horse, and the other attacked the man with that
violence, that he had not time, or not presence of mind enough, to draw
his pistol, but hallooed and cried out to us most lustily. My man Friday
being next to me, I bid him ride up, and see what was the matter. As
soon as Friday came in sight of the man, he hallooed as loud as t'other,
"O master! O master!" but, like a bold fellow, rode directly up to the
poor man, and with his pistol shot the wolf that attacked him into the
head.

It was happy for the poor man that it was my man Friday, for he having
been used to that kind of creature in his country, had no fear upon him,
but went close up to him and shot him, as above; whereas any of us
would have fired at a farther distance, and have perhaps either missed
the wolf, or endangered shooting the man.

But it was enough to have terrified a bolder man than I; and, indeed, it
alarmed all our company, when, with the noise of Friday's pistol, we
heard on both sides the dismallest howling of wolves; and the noise,
redoubled by the echo of the mountains, that it was to us as if there
had been a prodigious multitude of them; and perhaps indeed there was
not such a few as that we had no cause of apprehensions.

However, as Friday had killed this wolf, the other that had fastened
upon the horse left him immediately and fled, having happily fastened
upon his head, where the bosses of the bridle had stuck in his teeth, so
that he had not done him much hurt. The man indeed was most hurt; for
the raging creature had bit him twice, once on the arm, and the other
time a little above his knee; and he was just as it were tumbling down
by the disorder of his horse, when Friday came up and shot the wolf.

It is easy to suppose that at the noise of Friday's pistol we all mended
our pace, and rid up as fast as the way, which was very difficult, would
give us leave, to see what was the matter. As soon as we came clear of
the trees, which blinded us before, we saw clearly what had been the
case, and how Friday had disengaged the poor guide, though we did not
presently discern what kind of creature it was he had killed.

But never was a fight managed so hardily, and in such a surprising
manner, as that which followed between Friday and the bear, which gave
us all, though at first we were surprised and afraid for him, the
greatest diversion imaginable. As the bear is a heavy, clumsy creature,
and does not gallop as the wolf does, who is swift and light, so he has
two particular qualities, which generally are the rule of his actions:
first, as to men, who are not his proper prey; I say, not his proper
prey, because, though I cannot say what excessive hunger might do, which
was now their case, the ground being all covered with snow; but as to
men, he does not usually attempt them, unless they first attack him. On
the contrary, if you meet him in the woods, if you don't meddle with
him, he won't meddle with you; but then you must take care to be very
civil to him, and give him the road, for he is a very nice gentleman. He
won't go a step out of his way for a prince; nay, if you are really
afraid, your best way is to look another way, and keep going on; for
sometimes if you stop, and stand still, and look steadily at him, he
takes it for an affront; but if you throw or toss anything at him, and
it hits him, though it were but a bit of a stick as big as your finger,
he takes it for an affront, and sets all his other business aside to
pursue his revenge; for he will have satisfaction in point of honour.
That is his first quality; the next is, that if he be once affronted, he
will never leave you, night or day, till he has his revenge, but
follows, at a good round rate, till he overtakes you.

My man Friday had delivered our guide, and when we came up to him he was
helping him off from his horse; for the man was both hurt and frighted,
and indeed the last more than the first; when, on the sudden, we spied
the bear come out of the wood, and a vast monstrous one it was, the
biggest by far that ever I saw. We were all a little surprised when we
saw him; but when Friday saw him, it was easy to see joy and courage in
the fellow's countenance. "O! O! O!" says Friday, three times pointing
to him. "O master! you give me te leave; me shakee te hand with him; me
make you good laugh."

I was surprised to see the fellow so pleased. "You fool you," says I,
"he will eat you up." "Eatee me up! eatee me up!" says Friday, twice
over again; "me eatee him up; me make you good laugh; you all stay here,
me show you good laugh." So down he sits, and gets his boots off in a
moment, and put on a pair of pumps, as we call the flat shoes they wear,
and which he had in his pocket, gives my other servant his horse, and
with his gun away he flew, swift like the wind.

The bear was walking softly on, and offered to meddle with nobody till
Friday, coming pretty near, calls to him, as if the bear could
understand him, "Hark ye, hark ye," says Friday, "me speakee wit you."
We followed at a distance; for now being come down on the Gascoign side
of the mountains, we were entered a vast great forest, where the country
was plain and pretty open, though many trees in it scattered here and
there.

Friday, who had, as we say, the heels of the bear, came up with him
quickly, and takes up a great stone and throws at him, and hit him just
on the head, but did him no more harm than if he had thrown it against a
wall. But it answered Friday's end, for the rogue was so void of fear,
that he did it purely to make the bear follow him, and show us some
laugh, as he called it.

As soon as the bear felt the stone, and saw him, he turns about, and
comes after him, taking devilish long strides, and shuffling along at a
strong rate, so as would have put a horse to a middling gallop. Away
runs Friday, and takes his course as if he run towards us for help; so
we all resolved to fire at once upon the bear, and deliver my man;
though I was angry at him heartily for bringing the bear back upon us,
when he was going about his own business another way; and especially I
was angry that he had turned the bear up on us, and then run away; and I
called out, "You dog," said I, "is this your making us laugh? Come
away, and take your horse, that we may shoot the creature." He hears me,
and cries out, "No, shoot, no shoot; stand still, you get much laugh."
And as the nimble creature run two feet for the beast's one, he turned
on a sudden, on one side of us, and seeing a great oak tree fit for his
purpose, he beckoned to us to follow; and doubling his pace, he gets
nimbly up the tree, laying his gun down upon the ground, at about five
or six yards from the bottom of the tree.

The bear soon came to the tree, and we followed at a distance. The first
thing he did, he stopped at the gun, smelt to it, but let it lie, and up
he scrambles into the tree, climbing like a cat, though so monstrously
heavy. I was amazed at the folly, as I thought it, of my man, and could
not for my life see anything to laugh at yet, till seeing the bear get
up the tree, we all rode nearer to him.

When we came to the tree, there was Friday got out to the small end of a
large limb of the tree, and the bear got about half way to him. As soon
as the bear got out to that part where the limb of the tree was weaker,
"Ha!" says he to us, "now you see me teachee the bear dance." So he
falls a-jumping and shaking the bough, at which the bear began to
totter, but stood still, and began to look behind him, to see how he
should get back. Then, indeed, we did laugh heartily. But Friday had not
done with him by a great deal. When he sees him stand still, he calls
out to him again, as if he had supposed the bear could speak English,
"What, you no come farther? pray you come farther"; so he left jumping
and shaking the tree; and the bear, just as if he had understood what he
said, did come a little farther; then he fell a-jumping again, and the
bear stopped again.

We thought now was a good time to knock him on the head, and I called to
Friday to stand still, and we would shoot the bear; but he cried out
earnestly, "O pray! O pray! no shoot, me shoot by and then"; he would
have said by and by. However, to shorten the story, Friday danced so
much, and the bear stood so ticklish, that we had laughing enough
indeed, but still could not imagine what the fellow would do; for first
we thought he depended upon shaking the bear off; and we found the bear
was too cunning for that too; for he would not go out far enough to be
thrown down, but clings fast with his great broad claws and feet, so
that we could not imagine what would be the end of it, and where the
jest would be at last.

But Friday put us out of doubt quickly; for seeing the bear cling fast
to the bough, and that he would not be persuaded to come any farther,
"Well, well," says Friday, "you no come farther, me go, me go; you no
come to me, me go come to you"; and upon this he goes out to the
smallest end of the bough, where it would bend with his weight, and
gently lets himself down by it, sliding down the bough till he came near
enough to jump down on his feet, and away he ran to his gun, takes it
up, and stands still.

"Well," said I to him, "Friday, what will you do now? Why don't you
shoot him?" "No shoot," says Friday, "no yet; me shoot now, me no kill;
me stay, give you one more laugh." And, indeed, so he did, as you will
see presently; for when the bear sees his enemy gone, he comes back from
the bough where he stood, but did it mighty leisurely, looking behind
him every step, and coming backward till he got into the body of the
tree; then with the same hinder end foremost he comes down the tree,
grasping it with his claws, and moving one foot at a time, very
leisurely. At this juncture, and just before he could set his hind feet
upon the ground, Friday stepped up close to him, clapped the muzzle of
his piece into his ear, and shot him dead as a stone.

Then the rogue turned about to see if we did not laugh; and when he saw
we were pleased by our looks, he falls a-laughing himself very loud. "So
we kill bear in my country," says Friday. "So you kill them?" says I;
"why, you have no guns." "No" says he, "no gun, but shoot great much
long arrow."

This was indeed a good diversion to us; but we were still in a wild
place, and our guide very much hurt, and what to do we hardly knew. The
howling of wolves ran much in my head; and indeed, except the noise I
once heard on the shore of Africa, of which I have said something
already, I never heard anything that filled me with so much horror.

These things, and the approach of night, called us off, or else, as
Friday would have had us, we should certainly have taken the skin of
this monstrous creature off, which was worth saving; but we had three
leagues to go, and our guide hastened us; so we left him, and went
forward on our journey.

The ground was still covered with snow, though not so deep and dangerous
as on the mountains; and the ravenous creatures, as we heard afterwards,
were come down into the forest and plain country, pressed by hunger, to
seek for food, and had done a great deal of mischief in the villages,
where they surprised the country people, killed a great many of their
sheep and horses, and some people too.

We had one dangerous place to pass, which our guide told us if there
were any more wolves in the country we should find them there; and this
was in a small plain, surrounded with woods on every side, and a long
narrow defile, or lane, which we were to pass to get through the wood,
and then we should come to the village where we were to lodge.

It was within half an hour of sunset when we entered the first wood, and
a little after sunset when we came into the plain. We met with nothing
in the first wood, except that, in a little plain within the wood, which
was not above two furlongs over, we saw five great wolves cross the
road, full speed, one after another, as if they had been in chase of
some prey, and had it in view; they took no notice of us, and were gone
and out of our sight in a few moments. Upon this our guide, who, by the
way, was a wretched faint-hearted fellow, bid us keep in a ready
posture, for he believed there were more wolves a-coming.

We kept our arms ready, and our eyes about us; but we saw no more wolves
till we came through that wood, which was near half a league, and
entered the plain. As soon as we came into the plain we had occasion
enough to look about us. The first object we met with was a dead horse,
that it so say, a poor horse which the wolves had killed, and at least a
dozen of them at work; we could not say eating of him, but picking of
his bones rather, for they had eaten up all the flesh before.

We did not think fit to disturb them at their feast, neither did they
take much notice of us. Friday would have let fly at them, but I would
not suffer him by any means, for I found we were like to have more
business upon our hands than we were aware of. We were not gone half
over the plain, but we began to hear the wolves howl in the wood on our
left in a frightful manner, and presently after we saw about a hundred
coming on directly towards us, all in a body, and most of them in a
line, as regularly as an army drawn up by experienced officers. I scarce
knew in what manner to receive them, but found to draw ourselves in a
close line was the only way; so we formed in a moment; but that we
might not have too much interval, I ordered that only every other man
should fire, and that the others who had not fired should stand ready to
give them a second volley immediately, if they continued to advance upon
us; and that then those who had fired at first should not pretend to
load their fusees again, but stand ready with every one a pistol, for we
were all armed with a fusee and a pair of pistols each man; so we were,
by this method, able to fire six volleys, half of us at a time. However,
at present we had no necessity; for upon firing the first volley the
enemy made a full stop, being terrified as well with the noise as with
the fire. Four of them being shot into the head, dropped; several others
were wounded, and went bleeding off, as we could see by the snow. I
found they stopped, but did not immediately retreat; whereupon,
remembering that I had been told that the fiercest creatures were
terrified at the voice of a man, I caused all our company to halloo as
loud as we could; and I found the notion not altogether mistaken, for
upon our shout they began to retire and turn about. Then I ordered a
second volley to be fired in their rear, which put them to the gallop,
and away they went to the woods.

This gave us leisure to charge our pieces again; and that we might lose
no time, we kept going. But we had but little more than loaded our
fusees, and put ourselves into a readiness, when we heard a terrible
noise in the same wood, on our left, only that it was farther onward,
the same way we were to go.

[Illustration: "Here they left them bound." (See p. 302.)]

The night was coming on, and the light began to be dusky, which made it
worse on our side; but the noise increasing, we could easily perceive
that it was the howling and yelling of those hellish creatures; and on a
sudden, we perceived two or three troops of wolves, one on our left,
one behind us, and one on our front, so that we seemed to be surrounded
with them. However, as they did not fall upon us, we kept our way
forward as fast as we could make our horses go, which, the way being
very rough, was only a good large trot, and in this manner we came in
view of the entrance of a wood, through which we were to pass, at the
farther side of the plain; but we were greatly surprised when, coming
nearer the lane, or pass, we saw a confused number of wolves standing
just at the entrance.

On a sudden, at another opening of the wood, we heard the noise of a
gun, and looking that way, out rushed a horse, with a saddle and a
bridle on him, flying like the wind, and sixteen or seventeen wolves
after him, full speed; indeed, the horse had the heels of them; but as
we supposed that he could not hold it at that rate, we doubted not but
they would get up with him at last, and no question but they did.

But here we had a most horrible sight; for riding up to the entrance
where the horse came out, we found the carcass of another horse and of
two men, devoured by the ravenous creatures; and one of the men was no
doubt the same whom we heard fire the gun, for there lay a gun just by
him fired off; but as to the man, his head and the upper part of his
body was eaten up.

This filled us with horror, and we knew not what course to take; but the
creatures resolved us soon, for they gathered about us presently in
hopes of prey, and I verily believe there were three hundred of them. It
happened very much to our advantage that, at the entrance into the wood,
but a little way from it, there lay some large timber-trees, which had
been cut down the summer before, and I suppose lay there for carriage. I
drew my little troop in among those trees, and placing ourselves in a
line behind one long tree, I advised them all to light, and keeping
that tree before us for a breastwork, to stand in a triangle, or three
fronts, enclosing our horses in the centre.

We did so, and it was well we did; for never was a more furious charge
than the creatures made upon us in the place. They came on us with a
growling kind of a noise, and mounted the piece of timber, which, as I
said, was our breastwork, as if they were only rushing upon their prey;
and this fury of theirs, it seems, was principally occasioned by their
seeing our horses behind us, which was the prey they aimed at. I ordered
our men to fire as before, every other man; and they took their aim so
sure, that indeed they killed several of the wolves at the first volley;
but there was a necessity to keep a continual firing, for they came on
like devils, those behind pushing on those before.

When we had fired our second volley of our fusees, we thought they
stopped a little, and I hoped they would have gone off; but it was but a
moment, for others came forward again; so we fired two volleys of our
pistols; and I believe in these four firings we had killed seventeen or
eighteen of them, and lamed twice as many, yet they came on again.

I was loth to spend our last shot too hastily; so I called my servant,
not my man Friday, for he was better employed, for with the greatest
dexterity imaginable he had charged my fusee and his own while we were
engaged; but as I said, I called my other man, and giving him a horn of
powder, I bade him lay a train all along the piece of timber, and let it
be a large train. He did so, and had but just time to get away when the
wolves came up to it, and some were got up upon it, when I, snapping an
uncharged pistol close to the powder, set it on fire. Those that were
upon the timber were scorched with it, and six or seven of them fell,
or rather jumped, in among us with the force and fright of the fire. We
despatched these in an instant, and the rest were so frighted with the
light, which the night, for it was now very near dark, made more
terrible, that they drew back a little; upon which I ordered our last
pistol to be fired off in one volley, and after that we gave a shout.
Upon this the wolves turned tail, and we sallied immediately upon near
twenty lame ones, whom we found struggling on the ground, and fell
a-cutting them with our swords, which answered our expectation; for the
crying and howling they made was better understood by their fellows, so
that they all fled and left us.

We had, first and last, killed about threescore of them, and had it been
daylight we had killed many more. The field of battle being thus
cleared, we made forward again, for we had still near a league to go. We
heard the ravenous creatures howl and yell in the woods as we went
several times, and sometimes we fancied we saw some of them, but the
snow dazzling our eyes, we were not certain. So in about an hour more we
came to the town where we were to lodge, which we found in a terrible
fright, and all in arms; for it seems that the night before the wolves
and some bears had broke into the village in the night, and put them in
a terrible fright; and they were obliged to keep guard night and day,
but especially in the night, to preserve their cattle, and, indeed,
their people.

The next morning our guide was so ill, and his limbs swelled with the
rankling of his two wounds, that he could go no farther; so we were
obliged to take a new guide there, and go to Toulouse, where we found a
warm climate, a fruitful, pleasant country, and no snow, no wolves, or
anything like them. But when we told our story at Toulouse, they told us
it was nothing but what was ordinary in the great forest at the foot of
the mountains, especially when the snow lay on the ground; but they
inquired much what kind of a guide we had gotten that would venture to
bring us that way in such a severe season, and told us it was very much
we were not all devoured. When we told them how we placed ourselves, and
the horses in the middle, they blamed us exceedingly, and told us it was
fifty to one but we had been all destroyed; for it was the sight of the
horses which made the wolves so furious, seeing their prey; and that, at
other times, they are really afraid of a gun; but the being excessive
hungry, and raging on that account, the eagerness to come at the horses
had made them senseless of danger; and that if we had not, by the
continued fire, and at last by the stratagem of the train of powder,
mastered them, it had been great odds but that we had been torn to
pieces; whereas had we been content to have sat still on horseback, and
fired as horsemen, they would not have taken the horses for so much
their own, when men were on their backs, as otherwise; and withal they
told us, that at last, if we had stood all together, and left our
horses, they would have been so eager to have devoured them, that we
might have come off safe, especially having our firearms in our hands,
and being so many in number.

For my part, I was never so sensible of danger in my life; for seeing
above three hundred devils come roaring and open-mouthed to devour us,
and having nothing to shelter us or retreat to, I gave myself over for
lost; and as it was, I believe I shall never care to cross those
mountains again. I think I would much rather go a thousand leagues by
sea, though I were sure to meet with a storm once a week.

I have nothing uncommon to take notice of in my passage through France;
nothing but what other travellers have given an account of with much
more advantage than I can. I travelled from Toulouse to Paris, and
without any considerable stay came to Calais, and landed safe at Dover,
the 14th of January, after having had a severe cold season to travel in.

I was now come to the centre of my travels, and had in a little time all
my new-discovered estate safe about me, the bills of exchange which I
brought with me having been very currently paid.

My principal guide and privy councillor was my good ancient widow; who,
in gratitude for the money I had sent her, thought no pains too much, or
care too great, to employ for me; and I trusted her so entirely with
everything, that I was perfectly easy as to the security of my effects;
and indeed I was very happy from my beginning, and now to the end, in
the unspotted integrity of this good gentle-woman.

And now I began to think of leaving my effects with this woman and
setting out for Lisbon, and so to the Brazils. But now another scruple
came in my way, and that was religion; for as I had entertained some
doubts about the Roman religion even while I was abroad, especially in
my state of solitude, so I knew there was no going to the Brazils for
me, much less going to settle there, unless I resolved to embrace the
Roman Catholic religion without any reserve; unless on the other hand I
resolved to be a sacrifice to my principles, be a martyr for religion,
and die in the Inquisition. So I resolved to stay at home, and if I
could find means for it, to dispose of my plantation.

To this purpose I wrote to my old friend at Lisbon, who in return gave
me notice that he could easily dispose of it there; but that if I
thought fit to give him leave to offer it in my name to the two
merchants, the survivors of my trustees, who lived in the Brazils, who
must fully understand the value of it, who lived just upon the spot,
and whom I knew were very rich, so that he believed they would be fond
of buying it, he did not doubt but I should make 4000 or 5000 pieces of
eight the more of it.

Accordingly I agreed, gave him order to offer it to them, and he did so;
and in about eight months more, the ship being then returned, he sent me
an account that they had accepted the offer, and had remitted 33,000
pieces of eight to a correspondent of theirs at Lisbon to pay for it.

In return, I signed the instrument of sale in the form which they sent
from Lisbon, and sent it to my old man, who sent me bills of exchange
for 32,800 pieces of eight to me, for the estate; reserving the payment
of 100 moidores a year to him, the old man, during his life, 50 moidores
afterwards to his son for his life, which I had promised them, which the
plantation was to make good as a rent-charge. And thus I have given the
first part of a life of fortune and adventure, a life of Providence's
chequer-work, and of a variety which the world will seldom be able to
show the like of; beginning foolishly, but closing much more happily
than any part of it ever gave me leave so much as to hope for.

Any one would think that in this state of complicated good fortune I was
past running any more hazards; and so indeed I had been, if other
circumstances had concurred. But I was inured to a wandering life, had
no family, not many relations, nor, however rich, had I contracted much
acquaintance; and though I had sold my estate in the Brazils, yet I
could not keep the country out of my head, and had a great mind to be
upon the wing again; especially I could not resist the strong
inclination I had to see my island, and to know if the poor Spaniards
were in being there, and how the rogues I left there had used them.

My true friend, the widow, earnestly dissuaded me from it, and so far
prevailed with me, that for almost seven years she prevented my running
abroad, during which time I took my two nephews, the children of one of
my brothers, into my care. The eldest having something of his own, I
bred up as a gentleman, and gave him a settlement of some addition to
his estate after my decease. The other I put out to a captain of a ship,
and after five years, finding him a sensible, bold, enterprising young
fellow, I put him into a good ship, and sent him to sea; and this young
fellow afterwards drew me in, as old as I was, to farther adventures
myself.

In the meantime, I in part settled myself here; for, first of all, I
married, and that not either to my disadvantage or dissatisfaction, and
had three children, two sons and one daughter; but my wife dying, and my
nephew coming home with good success from a voyage to Spain, my
inclination to go abroad, and his importunity, prevailed, and engaged me
to go in his ship as a private trader to the East Indies. This was in
the year 1694.

In this voyage I visited my new colony in the island, saw my successors
the Spaniards, had the whole story of their lives, and of the villains I
left there; how at first they insulted the poor Spaniards, how they
afterwards agreed, disagreed, united, separated, and how at last the
Spaniards were obliged to use violence with them; how they were
subjected to the Spaniards; how honestly the Spaniards used them; a
history, if it were entered into, as full of variety and wonderful
accidents as my own part; particularly also as to their battles with the
Caribbeans, who landed several times upon the island, and as to the
improvement they made upon the island itself; and how five of them made
an attempt upon the mainland, and brought away eleven men and five women
prisoners, by which, at my coming, I found about twenty young children
on the island.

Here I stayed about twenty days, left them supplies of all necessary
things, and particularly of arms, powder, shot, clothes, tools, and two
workmen, which I brought from England with me, viz., a carpenter and a
smith.

Besides this, I shared the island into parts with them, reserved to
myself the property of the whole, but gave them such parts respectively
as they agreed on; and having settled all things with them, and engaged
them not to leave the place, I left them there.

From thence I touched at the Brazils, from whence I sent a bark, which I
bought there, with more people, to the island; and in it, besides other
supplies, I sent seven women, being such as I found proper for service,
or for wives to such as would take them. As to the Englishmen, I
promised them to send them some women from England, with a good cargo of
necessaries, if they would apply themselves to planting; which I
afterwards performed; and the fellows proved very honest and diligent
after they were mastered, and had their properties set apart for them. I
sent them also from the Brazils five cows, three of them being big with
calf, some sheep, and some hogs, which, when I came again, were
considerably increased.

But all these things, with an account how three hundred Caribbees came
and invaded them, and ruined their plantations, and how they fought with
that whole number twice, and were at first defeated and three of them
killed; but at last a storm destroying their enemies' canoes, they
famished or destroyed almost all the rest and renewed and recovered the
possession of their plantation, and still lived upon the island;--all
these things, with some very surprising incidents in some new adventures
of my own, for ten years more, I may perhaps give a farther account of
hereafter.


  +-----------------------------------------------------------------+
  |                                                                 |
  | Transcriber's Note:--                                           |
  |                                                                 |
  | Punctuation errors have been corrected.                         |
  |                                                                 |
  | The following suspected printer's errors have been addressed.   |
  |                                                                 |
  | Page 56. lines changed to lives.                                |
  | (think of saving our lives)                                     |
  |                                                                 |
  | Page 96. meat changed to meal.                                  |
  | (bag of chicken's meal)                                         |
  |                                                                 |
  | Page 167. stetched changed to stretched.                        |
  | (I stretched across this eddy)                                  |
  |                                                                 |
  | Page 193. short changed to shore.                               |
  | (seeing the shore spread)                                       |
  |                                                                 |
  | Page 333. wot changed to two.                                   |
  | (the two merchants)                                             |
  |                                                                 |
  | Page 340. montrously changed to monstrously.                    |
  | (so monstrously heavy)                                          |
  |                                                                 |
  | Illustrations have been moved away from mid paragraphs and the  |
  | list of illustrations updated to reflect the new locations.     |
  | The FACING PAGE heading in the index has been changed to PAGE.  |
  |                                                                 |
  +-----------------------------------------------------------------+


[The end of _Robinson Crusoe_ by Daniel DeFoe]